Proalysis

100% Construction Documents – Specifications St.
John Hall
Choate Rosemary Hall
August
July12,
31, 2013
SECTION 22 08 00
SECTION 220800 - COMMISSIONING
- COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING
OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of the commissioning
process without regard to specific systems, assemblies, and components.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section 01 91 13 Commissioning General Requirements for general
commissioning process activities.
2. Division 22 – Plumbing
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning Plan: A document, prepared by CxA, that outlines the organization, schedule,
allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. This
Plan is included in Volume 4 of these specifications. These Checklists are included in the
Commissioning Plan which is in Section 4 of these specifications.
B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
C. Quality Assurance: A program for the systematic monitoring and evaluation of the various
aspects of a system, assembly, or component to ensure that standards of quality are being met.
This is the responsibility of the CxA.
D. Quality Control: A system for ensuring the maintenance of proper standards in systems,
assemblies, and components. This is the responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Official: State or Local official having jurisdiction over the conveying systems
F. Systems, Assemblies, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean “as-built” systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
A. The CxA shall provide Construction Checklists to the Contractors for execution that will
indicate expected Quality Control features required for a highest-quality installation. The
contractor shall complete the checklists as construction progresses and return them to the CxA
as indicated in Section 01 91 13 Commissioning General Requirements.
B. Checklists for this section will include:
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 08 00 - 1

100% Construction Documents – Specifications St. John Hall
August
July12,
31,2013
2013
1. Domestic Water system
C. A sample installation checklist is included to show the typical scope and rigor of the process.
3.2 PREREQUISITES TO TESTING
A. Prior to the testing of these systems or assemblies, the Contractor shall certify that:
1. The system or assembly is completely installed, functional, and documented.
2. Work performed by other trades, but essential for this system or assembly’s operation, is
complete (e.g., electrical components are wired and power is provided)
3. All contractor-performed start-up procedures and tests are complete and documented.
4. The system or assembly is ready for the Owner to take beneficial use.
3.3 SYSTEM OR ASSEMBLY TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. The CxA will provide Functional Performance Test procedures to the Contractor for execution
for the following specific systems, assemblies, and components:
1. Domestic hot water equipment and systems
B. Acceptance criteria and test details will be in accordance with the related sections including the
following:
1. Division 01 Section 019113 Commissioning General Requirements for general
1. Division 22 – Plumbing
C. A sample functional performance test is included to show the typical scope and rigor of the
process.
3.4 TEST REPORTS
A. Provide copies of all reports required in the listed reference sections (see Section 1.02
SUMMARY above for the sections) for review.
3.5 SAMPLE FORMS

August
July12,
31,2013
2013
Sample Installation Checklist
General Plumbing Pipe Installation
Schedule ID# from drawings: Piping System: _________________ Location
__________________________
Reference Specification: 15400
Reference Drawing:
Model Verification
Specified Submitted Installed
Construction
Standards
Installation Checks
ID Description Pass/fail Comments
Water piping :
1. Below ground water service piping 4” and larger shall be cement lined ductile
1 iron pipe and fittings.
2. Above ground potable and non-potable water systems: ½”-4” Type L copper
tubing with soldered joints.
Gas Piping:
2 1. Aboveground exterior and interior gas and vents shall be schedule 40 steel pipe
2. Fittings 2-1/2” and less shall be screwed type for 3” and larger shall be welded.
Verify sleeves are installed for pipes passing through concrete walls or floors, ½” air
3
space around pipe to sleeve and sealed to make smoke/fire proof.
Verify that proper provisions for expansion and contraction of the hot water piping
4 systems piping is provided by means of pipe bends, pipe offsets, swing connections or
changes in direction of piping.
5 Verify that hose and drain valves are provided for complete draining of the system.
Verify that all high point in closed water piping systems have either equipment venting or
6
manual vents installed.
Natural Gas piping:
1. Verify piping pitches to drains at drip legs at least 6” long.
2. Verify shut off valve is installed at each equipment connection on the
7
downstream side of any regulators and installed in accessible location.
3. Piping is securely fastened, separately hung and not strapped or supporting other
devices.
Identification:
1. Verify color coded piping identification makers on piping systems are installed
8
including flow direction markings: Identify equipment such as pumps,
compressors, water heaters, and tanks with names and equipment numbers.
Verify Plumbing piping, fittings, and valves Insulation:
9
All interior water piping.
Approvals (only one required)

Name (printed neatly) Signature Date
Contractor/Manuf. Rep.
Engineer
Construction Administrator
Commissioning Agent

August
July12,
31,2013
2013
Functional Performance Test
Plumbing Fixtures
1. Participants
Name/Representing Participation (Testing, Witness, etc)
Owners Representative
Party filling out this form ____________________________ Date of test __________
2. Prerequisite Checklist
a. An as-built version of the plumbing drawing has been provided.

b. The plumbing contractor has certified that their internal commissioning is complete and the
project is ready for third-party verification. PC initials: ________. Date: ________.
c. The general contractor has certified that the construction is substantially complete and ready
for third-party verification. GC initials: ________. Date: ________.
3. Functional Testing Procedures
Test Fixture Test Expected Pass/Fail

Comments
Sequence Type Procedure Results
Operate each Fixtures will operate
faucet and and drain.
water closet to Automatic flush
verify water valves will not cause
1 Fixtures connections and splashing. For sinks
pressure. and lavs, hot water
will be on the left,
cold on the right.
Measure hot Water temp shall not

water exceed 115degrees
2 Fixtures temperature at
each sink and
lavatory.
Operate all All Sensor
Electronic operated fixtures
3 Fixtures
Sensors shall respond as
designed
END OF TEST
END OF SECTION 22 08 00

100% Construction Documents – Specifications St John Hall
August 12, 2013
SECTION 22 10 00
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SUMMARY...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 3
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.5 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................... 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 7
2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................... 7

2.2 PIPING, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS ................................................................................................. 7
2.3 PIPING MATERIALS.................................................................................................................... 10
2.4 VALVES......................................................................................................................................... 10
2.5 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES .......................................................................................................... 12
2.6 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS .............................................................. 13
2.7 CLEANOUTS................................................................................................................................. 15
2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS........................................................................................................ 15
2.9 WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS..................................................................................... 16
2.10 WATER FILTER ASSEMBLIES .................................................................................................. 16
2.11 DRAINS.......................................................................................................................................... 16
2.12 TRAPS AND INTERCEPTORS .................................................................................................... 17
2.13 PIPING INSULATION .................................................................................................................. 17
2.14 THERMOMETERS ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.15 PRESSURE GAUGES.................................................................................................................... 18
2.16 ELECTRIC COMPONENTS ......................................................................................................... 19
2.17 EQUIPMENT FINISH.................................................................................................................... 19
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 19
3.1 EXAMINATION/PREPARATION................................................................................................ 19
3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ATTACHMENTS....................................................................... 19
3.3 SOIL, WASTE, VENT, AND RAIN WATER PIPING ................................................................. 20
3.4 CLEANOUTS................................................................................................................................. 21
3.5 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPING ........................................................................................ 21
3.6 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS ............................................................................................................... 22
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY ITEMS .................................................................................. 23
3.8 EQUIPMENT ROUGHINGS AND CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 24
3.9 CROSS CONNECTION PROTECTION AND APPROVALS ..................................................... 24
3.10 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES ................................................................................................. 25
3.11 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS..................................................................................... 25
3.12 FUEL GAS PIPING........................................................................................................................ 26
3.13 ANCHORS, EXPANSION JOINTS AND OFFSETS ................................................................... 27
3.14 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 27
3.15 CORE DRILLING .......................................................................................................................... 28
3.16 TESTING........................................................................................................................................ 28
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 10 00 - i
d:\ddriveold_folders\a1202-choate\a1202-specifications\a1202-cd specifications\a1202-100% cd specifications\221000 plumbing systems-8-12-13.doc
August 12, 2013
3.17 PIPING INSULATION .................................................................................................................. 28

3.18 ADJUSTMENTS AND BALANCING .......................................................................................... 29
3.19 OEM CONTROLS INTEGRATION.............................................................................................. 31
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 10 00 - ii
August 12, 2013
SECTION 22 10 00
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: The work of this Section is governed by the General and
Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Sections in Division 1, and Section 20 05 00
of this Project Manual.
B. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as
specified or indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work
of this Section with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional
installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and backcharges, and obtain
necessary approvals from authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with the Contract Documents.
D. Commissioning
1. The work of this Section includes meeting the commissioning requirements as

specified in Section 01 91 13. The work includes producing start up
documentation including pre-functional checklists, operation and maintenance
documentation and the training required for the systems.
a. In addition to the startup of equipment and systems, include the time

required to be on site to perform functional testing of the equipment and
systems being commissioned as specified in the Commissioning
Specification in Section 01 91 13.
E. In general, the work of this Section shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Soil, waste, and vent piping systems to 10 feet outside the building.
2. Cold water system to 10 feet outside the building.
3. Hot water supply and circulation piping systems.
4. Rainwater piping system to 10 feet outside the Building foundation wall.
5. Non-potable HVAC make up water piping systems to the point of connection to
the Division 23/Section 23 06 00 system.
6. Fuel gas piping system.
7. Water meters and backflow preventers.
8. Valves, unions, and flanges.
9. Floor drains.
10. Piping insulation.
11. Hangers, supports, and attachments.
12. Plumbing demolition.
13. Core drilling.
14. Sleeves and escutcheons.
15. Underslab drainage systems.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 10 00 - 1
August 12, 2013
16. Domestic hot water system balancing.
F. Furnish following items for installation under other Sections:
1. Starters.
2. Access Panels.
G. Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Excavation, Filling, and Rough Grading: Trench excavation, pipe bedding, and
backfilling.
2. Water Distribution
3. Sewerage and Drainage.
4. Cast-In-place Concrete: Housekeeping pads and inertia pads for vibrating

equipment.
5. Cutting and Patching: Openings in masonry, concrete, tile, and other parts of
structure, except drilling for hangers, providing holes and openings in metal
decks, and core drilling.
6. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Flashing of roof penetrations and roof drains.
7. Access Panels: Access to concealed valves, cleanouts, and water hammer

arrestors.
8. Painting.
9. Firestops and Smokeseals: Caulking of pipe penetrations through floor slabs and
fire-rated partitions.
10. Electrical: Electrical Power and Alarm Wiring.
11. Metal Fabrications: Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from

equipment to roof or floor.
12. Temporary Facilities and Controls: Sanitary facilities for use during
construction.
13. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints.
14. Plumbing Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures, trim, and supports.
15. Plumbing Equipment
16. HVAC – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
17. Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements
August 12, 2013
H. Allowances: Refer to Division 1 for description of work under this Section requiring
Allowances.
I. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 for description of work under this Section affected by
Alternates.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
1. No. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code (2002)

2. No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) (2005)
3. No. 101 - Life Safety Code (2006)
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
1. Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI A117.7 - Providing accessibility and usability for physically handicapped

people.
2. ANSI A13.1 - Identification of piping systems.
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District
1. Rule #1168 VOC Limits.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled, licensed plumbers who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the installation and testing of the specified systems and who
are completely familiar with the requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of the work of this Section.
1. Balancing Agency Qualifications
a. The testing, adjusting and balancing agency shall meet the qualifications
specified below to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust
and balance the domestic hot water systems. Services shall include
checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and
establishment of the temperatures of the domestic hot water systems as
required to meet design specifications and recording and reporting the
results.
August 12, 2013
b. The testing, adjusting and balancing agency shall be certified by the

National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in the hydraulic
testing and balancing disciplines required for this project and having at
least one plumber licensed in the state in which the services are to be
performed, certified by AABC or NEBB as a Test and Balance Engineer.
B. Substitutions: Comply with the Instructions to Bidders, Division 1 and Section 20 05 00

- Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements.
C. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed, and tested as specified in latest
editions of applicable publications, standards, and ruling of:
1. Local and State building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire, and health
department codes.
2. American Gas Association (AGA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American Insurance Association (A.I.A.), formerly National Board of Fire

Underwriters.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
8. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
D. Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following

organizations form part of Contract Documents:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
6. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI).
7. American Welding Society (AWS).
8. Copper Development Association (CDA)
9. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS)
E. Specific reference is made to the following Standards of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) which shall govern provision of work as specified and as required
by codes and authorities:

2. No. 70 - National Electrical Code (2005)
3. No. 101 - Life Safety Code (2006)
August 12, 2013
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical

and Electrical Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit product data submittals for materials and equipment specified in
Part 2 of this Section including, but not limited to:
1. Floor drains.
2. Hose bibbs and wall hydrants.
3. Piping, fittings and valves.
4. Unions, flanges, and couplings.
5. Piping insulation.
6. Valves, regulators and meters.
7. Water hammer arrestors.
8. Hubless piping couplings.
9. Backflow preventers.
10. Hangers, supports, and attachments.
11. Vibration isolation and flexible connections.
12. Domestic hot water balancing reports and certification.
13. Data sheets for products containing VOCs shall include the VOC limit as part of
the submittal.
C. Certifications: Submit copies of Installer certifications and training confirmation for

manufacturer required product installation training, including but not limited to:
D. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings in accordance with the provisions of Division
1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual in compliance with Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and
Electrical Requirements, and the additional requirements of this Section.
F. Prepare and submit shop drawings, O&M manuals and perform training as indicated on
the following matrix.
August 12, 2013
Shop O&M Spare

Products Dwgs Man. Parts Trainin
List g
PIPING, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
PIPING MATERIALS
VALVES
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND
ATTACHMENTS
CLEANOUTS
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS
WATER FILTER ASSEMBLIES
DRAINS
TRAPS AND INTERCEPTORS
INSULATION
THERMOMETERS
PRESSURE GAUGES
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS
EQUIPMENT FINISH
1.5 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare manuals in compliance with Division 1,

Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements, and the additional
requirements of this Section. In addition to the requirements of other Sections, each
manual shall include:
1. Product data cut sheets and approved shop drawings for equipment and materials
as specified in this Section.
2. Copies of all backflow preventer permits.
3. Certification of domestic water system disinfection.
4. Adjustment and balancing certification.
5. Equipment Start-Up Reports.
August 12, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment provided under this Section shall be in conformance with the
Code referenced Standards and be in compliance with all State and Local codes and
regulations.
1. All products shall be installed in compliance with the product listing

requirements.
2.2 PIPING, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS
A. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems:
1. Buried piping:
a. Asphaltum-coated, ASTM A74 service-weight, cast iron pipe and fittings

with lead and oakum calk or ASTM C564 resilient neoprene gasket
joints.
b. Type 301 stainless steel heavy duty hubless couplings may be used for
connections to existing buried systems.
c. Schedule 40 PVC Drainage Waste and Vent Piping and fittings with
solvent welded joints.
2. Above-ground piping:
a. 4-inch and larger: Hub-less cast-iron pipe and fittings heavy-duty

stainless steel no-hub couplings.
b. Waste and vent piping 3 inches and smaller: Standard weight galvanized
steel pipe with galvanized cast-iron drainage fittings or Hub-less cast-
iron pipe and fittings or Type “L” copper with cast brass drainage fittings
and solder joints.
c. Vent Piping: Hub-less cast iron pipe and fittings or standard-weight

galvanized steel pipe with galvanized cast-iron drainage fittings.
d. Schedule 40 PVC Drainage Waste and Vent Piping and fittings with
solvent welded joints.
3. Urinal waste piping:
a. Service weight cast iron pipe and fittings with lead and oakum caulk
joints.
b. Threaded cast iron pipe and fittings.
August 12, 2013
4. Building drain cleanout at foundation wall:
a. Service weight cast iron pipe and fittings with lead and oakum caulked
joints.
b. Below slab on grade: Provide flush floor cleanout.
c. Above finish floor: Provide brass cleanout plug.
B. Water System:
1. Above ground piping, 2 1/2 inches and smaller:
a. Hard drawn Type L copper with wrought copper or cast brass fittings
with 95-5 lead-free solder joints or Viega ProPress mechanical joints.
2. Above ground piping, 2 inches and larger:
a. Hard drawn Type L copper pipe with wrought copper or cast bronze
fittings with soldered joints or roll grooved joints with ductile iron
mechanical couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads.
3. Buried piping, 3 inches and smaller:
a. Type "K" annealed (soft) copper with wrought copper fittings and brazed
connections installed with no buried joints.
4. Trap Primer Piping:
a. Buried: Type K, soft copper with wrought copper fittings and soldered
joints with no buried joints. Provide Armaflex 2000 or equal elastomeric
expanded closed cell insulation on buried piping.
b. Above Grade: Type L, soft copper with wrought copper fittings and
soldered joints.
5. Buried piping, sizes 4 inches and larger: Provide Class 56 cement-lined ductile
iron pipe and fittings with restrained mechanical joints.
a. Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151-A21.51.

b. Cement Lining: ANSI/AWWA C104-A21.4.
c. Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C110-A21.10.
d. Gasket: ANSI/AWWA C111-A21.11.
C. Fuel Gas and Gas Train Vent:
1. 2 inches and smaller: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable iron screwed
fittings.
August 12, 2013
2. 2½ inches and larger: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with welded joints.
3. Exterior exposed above grade: Polymer coated, schedule 40 black pipe and
fittings with welded joints.
4. Exterior buried: Polyethylene gas pipe and fittings in conformance with ASTM
D 2513 identified as “Gas” and “ASTM D 2513”. Provide electronically
detectable yellow warning tape equal to Terra Tape identified as “Gas Piping
Below” buried 12 inches to 15 inches above piping.
D. Hubless Piping Couplings:
1. Heavy-Duty Couplings: Provide heavy-duty stainless steel hubless piping

couplings equal to Anaco Husky Series 4000, Tyler Wide-Body, Mission
Heavyweight C-series or Clamp-All.
a. 1-½ inches to 4 inches in size: 4 bands.

b. 5 inches and larger in size: 6 bands.
2. Regular-Duty Couplings: CISPI couplings may be used on vent piping and 3-

inch and smaller waste branches.
E. Indirect Waste Piping:
1. Galvanized Schedule 40 ASTM A53 steel pipe with galvanized malleable iron
fittings.
2. Type "L" copper with sweated connections.
3. Exposed 1½ inches and smaller: chrome plated brass, threaded connections and
fittings.
F. Rain Water Piping:
1. Above Ground: Hubless cast-iron pipe and fittings with heavy-duty stainless
steel hubless couplings or galvanized steel pipe with galvanized cast-iron
drainage fittings and threaded joints.
2. Buried: Asphaltum-coated, service-weight, cast-iron pipe, and fittings with

resilient gasket joints.
3. Building drain cleanout at foundation wall:
a. Service weight cast iron pipe and fittings with lead and oakum caulked
joints.
b. Below slab on grade: Provide flush floor cleanout.
c. Above finish floor: Provide brass cleanout plug.
August 12, 2013
2.3 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the Collective
Trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or be manufactured by an ISO 9001
Certified foundry in compliance with ASTM A 888-98.
1. Service Weight Cast Iron: ASTM A74-98

2. Hubless Cast Iron: CISPI 301-00 or ASTM A 888-98.
B. Type “L” Copper Tubings
1. Pipe: ASTM B88, hard temper.

2. Fittings: Wrought copper
C. Ductile Iron Piping:
1. Pipe: ANSI / AWWA C151-A21.10

2. Fittings: ANSI / AWWA C110-A21.10
3. Cement Lining: ANSI / AWWA C104-A21.4
4. Gasket: ANSI / AWWA C111-A21.11
D. High-Silicone Cast Iron Piping:
1. Pipe: ASTM A-518 and A-861
E. Resilient Gaskets:
1. Rubber: ASTM C564-70.
F. Galvanized or Black Steel Pipe:
1. Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM A53.

2. Fittings: Service weight cast iron
G. Unions:
1. For copper lines, provide brass-threaded unions.
2. For connections in iron pipe lines 2-½ inches and smaller, provide ground joint
brass-to-iron unions.
H. Solder:
1. Domestic water, 95-5 lead-free. ASTM B32.

2. Waste and vent, 50-50. ASTM B32.
2.4 VALVES
A. Gate Valves: Acceptable manufacturers – Watts, American, Kennedy or Watts.
August 12, 2013
1. Provide 3 inch and larger, rubber encapsulated cast iron wedge disc, MSS-SP70
outside screw and yoke gate valves rated for 175 psig and 140 degrees F.
2. Watts Series 408-OSY-RW flanged epoxy coated cast iron outside screw and
yoke gate valve.
3. Non-rising stem valves: Watts Series 406-NRS-RW flanged epoxy coated cast
iron gate valve with handwheel. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where
there is insufficient clearance for outside screw and yoke gate valves.
B. Ball Valves: Acceptable manufacturers: - Watts, Apollo, Hammond or Nibco.
1. Provide: two- piece bronze body, full-port TFE seats with solid brass chrome-
plated ball and stem extension.
2. 2-½ inches and smaller: Apollo 77-200 or Watts B-6080.
3. 2-½ inches and smaller: Apollo 82-100/200 or Watts B-6800.
4. Drain Valves: Watts B-6000CC, Apollo 78-203 ¾-inch hose connection with
Watts 8A vacuum breaker, and cap and chain
C. Balancing Valves:
1. Provide combination calibrated balancing valves equal to Tour & Anderson

Series 786/787.
D. Fuel Gas Shutoff Valves
1. 2½ inches and smaller: Apollo 77.100 full port bronze body with tee handle or
Watts B-6000 UL-Mass.
2. 2-½ inches and larger: Nordstrom 143, Serck Audco LSW-133-GG, or

Walworth 175 psi working pressure iron body lubricated plug valve with flanged
ends.
E. Check Valves:
1. 3 inches and smaller: Provide Crane No. 37, bronze, screwed, Y-pattern, 200#
WOG.
2. 4 inches and larger: Provide Watts 411, Crane No. 373, IBBM, flanged 200 lbs.
WOG.
F. Fuel Gas Check Valves:
1. Eclipse series 1000, 150 lb. Class bronze body swing check, aluminum disk,
screwed cap and threaded ends.
August 12, 2013
G. Strainers:
1. 2-½ inches and smaller: Bronze body, stainless steel screens, 300 psi working
pressure, threaded end with blow-off valved and piped to drain, by Watts 777
series, Mueller No. 751, Braukman FY-32 or Strong SYB.
2. 3 inches and larger: Epoxy coated, iron body, stainless steel screens, 175 psi
working pressure, flanged end with blow-off valved and piped to drain, by Watts
77FD1-FDA Mueller No. 751, Braukman FH33 or Strong F1.
H. Thermostatic Mixing Valves (TMV):
1. Master thermostatic mixing valves, TMV: ASSE 1017
a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Symmons, Powers or Lawler.
b. Symmons TempControl 6-000A Series thermostatically controlled

bronze body, pressure balanced stainless steel piston, with spring-loaded
check stops.
2. Local thermostatic mixing valves: Provide ASSE 1070 Listed safety valves for
multiple fixture use equal to Watts MMV-M1, Symmons 5-225-CK or Powers
HydroGuard Series LM495.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watts, Symmons, Sparco.
I. Backwater Valves (BWV):
1. Gravity waste backwater valves: Cast-iron, bronze-mounted, hub end. Exterior

shall be mastic-coated, bolted, or extended cover in accordance with details on
drawings.
2. Interior shall be epoxy-or polypropylene-coated for use in special waste system.

J.R. Smith 7012-7022, Josam 1100 Series, or Zurn Z-1090 Series.
2.5 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
A. Vacuum Relief Valves: Watts 36A, bronze body, silicon, disc, 200 PSI working pressure,
and 250 degrees F temperature rating. ANSI Z21.22, A.G.A. Certified.
B. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves: Watts or approved equal in compliance with
ANSI Z21.22, A.G.A. Certified.
C. Trap Primers, (TP):
1. TP-1 for use on ½-inch supply lines: Watts A200S, J.R. Smith Fig. 2699-1 cast
bronze body with 1/2-inch sweat connections.
2. TP-2 for use on Lavatory P-Trap: J.R. Smith water saver Fig 2698, 17-gauge,
chrome-plated P-trap with trap primer tap and supply with escutcheons.
August 12, 2013
D. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Acceptable manufacturers: Smith, Zurth, Watts, PPP or Wade.
2. Provide PDI-Certified ASSE 1010 compliant devices sized and installed in

accordance with PDI standard WH201 equal to Watts series 15.
E. Dielectric Fittings:
1. Unions: Watts 3000 Series.

2. Flanges: Watts 3100 Series.
3. Nipples: Clearflow 19000 Series.
F. Vent terminal Caps: Jay R. Smith 1748, Wade 3690, Zurn Z193 or Watts RD-680-VC.
G. Air Relief Valves: APCO No. 61.
2.6 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Provide hangers, rods, and attachments to support the Work of this Section from the
building structure with UL-listed or FM-approved attachments. Provide oversized
hangers on insulated piping.
B. Water Piping:
1. 3 inches and smaller: Provide B-Line Systems Inc. Fig. B3104 light duty clevis
hangers or Fig. B3174C and B3174CT band hangers.
2. 4 inches and larger: Provide B-Line Systems Inc. Fig. B3100 clevis hangers over
insulation with 12-inch long galvanized insulation shields with supporting rods.
3. Riser clamps: B- Line Systems Inc. Fig. B3373CT copper-plated steel.
4. 2 inches and smaller within toilet chase: Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 81 CT
copper- plated malleable iron with Fig. 94CT copper-plated steel rod.
5. Gang Hangers: Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 342 adjustable gang hanger with
clips.
6. Insulation Shields: Provide 12 inch long insulation shields on piping 1½ inches

and larger.
C. Drainage Piping:
1. Horizontal Supports: Provide B-Line Systems Inc. Fig. B3100 clevis hangers
with supporting rods and adjustable turnbuckles.
August 12, 2013
2. Riser Clamps: Provide B-Line Systems Inc. Fig. B3373 riser clamps at each
floor and as required.
3. Insulation Shields: Provide oversized hangers with 12-inch long galvanized

insulation shields on rainwater piping.
4. Buried Piping Hangers: All pipe hanger components for buried piping shall be
304/316 stainless steel equal to FM Stainless Fasteners LLC.
D. Gas Piping:
1. Provide Fee and Mason No. 212 split ring hangers with supporting rods.
E. Structure Attachments:
1. Acceptable manufacturers: Carpenter & Patterson, B-Line Systems, Globe,

Grinnell and Michigan.
2. C-Clamps: C & P Fig. 192 with Fig. 192RS Retaining Clamp.
3. Side Beam Clamp: C & P Fig. 217.
4. Ceiling Bolts: For installation in metal decks, Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 143.
F. Provide hanger rods for horizontal piping sized according to the following schedule:
Pipe Size: Rod Size:
2 inches and smaller 3/8-inch

2½ inches and 3 inches 1/2-inch
4 inches and 5 inches 5/8-inch
6 inches 3/4-inch
8 inches and larger 7/8-inch
G. Insulation shields: Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 265P.
1. Provide insulation shields on insulated piping.
Pipe Size: Gauge:
6 inches and smaller 18

8 inches and larger 16
H. Trapeze Hangers: Provide metal strut trapeze hangers by B-Line, Unistrut, or Grinnell
with Clip-It nylon, B-Line Systems Inc. BVT series, or Grinnell PS-1400 insulated pipe
clamps attached to the strut.
I. Insulating Clamps: Provide IPS Corp. Strap-Tite insulating clamps on uninsulated

copper piping installed through metal stud partitions.
August 12, 2013
J. Buried Piping:
1. Prepare trench base with bell holes and uniform slope with compacted bedding to
support the full length of the pipe between the bell holes.
2.7 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior:
1. Provide Smith No. 4235 or Josam No. 8860 with XH cast-iron top in concrete
areas.
B. Floors:
1. Finished Tile Floors: Provide Smith No. 4160 square nickel-bronze top with tile
recess.
2. Carpeted floors: Provide J.R. Smith No. 4021-Y cast iron body with nickel
bronze top and carpet marker.
3. Unfinished Floors: Provide Smith No. 4021 with round cast-iron top.
4. Provide flush-with-floor type cleanouts with adjustable watertight covers and

integral anchoring flange with clamping collar where waterproofing membrane is
used.
C. Finished Walls and Ceilings:
1. Furnish access panels as specified in Sections 08305 and 20 05 00 for installation

under other sections.
D. Provide cleanout plugs of extra-heavy bronze.
2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Provide DEP approved backflow preventers equal to specified number by Watts

Regulator, Hersey/Beeco or Febco.
B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (RPBP): ASSE 1013
1. 2 inches and smaller: Watts 009QTS, bronze body, for hot water Watts 909HW-
QTS stainless steel check seats.
2. 2-½ inches and larger: Watts 909-0SY, epoxy coat cast-iron body, bronze seats,
and stainless steel trim.
3. Provide air gap fitting and indirect waste.
August 12, 2013
C. Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent (BFPAV):
1. ¾ inch and smaller: Watts 9D, bronze body and rubber check valve assembly
with stainless steel internal parts.
D. Pressure type Vacuum Breakers (PVB):
1. In finished areas, Watts 800MC.

2. In mechanical areas, Watts 800.
E. Provide inlet and outlet pressure gauges and strainers on inlets except in fire protection
systems.
F. Provide spare parts kit for each backflow preventer installed and a test kit for each type
installed.
2.9 WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS
A. Wall Hydrant, WH-1: Anti-siphon, non-freeze, key-operated ¾-inch.
B. Hose Bibb HB-1: Hose Bibb shall be ½ -inch with vacuum breaker and removable tee
handle.
2.10 WATER FILTER ASSEMBLIES
A. Drinking Water Filter Assemblies:
1. Pre-Filter: Honeywell Braukmann Model F76, or approved equal, 50 micron

backwashing filter with brass body, clear plastic sump, stainless steel filter mesh,
NBR seals and stainless steel backwash ball valve with serrated discharge outlet.
2. Drinking water filter: Cuno Aqua-Pure Model No. BEV 160 or approved equal
to provide 3.34 GPM service flow rate and 0.2 micron filtration.
B. Equipment Filters: Honeywell Braukmann Model F76, or approved equal, 5 micron

backwashing filter with brass body, clear plastic sump, stainless steel filter mesh, NBR
seals and stainless steel backwash ball valve with serrated discharge outlet.
C. Provide inlet and outlet pressure gauges and required reducers and adapters.
2.11 DRAINS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Products equal to the specified Zurn number by Watts, Josam, Wade, or J. R.

Smith may be submitted for approval.
August 12, 2013
B. Floor Drains - See Schedule On Drawings:
1. Drains located in waterproofed floors of composition materials or of other kinds,

shall be fitted with all required flanges, clamping devices and trim required to
assure watertight conditions, and they shall be made watertight. Provide all other
miscellaneous devices, as required, for a complete installation as approved by
Architect.
C. Area Drains (AD) – See Schedule On Drawings:
1. All area drains shall be the product of one manufacturer such as Zurn Industries,
Watts, J. R. Smith, Wade or pre-approved substitution.
2.12 TRAPS AND INTERCEPTORS
A. Traps:
1. Provide separate traps with integral cleanouts on fixtures and equipment that
require connections to sanitary system, except on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Traps exposed to view, including connecting drain lines, shall be chrome-plated.

Traps shall be of sizes shown on Drawings but shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch.
2.13 PIPING INSULATION
A. Adhesives and Insulation Materials: ASTM E-84 composite fire and smoke hazard rating
maximum 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Smoke Developed. Adhesives shall be
waterproof.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide heavy density fiberglass insulation by Owens-

Corning, Certain-Teed, Knauf, or Schuller.
C. Fire Rated Penetrations: Provide minimum density 3.5 pcf fiberglass insulation through
fire rated partitions or heavier as required by the UL through penetration system number.
D. Plenum Pipe Wrap: 3M Fire Master ceramic fiber plenum wrap to cover plastic piping to
meet UL910 and ASTM E84.
E. Hot water and hot water recirculation piping: 1-inch minimum thickness with all service
jacket (ASJ) and self-sealing lap (SSL).
1. Fittings and Valves: Minimum of two layers of pre-cut fiberglass blanket

insulation with PVC covers.
F. Cold water piping: ½-inch minimum thickness with all service jacket (ASJ), self-sealing
lap (SSL), with tape and continuous vapor seal. Do not use staples.
1. Fittings and Valves: Single layer of pre-cut fiberglass blanket insulation with
PVC covers.
August 12, 2013
G. Horizontal Rain Water Piping (including emergency rainwater piping): ½-inch minimum
thickness with all service jacket self-sealing lap (SSL), with tape and continuous vapor
seal from 12 inches down vertical stack and all horizontal off-sets, up to and including
drain body.
1. Fittings: Provide single layer of pre-cut fiberglass blanket insulation with PVC
covers taped for continuous vapor barrier.
H. Indirect Waste Piping and Trap Primer Piping: 1/2-inch Armaflex 2000 or approved
equal 25/50 rated elastomeric expanded closed-cell insulation. Color: white.
I. Minimum Insulation Thicknesses:
1. Cold water, rainwater, and indirect waste piping: ½-inch.

2. Hot water runout within pipe chase or drop to fixture: ½-inch.
3. Hot water distribution and return piping: 1-inch.
4. 140 degrees F, hot water 2 inches and smaller: 1½ inches
5. 140 degrees F, hot water 2½ inches and larger: provide 2 inches of insulation.
J. Piping Guards: Provide Handi Lav-Guard insulation by Truebro on water supplies and
waste piping below Handicapped Use Lavatories.
2.14 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle design of the separable well type and shall have a
9” cast aluminum case. The scale shall be white with black figures and graduations
embossed on the scale. Thermometers shall be mercury-free manufactured by Trerice
Co. or Dwyer Instrument.
B. Thermometers shall be furnished complete with all necessary sockets, wells, connectors
and accessories required for installation suitable for the service in which installed.
Extension necks shall be furnished for insulation piping.
C. Thermometers shall be furnished with the temperature ranges of 30 degrees F to 100

degrees F for cold water, and of 30 degrees F to 240 degrees F for hot water systems.
Equal to Dwyer or Therice.
2.15 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall have brass movement, aluminum case, double strength clear glass
window with black embossed figures and graduations on a white dial face, with 1%
accuracy of scale range. Gauges shall be manufactured by Trerice Co., Taylor
Instrument, or Marshalltown Mfg. Gauges shall be furnished with snubbers and needle
valve shutoff valves. Provide bleed valves on pressure gauges installed at pumps.
B. Gauges shall be 4½-inch diameter furnished with ranges that will locate the intended
pressure at the point of application approximately midpoint on the range scale. Gauges
for natural gas, vacuum and similar low pressure systems shall be gauges specifically
designed for low pressure applications.
August 12, 2013
C. Pressure gauges shall be furnished with pressure ranges of 0 to 200 psi. Equal to Dwyer
or Trerice.
2.16 ELECTRIC COMPONENTS
A. Provide all electrical components including, but not limited to starters, disconnects,
contactors, and controllers as required for all equipment included under this Section.
Controllers shall be wired to require a single power supply provided under Division 26.
B. All electrical equipment and components shall be listed in compliance with NFPA 70 –
National Electrical Code.
2.17 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be furnished with manufacturer applied
lead-free primer and covered with hard gloss enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION/PREPARATION
A. Inspect existing site conditions in areas where piping and equipment will be installed and
verify existing systems and the impact of the proposed modifications before fabricating
systems to be installed.
B. Notify the Architect immediately regarding any substantially different conditions than
those shown in the Contract Documents.
3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Support all piping included in the work of this section with hangers and rods attached to
the building structure with UL-Listed attachments.
B. Space hangers and support for horizontal steel pipes according to the following schedule:
Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing
1-1/4 inches and smaller 8'-0"

1-1/2 inches to 3 inches 10'-0"
4 inches to 5 inches 12'-0"
C. Space hangers and supports for horizontal copper tubing according to the following
schedule:
Tube Size Maximum Hanger Spacing
1-1/4 inches and smaller 6'-0"

1-1/2 inches 7'-0"
2 inches 8'-0"
August 12, 2013
2-1/2 inches 9'-0"

3 inches and larger 10'-0"
D. Provide sway bracing on hangers longer than 12 inches.
E. Support vertical piping with riser clamps secured to the piping and resting on steel
support sleeve. Provide riser clamp at each floor. Do not set riser clamp on floor
penetration sleeve.
F. Provide insulation continuous through hangers and install hanger outside of insulation.
Protect insulation with galvanized steel shields.
G. Arrange pipe supports to prevent excessive deflection and to avoid excessive bending
stress.
H. Support piping from inserts or anchors in concrete slabs.
I. Provide stainless attachments, rods and hangers to support buried piping below structural
slabs on grade. Provide rigid installation mounted vertically and over piping attached to
hanger rods to eliminate backfill on supported piping.
J. Hubless piping: Provide adequate hangers to maintain alignment and proper pitch and to
prevent sagging of the pipe in compliance with CISPI 310.
1. Provide hangers on the piping within 6 inches of hubless piping couplings at each
change of direction.
2. Provide a minimum of one hanger every 3 feet when supporting three or more
fittings.
3. Provide hangers every 5 feet on horizontal piping except where 10-foot sections
are used. Provide hangers within 12 inches of the coupling.
4. Base of Stacks: Provide concrete or brick and mortar piers or metal brackets
attached to the structure to support the bases of cast-iron stacks.
3.3 SOIL, WASTE, VENT, AND RAIN WATER PIPING
A. Furnish and install piping plumb and parallel to building walls, beams, and columns.
Pitch horizontal lines evenly and properly secured with iron or steel hangers. Maintain a
pitch of ¼-inch per lineal foot on all drainage piping 3 inches unless otherwise indicated.
Piping 4 inches and larger shall be pitched at 1/8 inch per foot.
1. Torque hubless piping clamps to the manufacturers specified torque using the
coupling manufacturers appropriate torque wrench.
2. Extend soil and waste stacks, full size through the roof or connect to a common
vent 6 inches above the fixture flood rim.
August 12, 2013
3. Run vent stacks parallel to the drainage stacks and connect to the stack vent at
least 6 inches above the rim of the highest fixtures on the stack. Drip vent stacks
into the bottom of the drainage stack through a Y and 1/8 bend on an upright Y
fitting below the lowest fixture drain branch. Pitch horizontal vent lines to drain
to fixture or stack.
B. Buried Piping
1. Install buried piping only after the trench has been properly prepared with bell
holes and uniform slope with compacted bedding to support the full length of the
pipe between the bell holes. Piping shall be installed with uniform slope to
maintain a minimum slope of 1/8th inch per foot for sizes 4 inches and larger.
C. Vent Terminals:
1. Extend vents through roof and terminate at least 24 inches above the roof at least
25 feet from fresh air intakes and operable windows.
2. Terminate vents through roof and parking decks 8 feet above the roof with a
vandal proof vent cap. Secure vents to the building structure to be rigid and free
of movement.
3.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts with brass caps and screws same size as pipe up to 4 inches and not
less than 4 inches for larger piping at the ends of all branches on soil and waste piping
and in such other portions of the piping where run is over 50 feet. Locate floor cleanouts
generally as indicated on drawings. Locate flush floor cleanouts in finished lobby floors
as coordinated with the architect on site. Provide extensions from changes in direction to
adjacent rooms or spaces where cleanout locations are approved by the architect.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPING
A. Provide at least 5 feet of exterior cover over service entrance including 5-foot horizontal
distance from areaways.
B. Provide water piping pitched at least 1 inch in 40 feet to allow for complete system
draining. Slope piping to drain through fixtures, equipment or through accessible hose
end drain valves located at low points to allow systems to be drained completely by
gravity flow.
C. Provide riser shut-off valve and hose end drain valves at the base of system risers.
Provide hose end drain valves at system low points where piping cannot be drained to a
fixture.
August 12, 2013
D. Provide isolation shut-off valves on branches to individual fixtures and on branches to

fixture banks. Provide accessible shut-off valves on all cold water piping branches and
risers. Provide accessible shut-off and balancing valves on all hot water circulation
branches and risers. Locate balancing valves at the connection to the circulation main.
Locate valves above accessible ceilings or within 12 inches of approved access panel
locations.
E. Provide swing check valves on the downstream side of shut-off branch piping to
individual fixtures or fixture banks with faucets or mixing valves not equipped with
integral check stops.
F. Provide solder to thread C by M adapter at piping connections to valves or remove valve

core when soldering as recommended by the valve manufacturer.
G. Provide automatic air relief valves at high points where distribution piping cannot be
vented through fixture connections. Provide isolation shut-off valves on air relief valves
and pipe discharge to floor drain or mop service basin.
H. Piping Assembly: Cut piping square with tube cutter or hacksaw. Ream pipe and
remove burrs and slivers from both inside and outside of cut end. Ensure that burrs and
particles do not enter piping. Clean end of pipe and fitting socket with fine sand cloth to
remove dirt and surface film. Do not remove metal.
1. Immediately after cleaning apply a thin film of flux to the surfaces to be

soldered.
2. Assemble joint with a quarter turn to ensure distribution of flux over surfaces to
be joined. Remove excess flux with clean rag. Exercise care to ensure excess
flux is not left inside pipe joint.
3. Solder joint as soon as possible after joint is assembled.
I. Provide insulating shield on copper piping installed through metal stud perforations.
Maintain isolation between copper piping and ferrous metals.
3.6 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS
A. Provide plumbing rough-in installation including fixture carriers and supports, valves and
water hammer arrestors within chase tolerances. Supply roughing through finish walls
and at hose bibbs and shower heads shall be secure and free of movement. Locate valves
and water hammer arrestors within 12 inches of approved access panel location.
B. Align exposed waste and supply pipe roughings with fixture connections within 1 inch
tolerance. Provide roughing to install flush valves in alignment with the fixture, without
vertical or horizontal offsets. Obtain fixture manufacturer roughing data sheets for
recommended roughing dimensions.
C. Rough handicapped use water closets to locate the flush valve handle on the wide side of
the toilet stall. Rough public toilet room hose bibbs 18 inches above finish floor located
below lavatories.
August 12, 2013
D. Secure fixture supports to floor slab construction with lag bolts and metal expansion
shields to support at least 250 pounds on the front rim of the fixture for 5 minutes.
E. Mounting Heights: Comply with Architectural room elevations.
1. Water Closets: 15 inches to rim.
2. Handicapped Use Water Closets: 17 inches to rim.
3. Lavatories: 31 inches to rim
4. Handicapped Use Lavatories: 34 inches maximum to rim with at least 29 inches

from finish floor to bottom of apron.
5. Handicapped Use Urinals: 17 inches to rim maximum and 44 inches maximum

to flush control.
6. Drinking Fountains: 36 inches maximum to spout outlet.
F. Provide fixture rough-in piping connections sizes in accordance with the following
schedule:
HW CW S or W
Water Closets - 1 inch 4 inches
Lavatories 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1-1/2 inches
Urinals - 1 inch 2 inches
Service Sinks 3/4 inch 3/4 inch 3 inches
Sinks 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1-1/2 inches
Drinking Fountains - 1/2 inch 1-1/2 inches
G. Provide floor drains with trap primers and related piping through floor with connections
to primer connections on floor drains located in toilet rooms.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY ITEMS
A. Provide vacuum relief valves located above the top of the heater on cold water supply
lines to water heaters between the isolation valve and the tank. Provide quantity of
vacuum relief valves in accordance with the following schedule:
C.W. Supply 1/2 Inch Valves 3/4 Inch Valves
1 inch 3 1
1-1/4 inches 5 2
1-1/2 inches 7 3
2 inches 10 5
2-1/2 inches - 8
3 inches - 12
August 12, 2013
B. Gauges: Provide gauges where indicated on the drawings and as specified. Provide
pressure gauges at water service entrance on inlet and outlet sides of strainers, filters,
backflow preventers, thermostatic mixing valves and pumps. Provide temperature gauges
on inlet and outlet side of water heaters, thermostatic mixing valves and on hot water
circulation line at least 10 feet upstream of circulation pumps. Gauges shall be legible
from 4 feet to 6 feet above the floor.
1. Hot Water Circulation: Provide temperature gauge within 3 feet of balancing

valves. Gauges shall be visible through access panels.
C. Trap Primers: Provide trap primer and related piping through floor and connection to
primer connection on all floor drains installed in finished areas.
D. Water Hammer Arrestors: Provide water hammer protection at all fixtures and
equipment. Equip quick-closing valves such as flush valves and solenoids, including
make-up water connections to HVAC equipment with water hammer arrestors. Banks of
plumbing fixtures may be protected with a single properly sized and located PDI-
Certified arrestor. Obtain approval for access panel location prior to installation.
3.8 EQUIPMENT ROUGHINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Provide roughing and final connections for water, waste, air and gas systems including
indirect wastes, traps, tailpieces, stops and supplies, valves, reducers, shock absorbers,
adapters and unions for all equipment and fixtures including those supplied under other
sections including ice machines.
B. Provide piping and isolation shut-off valves with unions or flanges at all equipment
connections arranged to allow removal of the equipment without dismantling piping.
C. Provide complete plumbing roughings with capped and valved services with union or
flange to suit Owner furnished equipment, including, but not limited to ice machine.
D. Pipe multiple pieces of parallel equipment such as water heaters, storage tanks, or air
compressors as reverse return to maintain balance of flow through the units.
E. Refer to architectural floor plans and equipment schedules for all equipment provided
under other sections or by Owner. Roughing for all equipment including floor drain
locations shall be based on approved shop drawings. Spill indirect waste discharge into
floor drain funnel. Floor drain grate and sediment bucket shall be removable.
F. Coordinate locations of access panels for valves and slip joints with the Architect prior to
piping rough in.
G. Coordinate floor drain locations with the low point of the floor area being served. Refer
to architectural and structural drawings for location and installation requirements.
3.9 CROSS CONNECTION PROTECTION AND APPROVALS
A. Protect potable water piping outlets and connections to equipment or machinery against
backflow with an air-gap or approved backflow preventer.
August 12, 2013
B. Mount backflow preventers horizontally at heights and with clearances as required by

DEP regulations.
1. Mount reduced pressure backflow preventers between 3 to 4 feet above the floor
to the bottom of the device with a minimum of 12 inches clear space all around.
2. Mount double check valve assemblies between 1 to 4 feet above the floor to the
top of the device with 12 inches clear space all around.
C. Submit plans to DEP and obtain permits for each reduced pressure or double check valve
backflow preventer installation and submit copies of permit to Architect for record.
D. Provide indirect waste piping with funnel to receive discharge from reduced pressure
backflow preventer atmospheric vents and spill through air gap into floor drain.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Mount fixtures level at elevations shown on architectural drawings. Refer to toilet room
elevations and casework details.
B. Mount handicapped use fixtures in accordance with the requirements to the Architectural
Access Board Code and ANSI A117.1. Insulate hot water supply and waste piping under
lavatories.
1. Where urinals are provided, mount one urinal with the rim 17 inches above the
finish floor in compliance with the handicapped code.
C. Grout wall and floor mounted fixtures watertight where the fixtures are in contact with
walls and floors.
D. Caulk deck-mounted trim at the time of assembly, including fixture and casework
mounted. Caulk self-rimming sinks installed in casework.
3.11 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS
A. Flush the pipe system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at all
outlet points.
B. After installing faucets and trim, disinfect the domestic water piping system in
accordance with the following procedure. Open and close all valves and faucets several
times during the specified disinfection standing time.
C. After installing faucets and trim, disinfect the domestic water piping system in
accordance with the following procedure. Open and close all valves and faucets several
times during the specified disinfection standing time.
1. Fill the system with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per
million (50 mg/1) of chlorine and valve-off the system and allow to stand for 24
hours.
August 12, 2013
2. Fill the system with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per
million (200 mg/1) of chlorine and allowed to stand for three hours.
D. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable water until
added chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
E. Repeat the procedure if it is shown by a bacteriological examination made by an

independent testing laboratory that contamination is still present in the system.
3.12 FUEL GAS PIPING
A. Installation and testing shall comply with NFPA 54, State and Local codes, the
requirements of the approving authorities, and the additional requirements of this Section.
Provide piping pitched not less than 1/4-inch in 15-foot slope upward to risers and down
to meter and equipment. Provide branch tees off the side or top of mains and provide 6-
inch minimum size drip legs at low points.
1. Piping from each gas meter shall be individually identified by permanently

attached metal tag identifying the source meter.
B. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are based on schedule 40 black steel. If CSST is used,
pipe sizes shall be adjusted by the contractor and be submitted for approval with
complete plans and calculations, stamped by a Professional Engineer.
C. Provide shut-off valve, reducers, adapters and union or flange at each equipment
connection. Locate valve within 6 feet of equipment served with union downstream of
valve. Provide control valves and shut-off valves in accessible locations. Do not locate
valves above ceilings. Drip leg traps shall be readily accessible.
1. Gas piping and isolation valves serving equipment shall be full sized as indicated
on the drawings up to the inlet of the gas train or connection to equipment.
D. Work of this Section shall start with the emergency shut-off valve at the discharge side of
the meter/regulator assembly installed by the gas supplier.
E. Provide independent gas vent piping from each vent on gas trains and regulators to the
building exterior. Gas vent terminal locations shall be field approved by the Architect.
F. Seismic Earthquake Valves: Provide automatic seismic gas shut-off fire valves on main
gas service immediately after the emergency shut-off valve on the discharge of the gas
meter.
August 12, 2013
3.13 ANCHORS, EXPANSION JOINTS AND OFFSETS
A. Make proper provisions for expansion and contraction in all parts of the hot water and hot
water recirculation piping systems wherever possible by means of pipe bends, pipe
offsets, swing connections or changes in direction of piping. Where piping deflection
cannot be employed to absorb expansion and contraction, furnish expansion joints.
Expansion joints in copper piping shall be two-ply stainless steel bellows protected from
torsion and misalignment by an outer steel or brass casing. Stroke shall provide for a
minimum total expansion of 1¾ inch per hundred feet in copper piping between anchors.
Ratings shall be 150 psig w.p. and 300 degrees F temperature, designed for use with
copper pipe. Expansion joints shall be as manufactured by U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing
Company, Robertshaw-Fulton or approved equal.
B. Provide pipe guides where necessary or required to confine lateral movement and on each
side of expansion loops or expansion joints. Guides for piping 2 inches and under shall
be Teflon lined copper, as manufactured by Keflex-Mave Type “BC” or approved equal.
Guides for piping 2½ inch and up shall be fabricated steel, covered inside and outside
with protective coating, top half removable.
C. All mains and risers having expansion offsets or joins shall be securely anchored to the
building construction in such a manner as to throw all expansion towards the offsets of
joints. All anchors shall be constructed from heavy galvanized iron, secured to the pipe
and securely fastened to the construction. Anchors shall be furnished with turnbuckles or
other suitable means for adjustment. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for
any additional structural items that may be required for proper installation of hangers.
Anchors, guides and supports shall be approved by the Architect.
3.14 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
A. The building automation system shall be furnished and installed under another Section of
the specifications. Provide the tees, pipe wells, valves, and caps to allow the connection
from the BAS system to the plumbing points required. The pH probes, moisture content
meter and resistivity probe shall be provided for BAS tie-in. The following table
itemizes the equipment and location of the type of device necessary to connect to the
BAS system.
Service or equipment Pressure Temperature Flow Trouble Location
Water meter X Basement
Water heaters X Basement
Sewage ejector X Basement
August 12, 2013
3.15 CORE DRILLING
A. Perform all core drilling required for the installation of the plumbing system under the
work of this section. Carry all costs for core drilling. Locate all required openings prior
to coring, coordinate the opening with all other trades. Do not disturb the existing
systems. Thoroughly investigate the existing conditions in the vicinity of the required
opening prior to coring. The contractor performing the core drilling work shall be
responsible for damages to the building and its systems from the coring operations.
Disturbances from coring shall be kept to a minimum.
3.16 TESTING
A. Test the piping installation work of this Section in accordance with the direction of the
reviewing inspectors and the requirements of this Section.
1. All piping systems shall be tested, inspected and accepted before any part of the
system is covered or concealed.
2. Notify the inspecting authority at least 48 hours before tests are scheduled to be
performed.
B. Drainage Systems: Test systems in their entirety or in sections so that every pipe and
joint is subject to a minimum pressure of ten foot head of water for at least 30 minutes.
Air may be used by providing 5 PSIG for at least 30 minutes.
C. Water Piping: Test water piping at 150 percent of the working pressure but not less than
125 PSIG for 30 minutes.
D. Fuel Gas: Maintain a minimum of 150 percent of the working pressure but not less than
3 PSIG for 30 minutes.
3.17 PIPING INSULATION
A. Provide piping insulation on all piping as specified in Part 2 of this Section including but
not limited to water distribution and circulation piping; horizontal storm drainage piping,
storm drain bodies; secondary storm water piping; cooling tower waste piping, indirect
waste and trap primer piping; and sanitary discharge, garage drain traps, force mains,
pump discharge piping and water piping subject to freezing.
1. Insulate all piping located in unheated spaces including but not limited to attics
and parking garages as specified in Part 2 of this Section. Provide insulation over
heat tracing provided under other sections of the specifications.
B. Start installation of piping insulation only after the piping system has been pressure tested
and accepted by the plumbing inspector. Provide insulation continuous through walls,
floors and partitions through sleeves as specified in Section 20 05 00. Provide insulation
continuous through hangers and provide insulation shields. Butt insulation sections
tightly together and secure with water proof tape. Maintain the integrity of the vapor
barrier during installation and replace or repair damaged sections in compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
August 12, 2013
1. Provide two layers of cut blanket insulation with PVC covers over fittings and
valves installed and secured in compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Provide insulation through fire rated walls and assemblies in compliance with the listing
requirements of the Listed Through-Penetration Assembly.
D. Cover insulation exposed to the elements with aluminum jacket with 2” transverse and
longitudinal lapped seams oriented to shed water. Seal seams with weatherproof
adhesive and secure jacket with 1” wide aluminum draw-bands on 12” centers.
E. Cover plastic piping in plenum spaces with ceramic fiber plenum wrap.
F. Provide insulation over heat tracing at least 12 inches beyond the end of the heat trace
cable.
3.18 ADJUSTMENTS AND BALANCING
A. After completing installation work and equipment start-ups, perform the necessary
adjustments to systems installed under this Section. Submit verification that systems are
operating at the specified temperatures and pressures.
B. Adjust pressure relief valves, pressure regulating valves, and thermostatic control valves,
and verify that normally open or closed valves are set in accordance with the Contract
Drawings.
C. Hot Water System Balancing
1. Balancing shall be performed by the approved Balancing Agency.
2. Perform hot water system balancing as necessary to provide circulated hot water
to all remote fixtures. Schedule a minimum period of several days for the
balancing procedure.
a. Provide several days within the construction schedule to allow for system
balancing after water heater start up. System balancing shall be complete
prior to request for final punchlist. The balancing report and certification
shall be approved by the engineer
3. Balancing Procedure
a. Confirm that the water heaters are properly set and producing 140 deg. F
hot water.
b. The master thermostatic mixing valves shall be set by a factory-trained

representative to provide 127 deg. F. Produce hot water flow
downstream of the mixing valve as required to properly set valves as
directed in the manufacturer’s written directions.
August 12, 2013
c. Partially close hot water return system balancing valves closest to the
water heaters to force hot water through longer circulated branches.
After several hours when temperatures have adjusted to the balancing
valve adjustments, measure hot water temperatures at fixtures throughout
the system.
d. Continue to adjust valves by partially closing valves on branches with

hot water to force hot water into branches with inadequate flows of
circulated hot water. Continue until hot water is circulating through all
return branches providing the specified hot water temperatures at all
fixtures.
e. Record temperatures at temperature gauges on each return branch.
f. Record flow at each balancing valve.
g. Hot water temperatures shall be based on the circulation pump alone.

Running hot water to bring temperatures up to specified temperatures for
inspections is unacceptable.
h. Set all balancing stops.
i. Set local thermostatic mixing valves at hand wash sinks and lavatories.
4. After the balancing is complete:
a. Obtain sign off from the owner’s representative;

b. Prepare and submit balancing report and certification, stating valves have
been adjusted, balancing stops are set and the specified hot water
temperatures are being delivered to all fixtures based on the circulation
system.
5. Balancing reports shall include:
a. Temperature readings at all return mains and branches.

b. Flow settings at all measuring type balancing valves.
c. Valve types and settings.
d. Valve sizes, locations and valve tag number.
D. Adjust flush valves, open fixture stops, flush piping and clean all outlets including faucet
aerators.
E. Set aqua-stats on water heaters and circulation pumps to comply with the contract
documents.
F. Adjust metering faucets to deliver a maximum of 1/4 gallon of hot water per cycle and
operate for at least 10 seconds upon activation.
G. Temperature adjustments: Adjust metering faucets in public toilet rooms to provide a

maximum temperature of 110 degrees F.
August 12, 2013
1. Adjust master thermostatic mixing valve assembly at the water heaters as defined
in the approved manufacturer’s literature to provide a maximum discharge
temperature of 130 degrees F.
3.19 OEM CONTROLS INTEGRATION
A. The contractor shall ensure that original equipment manufacturers (OEM), providing
equipment with integral controllers (DDC, electric, electronic or pneumatic), shall
coordinate with the Building Controls System (BCS) contractor to ensure complete
integration of the OEM controls with the BCS. Provision of any gateways, wiring, etc.,
shall be by the BCS contractor.
B. The contractor shall refer to the Building Controls Systems drawings to ensure the
sequences required by OEM equipment are followed.
C. The OEM controllers shall coordinate with the BCS contractor to provide for the
following, as applicable to the device, for connection by the BCS contractor.
a. Remote start/stop.
b. Remote set-point adjust.
c. Remote alarming.
d. Remote status.
e. Remote monitoring of all process variables measured by the OEM controller. In
short, all information that is available on the local OEM control panel shall be
communicated to the BCS.
END OF SECTION
August 12, 2013
SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 REFERENCES................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................................4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LISTINGS AND APPROVALS....................................................... 5

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS.............................................................................................. 5
2.3 SEWAGE EJECTORS....................................................................................................................... 5
2.4 CIRCULATING PUMPS................................................................................................................... 6
2.5 WATER HEATERS .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.6 DOMESTIC WATER METERS ....................................................................................................... 7
2.7 ELECTRIC COMPONENTS............................................................................................................. 7
2.8 EQUIPMENT FINISH....................................................................................................................... 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 CIRCULATION PUMP..................................................................................................................... 7

3.2 SEWAGE EJECTORS....................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 WATER HEATERS .......................................................................................................................... 7
3.4 PLUMBING FIXTURES................................................................................................................... 8
3.5 DOMESTIC WATER METERS ....................................................................................................... 8
3.6 ADJUSTMENTS AND BALANCING ............................................................................................. 8
3.7 OEM CONTROLS INTEGRATION.................................................................................................8
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - i
d:\ddriveold_folders\a1202-choate\a1202-specifications\a1202-cd specifications\a1202-100% cd specifications\223000 plumbing equipment-8-12-13.doc
August 12, 2013
SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: The work of this Section is governed by the General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1, and Section 20 05 00 of this Project
Manual.
installation.
D. Commissioning

a. In addition to the start up of equipment and systems, include the time

1. Hot water generators.

2. Circulators,
3. Sewage ejector.
4. Water meter.
1. Starters.
2. Access Panels.
G. Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 3 - Concrete: Housekeeping pads and inertia pads for vibrating

equipment.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 1
August 12, 2013
2. Division 1 - Cutting and Patching: Openings in masonry, concrete, tile, and

other parts of structure, except drilling for hangers, providing holes and openings
in metal decks, and core drilling.
3. Division 26 - Electrical power and alarm wiring.
4. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Structural supports necessary to distribute
loading from equipment to roof or floor.
5. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures, trim, and supports.
6. Section 22 10 00 – Plumbing Systems
7. Section 20 05 00 – Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements
8. Section 20 05 48 - Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints.
H. Allowances: Refer to Division 1 for description of work under this Section requiring
Allowances.
I. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 for description of work under this Section affected by
Alternates.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. No. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code

2. No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
3. No. 101 - Life Safety Code
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
1. Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
C. South Coast Air Quality Management District
trained and experienced in the installation and testing of the specified plumbing systems
and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed
for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Substitutions: Comply with Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and

Electrical Requirements.
C. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed, and tested as specified in latest
department codes.
2. American Gas Association (AGA).
August 12, 2013
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American Insurance Association (A.I.A.), formerly National Board of Fire

Underwriters.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
D. Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following

5. American Welding Society (AWS).
E. Specific reference is made to the following Standards of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) which shall govern provision of work as specified and as required
by codes and authorities:
2. No. 70 - National Electrical Code (1990)
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Requirements.
1. Hot Water Generators.
2. Water Meters.
3. Circulators.
4. Sewage Ejectors.
5. Pressure reducing station.
August 12, 2013
the submittal.
C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings in accordance with the provisions of Division
1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual in compliance with Division 1, Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical
Requirements, and the additional requirements of Article 1.7 of this Section.
E. Prepare and submit shop drawings, O&M manuals and perform training as indicated on
Shop O&M Spare

List g
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
CIRCULATING PUMPS
WATER HEATERS
DOMESTIC WATER METERS
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS
EQUIPMENT FINISH
SEWAGE EJECTOR
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare manuals in compliance with Division 1, Section
20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements, and the additional requirements of this Section. In
addition to the requirements of other Sections, each manual shall include:
as specified in Article 1.5 of this Section.
2. Equipment Start-Up Reports.
B. Instruction Seminar: Perform systems instruction seminar and walk-through with the
Owner's representatives after preparation and review of the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
C. Equipment Start-Ups: Schedule Manufacturer's factory trained representatives to

perform equipment start-ups and instruction seminars as directed by Owner and as
specified for the following equipment.
August 12, 2013
1. Hot water generators.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LISTINGS AND APPROVALS
A. Provide NRTL approved equipment, devices, materials and systems. Where a UL listing
is not available, submit the test reports of an NRTL testing engineer hired under the work
of this section to perform field testing to confirm that electrical equipment, devices,
materials and systems are in conformance with local and state codes as enforced by the
local inspector. Tests and inspections required for approval shall be performed under the
work of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Reference Standards: Electrical equipment shall comply with the following standards:
1. NFPA 70 – NEC (2008 Edition).

2. NFPA 79 – Industrial Machinery Code (2007 Edition).
3. OSHA part 1910.
4. UL508A.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Submit manufacturers not listed below for review and approval as specified for
substitutions in the General Conditions and Section 20 05 00.
2.3 SEWAGE EJECTORS
A. Sewage ejectors shall be as manufactured by Weil, Weinman, Paco or approved equal.

The following series numbers are intended to establish a level of quality and comparison.
B. Furnish and install 1 Weil Series Model No. 1422 submersible screenless sewage
ejectors. Each pump rated at 70 gallons per minute against a total head of 20 feet.
1. Motors will be not less than 3/4 horsepower, 208 dual voltage, 1 phase, 60 hertz,
air filled, NEMA 6 submersible design, speed not over 1750 RPM. Motors to be
furnished with neoprene jacketed power cable.
2. The motors shall be housed in an air foil water tight cast iron motor shell with the
windings having Class "F" insulation and prefabricated double seal bearings.
The motor shaft shall be 300 stainless steel with key way for positive positioning
and securing of the impeller. Motor end bell to be designed as a terminal box.
3. The impeller shall be two vane type and shall be made of close grained cast iron
accurately machined to the proper diameter and to be statically and dynamically
balanced.
4. The mechanical seal shall be fitted with two rotating carbon faces and two
ceramic stationary seats with a single spring between the rotating faces. Lower
seal faces are to be "silicone carbide coated". The entire double mechanical seal
August 12, 2013
shall be housed in an oil filled chamber with no portion of the seal faces coming
in contact with the pumping media.
5. Controls shall include four Weil Series 8230 mercury float switches mounted on
a galvanized rod. One NEMA I duplex factory wired control cabinet controls
including; two magnetic starters with three coil overload protection, two fusible
disconnect switches, one automatic alternator, two momentary pump test buttons,
two pump running lights, one control circuit transformer, _____/120 volts, one 4
inch alarm bell with silencer 120 volts separate circuit.
6. Furnish and install one 52 inch by 52 inch square duplex cover with all necessary
openings including through cover discharge pipe arrangements and a 2 inch vent
connection, rectangular access door, hinged, with drop handles and locking hasp
and matching angle iron curb frame for a 48 inch by 48 inch pit. Concrete pit
shall be by the General Contractor.
7. Each pump shall include a Figure No. C-9030 lever and weighted type check
valve and OS&Y gate valve located outside of the pit. Each valve shall be the
same size as the discharge pipe.
2.4 CIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be all bronze or stainless steel, centrifugal type, close coupled, with side
suction as manufactured by Bell and Gossett Company, Taco Inc., Armstrong Pump Co.
or approved equal.
B. Pump shall be in line type piped with full size bypass, inlet and outlet pressure gauges
and thermometer.
C. Pump shall be provided complete with a magnetic across-the-line starting switch,

immersion type aqua stat and control wiring.
D. Pump operation shall be controlled by an immersion type aquastat installed at least 5 feet
upstream of the pump and set to start pump when temperature drops below ( F) and stop
pump at ( F.)
2.5 WATER HEATERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: A.O. Smith, Rheem-Rudd, and Hubbell.
1. Submissions from Acceptable Manufacturers or approved substitutes shall

include a sizing guarantee from the manufacturer for the storage and recovery
capacities of the submitted units for this project application. The sizing
guarantee and warranty shall match that of the specified unit.
August 12, 2013
2.6 DOMESTIC WATER METERS
A. Water meters shall be Rockwell (turbo type) (compound type) with remote reader. Meter
shall register in (cubic feet) (gallons). Provide concrete base or pipe supports as required.
2.8 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be furnished with manufacturer applied
lead-free primer and covered with hard gloss enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CIRCULATION PUMP
A. Circulation pump, aquastat, piping and accessories shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. Installation shall include unions and full size by-pass with shutoff valves.
3.2 SEWAGE EJECTORS
A. Sewage ejector pumps, controllers, piping and accessories shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. Provide the services of a certified manufacturers’ representative for initial startup.
C. Float Settings: Float switches shall be set by the factory representative during the initial
equipment start-up. General float switch settings shall be as follows:
1. Stop: 12 inches above the bottom of the basin

2. Start: 14 inches below the inlet invert.
3. High water alarm: 6 inches above the start float.
4. Standby pump on: 6 inches above the high water alarm
3.3 WATER HEATERS
A. Water heaters, piping and accessories shall be installed in accordance manufacturers’

recommendations.
B. Pipe multiple water heaters as a reverse return to maintain flow balance through the units.
August 12, 2013
C. Provide the services of a certified manufacturers’ representative for initial startup.
3.4 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. All plumbing fixtures, except as otherwise noted, shall be furnished and installed by this
Contractor; he shall be responsible for correctly setting these fixtures as shown on
Architect's Plans and interior elevations.
B. Fixtures designated as handicapped use shall be mounted in accordance with Local

Codes.
3.5 DOMESTIC WATER METERS
A. Water meters shall be set as indicated by local water department.
3.6 ADJUSTMENTS AND BALANCING
A. After completing installation work and equipment start-ups, perform the necessary adjustments to
systems installed under this Section. Submit verification that systems are operating at the
specified temperatures and pressures.
B. Adjust pressure relief valves, pressure regulating valves, and thermostatic control valves,
and verify that normally open or closed valves are set in accordance with the Contract
Drawings.
A. The contractor shall ensure that original equipment manufacturer’s (OEM), providing
c. Remote alarming.
d. Remote status.
END OF SECTION
August 12, 2013
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 RELATED WORK .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 REFERENCES..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS..................................................................................................................................... 3
1.6 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................................... 4
1.7 WARRANTY....................................................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 FIXTURES AND TRIM ...................................................................................................................... 5

2.2 WATER CLOSETS ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 URINALS ............................................................................................................................................ 7
2.4 LAVATORIES..................................................................................................................................... 7
2.5 SINKS .................................................................................................................................................. 7
2.6 SERVICE SINKS & MOP BASINS.................................................................................................... 7
2.7 WATER COOLERS / DRINKING FOUNTAINS .............................................................................. 7
2.8 ELECTRIC COMPONENTS............................................................................................................... 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 EXAMINATION ................................................................................................................................. 7

3.2 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS .................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES....................................................................................................... 8
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING .................................................................................................. 8
3.5 PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................................... 9
3.6 OEM CONTROLS INTEGRATION................................................................................................... 9
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - i
d:\ddriveold_folders\a1202-choate\a1202-specifications\a1202-cd specifications\a1202-100% cd specifications\224000 plumbing fixtures-8-12-13.doc
August 12, 2013
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: The Work of this Section is governed by the General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1, and Section 20 05 00 of this Project
Manual.
installation.
D. Commissioning

a. In addition to the start up of equipment and systems, include the time

1. Plumbing fixtures and trim.

2. Faucets and flushometers.
3. Stops and supplies.
4. Traps and tailpieces.
5. Drain outlets.
6. Mixing valves.
7. Flow controls.
8. Carriers and supports.
1. Access Panels.
G. Install the following items furnished under other Sections or by the Owner:
1. .................................................................................
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 1
August 12, 2013
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 8 - Access Panels: Access to concealed valves, cleanouts, and water

hammer arrestors.
2. Division 9 - Painting.
3. Division 26 - Electrical power and alarm wiring.
4. Division 1 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Sanitary facilities for use during
construction.
5. Section 22 10 00 – Plumbing Systems
6. Section 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment
7. Section 23 06 00 - HVAC
B. Allowances: Refer to Division 1 for description of work under this Section requiring
Allowances.
C. Unit Prices: Refer to Measurement and Payment - Division 1 for description of work
under this Section requiring Unit Prices.
D. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 for description of work under this Section affected by
Alternates.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI A117.7 - Providing accessibility and usability for physically handicapped

people.
trained and experienced and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Substitutions: Comply with Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical

Requirements.
C. Codes and Regulations:
1. In the addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with

pertinent regulations of governmental agencies and authorities that have
jurisdiction.
2. If there is conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent

regulations, the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the
Architect.
August 12, 2013
D. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed, and tested as specified in latest
department codes.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical
Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
F. Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following


G. South Coast Air Quality Management District
1.5 SUBMITTALS

and Electrical Requirements.
1. Plumbing fixtures and trim.

2. Faucets.
3. Stops and supplies.
4. In-line checks,
5. Traps and tailpieces.
6. Mixing valves.
7. Flow controls.
8. Carriers.
the submittal.
C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings in accordance with the provisions of Division
1 - Project Record Documents, and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical
Requirements.
August 12, 2013
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual in compliance with Division 1, Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and
Electrical Requirements, and the additional requirements of this Section.
E. Prepare and submit shop drawings, O&M manuals and perform training as indicated on
Shop O&M Spare

List g
FIXTURES AND TRIM
WATER CLOSETS
URINALS
LAVATORIES
SINKS
SERVICE SINKS & MOP BASINS
WATER COOLERS / DRINKING FOUNTAINS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare manuals in compliance with Division 1,

Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements, and the additional
requirements of this Section.
Owner's representatives after preparation and review of the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
C. Equipment Start-Ups: Schedule Manufacturer's factory trained representatives to

perform equipment start-ups and instruction seminars as directed by Owner and as
specified for the following equipment.
1. Sensor faucets.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace the work of this
Section which fails due to defective materials or workmanship within one year after Date
of Substantial Completion as that date is determined in accordance with the General
Conditions.
1. Comply with the additional requirements of Section 20 05 00- Basic Mechanical

Requirements.
August 12, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIXTURES AND TRIM
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Submit manufacturers not listed below for review and
approval as specified for substitutions in Article 1.04 - Quality Assurance in this Section.
1. Vitreous China: Kohler.

2. Faucets: Kohler.
3. Carriers and Supports: J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade, Watts or Zurn.
4. Stainless Steel Sinks: Kohler.
5. Mop Service Basins: Fiat or Stern Williams.
6. Electric Water Coolers: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, or Haws.
7. Flush Valves: Kohler.
8. Stops and Supplies: American Standard, Kohler, or Zurn.
9. Supply checks: Symmons, Watts, or Zurn.
10. P-Traps: McGuire, Sanitary-Dash, or Zurn.
B. Fixture Trim and Accessories: Provide fixtures complete with floor mounted fixture
carrier supports; faucets, flushometers; drain outlets, tailpieces, P-traps and stops and
supplies with in-line checks.
1. Color and Finish: All trim exposed to view shall be polished chrome plated, and
all fixtures and toilet seats shall be white unless specified otherwise.
2. P-Traps: Cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout plug, ground joint and 17
gage minimum weight extension with escutcheon. Provide McGuire No. 8090 1-
1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inch on lavatories and No. 8098 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch on
sinks.
3. Drain Outlets: Provide drain outlet of the same manufacturer as the fixture or
faucet trim with chrome plated cast brass plug with 17 gauge minimum weight
tailpiece. Provide 1-1/4 inch tailpiece on lavatories and 1-1/2 inch on sinks.
Provide off-set drain outlets on handicapped use lavatories.
4. Stops and Supplies: Provide stops and supplies of the same manufacturer as the
fixture or faucet trim, or provide McGuire Model 170 angle stop with 5 inch long
1/2 inch nominal copper sweat extension, bell escutcheon, and 3/8 inch O.D. by
12 inch flexible riser. Provide in-line checks on both hot and cold water supplies.
Provide loose key stops on supplies in public spaces.
5. Supply checks: Zurn Z6900-MT-1 or Symmons LL-71B. Provide in-line checks

on both hot and cold water supplies.
6. Piping Guards: Provide HandiLav-Guard insulation by Truebro on water

supplies and waste piping below Handicapped Use Lavatories.
C. Sinks: Seamlessly drawn, self-rimming 18 gauge, type 302 (18-8) nickel bearing
stainless steel with 1-3/4 inch minimum rounded corners, satin finish, and fully
undercoated.
August 12, 2013
D. Faucets: Chrome plated cast brass with stainless steel seats and monel stems. Gooseneck
spouts shall be interchangeable and convertible rigid/swing type. Handles shall be
interchangeable with square handle broachings.
E. Flushometers: Diaphragm operated, cast-brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing inlet
with wall flange and tailpiece with spud, screwdriver check stop, vacuum breaker, and
brass lever handle actuation except where other variations are specified.
F. Water Conservation: Provide water conserving fixtures and trim in compliance with the
following maximum water use requirements. Provide variable pressure flow controls on
showers, sinks, and lavatory faucets.
1. Public lavatories: 0.5 gpm

2. Sinks: 1.5 gpm
3. Water Closets: 1.28 gpf
4. Urinals: 1 gpf
G. Fixture Supports:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: J. R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, or Josam.
2. Provide floor mounted fixture support carriers for wall mounted fixtures
including, but not limited to, water closets, lavatories, scrub sinks and clinical
sinks. Fixture support shall support at least 250 lbs. for (5) minutes. Furnish
complete with foot piece, all necessary bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets. The
adjustable nipple for the water closets between the cast iron fitting and closet
bowl shall be threaded cast iron. Secure all foot pieces to floor slab using four
bolts per foot.
3. Close coordination is required between the plumber and tile subcontractor in

closet installation. Maintain 1/16” clearance between finished wall and back of
closet and follow manufacturer’s details in installing couplings to ensure tight
seal at closet outlet. Closet hanging templates must be used.
a. Water Closets ZurnR-1204, J. R. Smith 200-Y

b. Lavatories: ZurnR-1231, J. R. Smith 700-M31
c. Urinals: Zurn-1217, J. R. Smith 637
H. Toilet Seats: Provide extra heavy-duty, commercial/industrial type, elongated, open front,
solid white injection molded plastic with integral bumpers; and self sustaining stainless
steel check hinges.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kohler.
2.2 WATER CLOSETS
A. See schedule on drawings.
August 12, 2013
2.3 URINALS
2.4 LAVATORIES
2.5 SINKS
2.6 SERVICE SINKS & MOP BASINS
2.7 WATER COOLERS / DRINKING FOUNTAINS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and
vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing
fixtures.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be
installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS
A. Provide flush valves in alignment with the fixture, without vertical or horizontal offsets.
B. Furnish fixture templates for casework contractor for counter mounted sinks and
lavatories.
August 12, 2013
C. Mounting Heights: Mount fixtures level at elevations shown on architectural drawings.

Refer to toilet room elevations and casework details.
D. Provide local under-counter thermostatic mixing valve for all lavatory sensor faucets.
E. Stops and Supplies: Provide in-line checks on all hot and cold water fixture supplies
unless the faucet has integral checks.
F. Piping below accessible fixtures shall be located as close to the wall as possible and shall
be recessed, insulated or guarded without sharp or abrasive surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Install handicapped use fixtures in accordance with the requirements to the Architectural
Access Board Code and ANSI A117.1. Insulate hot water supply and waste piping under
lavatories.
1. Where urinals are provided: Install one urinal with the rim mounted 17 inches
above the finish floor in compliance with the handicapped code.
B. Provide thermostatic mixing valves at all public use toilet room lavatories to limit water
temperature to 110 degrees F.
C. Grout wall and floor mounted fixtures watertight where the fixtures are in contact with
walls and floors.
D. Caulk deck-mounted trim at the time of assembly, including fixture and casework
mounted. Caulk self-rimming sinks installed in casework.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
A. After completion of the installation work and equipment start-ups, perform the necessary
adjustments to systems installed under this Section. Submit verification that systems are
operating at the specified temperatures and pressures.
B. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
C. Operate and adjust disposers, hot water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning units and controls.
D. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, and
flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.
E. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
F. Adjust flush valves, open fixture stops, and clean faucet aerators.
G. Set aquastats on water heaters and circulation pumps.
August 12, 2013
H. Adjust metering faucets to deliver a maximum of 1/4 gallon of hot water per cycle and
operate for at least 10 seconds upon activation.
I. Temperature adjustments: Adjust thermostatic mixing valves serving faucets in public

toilet rooms to provide a maximum temperature of 110 degrees F.
J. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended
cleaning methods and materials.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by
the Owner.
A. The contractor shall ensure that original equipment manufacturers (OEM), providing
c. Remote alarming.
d. Remote status.
END OF SECTION
August 12, 2013
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................ 1

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK........................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE.............................................................................................................. 6
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................. 7
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING .......................................................................................... 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 8

3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEMS .............................................................. 9
3.3 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING ........................ 10
3.4 MEASUREMENTS ..................................................................................................................... 10
3.5 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING................................................ 11
3.6 BALANCING TOLERANCES.................................................................................................... 11
3.7 AIR SYSTEM BALANCING ...................................................................................................... 12
3.8 HYDRONIC BALANCING AND ADJUSTING ........................................................................ 15
3.9 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION ............................................................................. 16
3.10 RECORD AND REPORT DATA ................................................................................................ 16
3.11 DEMONSTRATION.................................................................................................................... 17
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - i

D:\DDriveOLD_Folders\A1202-Choate\A1202-Specifications\A1202-CD Specifications\A1202-100% CD Specifications\230593 testing and balancing-8-12-13.doc
August 12, 2013
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Commissioning

specified in Section 01 91 13. The work includes producing start up documentation
including pre-functional checklists, operation and maintenance documentation and
the training required for the systems.

C. Related Sections: All Articles of Sections 20 05 00, 20 05 48, 23 06 00 and 23 09 00 apply

to this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures for total mechanical systems testing,
adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid
quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design documents and recording
and reporting the results. Coordinate readings with Section 23 09 00 Vendors to help
calibrate BCS system. Testing, adjusting and balancing of systems shall not begin until the
BCS System is complete and functional. All work required in this section shall be performed
in conjunction with the work required of the BCS Contractor, not independently.
B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:
1. All supply air systems.

2. All return air systems.
3. All exhaust air systems.
4. All hydronic systems.
5. All mechanical equipment.
6. Verify control system operation. (Coordinate with Section 23 09 00)
C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
D. This Section does not include:
1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes;
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1

August 12, 2013
2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems;
3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If

devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the
respective system sections for materials and installation requirements.
4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the
building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes:
1. The balance of air, water and steam distribution.

2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities.
3. Electrical measurement.
4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls.
5. Sound and vibration measurement.
B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment
(e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling, change pulleys).
D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and
terminals) according to specified design quantities.
E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield

reproducible results.
F. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for
submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the
basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing.
G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system.
There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on
water terminals, and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles,
diffusers, louvers, and hoods.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Agency Data:
1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meet the
qualifications specified below.

August 12, 2013
B. Engineer and Technicians Data:
1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the
procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the
qualifications specified below.
C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust,
and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in
Division 1 and Section 20 05 00.
E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the
AABC or NEBB are proposed.
F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and
signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the
systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced
standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true
representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting,
and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to
establish normal operating values of the systems.
Follow the procedures and format specified below:
1. Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures,

prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but
must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports
in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 3 complete sets of draft
reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned.
2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports,
type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 3 complete
sets of final reports.
3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the
referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and
balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other
data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the
project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of
the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:
a. General Information and Summary

b. Air Systems
c. Hydronic and Steam Systems
d. Control Systems
e. Special Systems
f. Sound and Vibration Systems

August 12, 2013
4. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:
a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing,

adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer,
and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers.
Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address,
telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance
Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for
the procedures along with the proof of calibration.
b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing
as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms
prepared by the AABC and NEBB, for each respective item and system.
Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to
accompany each respective report form.
G. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to
tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of one month prior to
starting the project.
H. Balancing report shall include as a minimum, the following information (other parts of the
specifications may require additional information).
1. Fan Data:
a. Manufacturer and model number.

b. Airflow, design.
c. Airflow, actual.
d. Direction of rotation and revolutions per minute.
e. Inlet static pressure.
f. Discharge static pressure.
g. Fan curves showing variation of air flow with static pressure at operating
speed and motor loading.
h. Actual airflow percentage above or below design.
i. Fan RPM, design.
j. Fan RPM, actual.
k. Pulley manufacturer, model number, pitch diameter.
l. Belt size and quantity.
2. Pump and Compressor Data:

b. Flow design.
c. Flow actual.
d. Direction of rotation and revolutions per minute.
e. Inlet pressure.
f. Discharge pressure.
g. Curves showing variation of flow with pressure for installed unit (1/2 flow,
3/4 flow, and 1 1/4 flow).

August 12, 2013
h. Flow percentage above or below design.
3. Motor Data:

b. Horsepower.
c. Phase.
d. Frequency.
e. NEMA code letter.
f. Rated volts.
g. Locked rotor amperes.
h. Service factor.
i. Measured volts.
j. Measured amps.
k. Measured frequency.
l. Nameplate RPM.
m. Actual RPM.
n. Pulley manufacturer, model number, pitch diameter.
4. Starter Data:

b. Heater size.
c. Line voltage.
d. Ampere rating.
e. Control voltage.
f. Frequency.
5. VFD Data:

b. Line voltage (input).
c. VA rating.
d. Input current.
e. Output current.
f. Output frequency.
g. Output voltage.
h. Accel time.
i. Decel time.
6. Air Outlet Data:
a. Reproducible floor plan drawings showing all air outlet locations and
numbers assigned to outlets for purpose of test.
b. Air outlet manufacturer and model number.
c. Size.
d. Actual free area.
e. Manufacturer's test factor.
f. Measured velocity.

August 12, 2013
g. Airflow design.
h. Airflow actual.
i. Airflow percentage above or below design.
j. Airflow pattern.
7. Outdoor Air Data:
a. Size of inlet.
b. Actual free area.
c. Manufacturer's test factor.
d. Measured velocity.
e. Outdoor air temperature.
f. Return air temperature.
g. Mixed air temperature with averaged traverse readings (when at least a 20ºF
temperature difference exists).
8. Cooling and Heating Elements:

b. Measured water pressure drop.
c. Water flow design.
d. Water flow actual.
e. Water flow percentage above or below design.
f. Measured air pressure drop.
9. Heat exchangers:
a. Water pressure drops.

b. Water flow pressure drop design.
c. Water flow actual.
d. Percent flow above or below design.
A. Agency Qualifications:
1. The testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall meet the qualifications specified
below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the
building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives.
Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement
and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to
meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.
2. The testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by Associated Air Balance
Council (AABC) or by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in those
testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one
Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the services are to be
performed, certified by AABC or NEBB as a Test and Balance Engineer.

August 12, 2013
B. Codes and Standards: Where the referenced codes and standards conflict, the more stringent
requirement shall apply.
1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Environmental Systems".
2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance."
3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, latest edition, Chapter on Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing.
4. SMACNA: “HVAC systems testing, adjusting and balancing.”
C. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Construction Manager, Owner’s
representative and representatives of installers of the mechanical and control systems. The
objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and
readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Testing, adjusting and balancing shall not commence until all systems are complete and
functional.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems.
B. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems
during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5
deg. F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg. F dry
bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings
during seasonal operation.
C. Notify Owner’s Representative 14 days before scheduled testing, adjusting, and balancing is
to commence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not Used.

August 12, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Ensure that all contractors and trades whose work and installed systems are under testing and
balancing, are present on site during the entire time that these procedures take place. Note
that some procedures listed below have a distinct order of precedence, e.g., the testing of
Building Control System shall not occur until major pieces of mechanical equipment have
been started up and testing is complete. Prepare schedule, order and procedure for testing and
balancing, submit to the Owner’s Representative (OR) for review and approval.
B. Testing and balancing shall not diminish guarantee requirements.
C. Before the procedure begins a meeting shall be held at the site, between the balancing
contractor, the BCS contractor, the mechanical contractor and prime contractor. The prime
contractor shall present the Owner’s Representative (OR) with the completed checklists
certifying that equipment startup and testing has been completed. The contractor shall then
present his procedures for testing the overall system to OR for review and approval.
D. When the BCS testing has been completed a second meeting will be held at the site offices
between the parties mentioned above. At this time the BCS contractor shall present OR with
the completed control startup checklist. The balancing contractor shall present OR with
certificates of calibration for balancing instruments, proposed balancing forms and proposed
balancing procedures to OR, for review and approval.
E. Do not cover or conceal work before testing and inspection and obtaining approval.
F. Instruments for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within one month prior to
testing and calibration. Calibration shall be traceable to NIST Standards. Provide photostat
of certificate of calibration to OR at meeting demonstrating balancing procedures mentioned
in this section.
G. Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from testing, adjusting and balancing
shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be
continued until system operates without further requirements for adjustments or repairs.
H. Report on reporting forms, submitted to OR for approval in advance.
I. For each piece of equipment, copy nameplate data and include in report.
J. Submit six copies of testing and balancing reports to OR for approval.
K. Provide capacity and performance of equipment by field testing. Install equipment and
instruments required for testing, thermo-wells and gauge connections at no additional costs.
L. Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present at test.

August 12, 2013
M. Testing, adjusting and balancing procedures outlined below are the minimum effort required
for the project. Contractor shall use any additional procedures he feels will be necessary to
properly startup, test and balancing the job.
3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEMS
A. Before operating the system, perform these steps:
1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with
the design intent.
2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets
(supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams.
3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. Ensure discrepancies

are shown on the record drawings.
4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to
determine variations of installation from design. Ensure discrepancies are shown on
the record drawings.
5. Check filters for cleanliness.
6. Check dampers (control, smoke, volume and fire) for correct and locked position,
and temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans.
7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet
factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required
outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes.
8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct
traverses.
9. Place all volume dampers in the full open position. Open appropriate quantity of
VAV boxes (if applicable) to simulate air flow diversity.
10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to
facilitate reporting.
11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
12. Check fan belt tension, adjust as necessary.
13. Check fan rotation, adjust as necessary.

August 12, 2013
3.3 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Before operating the system perform these steps:
1. Open all valves to full open position. Close all bypass valves.
2. Remove and clean all strainers.
3. Examine hydronic systems and determine if water has been treated and cleaned.
Notify or if it is determined treatment has not occurred.
4. Check pump rotation, adjust as necessary.
5. Clean and set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
6. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system
is completely full of water. Adjust as necessary.
7. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and
operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). Adjust
as necessary.
8. Request BCS Contractor to set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full
flow.
9. Check operation of automatic bypass valves, adjust as necessary.
10. Request BCS Contractor to set operating temperatures of chillers and boilers to
design requirements.
11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
3.4 MEASUREMENTS
A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the

tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained
and protected against damage.
B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.
C. Use only those instruments, which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best
suited to the function being measured.
D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges
proper for the value being measured.

August 12, 2013
F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings so that the average results in a
repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings
until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained.
G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average
of rapidly fluctuation readings.
I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.5 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Perform procedures on each system installed under this contract, in accordance with the
detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards and in these specifications.
B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.
C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.
D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or
other suitable, permanent identification materials.
G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to system modifications, and resubmit test
results.
3.6 BALANCING TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling and Fan Systems
1. Low and Medium Pressure:
a. Fans Design volume + 5%, -5%

b. Outlets Design volume +/- 5%
B. Water Systems
1. Entire final balanced system: Design flow + 5%, -5%.

August 12, 2013
3.7 AIR SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Visually inspect all fire, smoke, control and volume dampers on branch take offs to each
floor to ensure that they are fully open. Open as necessary (coordinate with the BCS
Contractor).
B. Verify with straight edge that fan and motor shafts are parallel and that sheaves are in proper
alignment. Use belt tensioner to confirm belts are at proper tension. Refer to deflection
tables appropriate for installed belts. Adjust alignment and tension as necessary.
C. Start fans and verify that fan rotation is correct. If not, coordinate with electrical contractor
to switch power leads such that the fan rotates correctly.
D. Verify that fan belts are tight on one side and have slight bow on other side when fan is
operating with no squeal at startup. If not correct, adjust sheaves or motor base accordingly.
E. Check nameplate voltage on motor, compare to scheduled voltage. Notify OR immediately

of any discrepancies. Measure and record actual voltage across all power leads. Notify OR
of discrepancies immediately.
F. For each variable volume air handling unit do the following:
1. Add total maximum cfm of all volume boxes shown on drawings.
2. Divide this total by the maximum cfm scheduled for the unit to get diversity factor.
For example, if total box cfm is 50,000 and AHU is scheduled for 40,000 cfm
diversity is 40,000/50,000 = 80%.
3. Open the volume boxes necessary to approximate diversity, i.e., in the above
example, open the variable boxes to 80% of their design maximum.
G. Check motor nameplates full load amps, measure and record amperage across all power
leads. If there are marked discrepancies in amperage draws between legs, notify OR
immediately.
H. Measure and record fan and motor RPM. Check that motor rpm agrees with nameplate and
scheduled rpm.
I. Perform static pressure profile as follows: Record all results and submit to OR.
1. Determine static pressure across supply and exhaust fans as follows:
a. Measure static or total pressure at fan suction.
b. Measure static or total pressure at fan discharge.
c. Differential is the static pressure developed by fan.
2. Determine static pressure:

August 12, 2013
a. In ductwork before and after smoke dampers.
b. Across each filter section.
c. Across each coil.
d. Across each sound attenuator.
e. Across each volume damper at branch take offs to each floor.
f. Across each fire damper.
g. Across each combination fire/smoke damper.
h. At up to 25 points, in each supply system (fewer points for each exhaust

system) to be selected by OR to be determined when ductwork shop
drawings are approved, or during startup.
3. Determine the correct causes of any excessively high readings, i.e. open/throttled
dampers, clean/dirty coils, etc. and make necessary adjustments or coordinate
necessary repairs. Seal all holes when measurements are complete. Label locations
of measurements and cross reference labeling in report.
J. For all supply and exhaust systems with filters and volume controls (terminal boxes, or
VFD) add static pressure to the system to simulate the effect of dirty filters and wet cooling
coils. For all supply and exhaust systems with filters and no volume controls, add static
pressure to the system to simulate the effect of 1/2 dirty filters and wet cooling coils. Static
(see drawings for exact P.D. of dirty filters and wet coils) shall be added by covering filter
section with cheesecloth or other suitable material. Confirm appropriate static pressure has
been added with new static pressure reading across filters and fan. Remove cheesecloth, etc.
after traverses are complete.
K. Perform pitot tube traverse of supply, exhaust and return main ducts. Summing CFM totals
from diffusers is not an acceptable method of determining total airflow from AHU's or
fans. Balancing Contractor shall provide and install hardware for test locations and shall
properly seal them after tests. Label location of traverses and cross-reference on the report.
Perform traverses in accordance with procedures outlined in latest edition of the SMACNA
HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Manual, except that if recommended lengths of
straight duct before and after traverse points are not available, increase number of measuring
points by 50%. If a 24 point traverse would be called for given the duct cross section
area-measure 36 points, for example.
L. Adjust sheave pulley diameters or replace fixed pitch sheaves as necessary to meet the
balancing tolerance of the fan at full speed. Replace belts as necessary.
M. Measure amperage at each power leg after traverse is complete. If an overload condition
exists with measured CFM equal to scheduled CFM, notify OR immediately.

August 12, 2013
N. For economizer systems with Section 23 09 00 BCS contractors presence and assistance,
adjust minimum and maximum outdoor air CFM to quantities shown on schedules. Place
outdoor air dampers in minimum position as adjusted by controls contractor. Measure
temperature in mixed air plenum, temperature of outdoor air and by proportioning determine
% of outdoor air being supplied. Place outdoor air damper in maximum open position or
fully open variable outside air damper and repeat above measurements.
O. For systems with terminal volume boxes do the following, with BCS Contractor present for
necessary coordination:
1. At static pressure probe location in field, with number of space temperature sensors
necessary to approximate installed diversity calling for full cooling, measure static
pressure with manometer and compare with reading registering at DDC system field
panel or CRT. The "most critical" volume box shall be determined by the OR from
approved sheet metal shop drawings submittals. Typically the pressure drop from
the supply fan outlet to this box inlet is greater than for any other box. Observe
damper linkage, at this box, instruct controls contractor to vary static pressure
setpoint as required so that with stats calling for full cooling, most critical box
damper is 75% open. (Score line on damper linkage and mark full open and closed
positions of box damper. Using protractor mark 75% position open position on
volume box.)
2. At each supply terminal volume box, confirm that temperature sensor and box
controller are compatible. At each terminal volume box disconnect the actuator's
control line and confirm that box damper fails to position called for on control
drawings. Confirm second position for two position boxes, confirm room
pressurization. Adjust volumes to meet required pressurization in accordance with
the control drawings.
3. At each supply variable volume terminal box, set temperature sensor serving box for
no cooling. At box test ports take differential pressure reading with a manometer.
Adjust box minimum position at controller so that differential pressure reading
corresponds to box minimum primary air CFM shown on schedules. Place
temperature sensor controlling box to full cooling position. Using manometer gauge
adjust box controller maximum position setting to produce differential pressure
corresponding to box maximum primary air as shown on schedules. Measure CFM's
from all diffusers served by box. Confirm total agrees with scheduled box cfm.
4. Supply boxes with reheat coils, set temperature sensor to call for full heating and
confirm that hot water control valve modulates open.
5. At each constant volume terminal box, use manometer to adjust setpoint of box
controller to differential pressure corresponding to velocity(s) (airflow) scheduled
for box.
6. At each exhaust and return box, use manometer to adjust calibration of controller.
P. Balance each diffuser, register and grille to within specified tolerances. Follow procedures
in SMACNA manual referenced above. For branch ductwork and runouts, one runout in

August 12, 2013
each branch shall have its damper at least 90% open. Ensure proper pressure relationships
between adjoining spaces and include in submittal.
Q. For constant volume systems, perform pilot tube traverses for branch ducts on each floor.
Adjust volume dampers to produce design CFM for each branch.
R. Traverse all exhaust ducts. Adjust as necessary to specified tolerances.
S. Fire Dampers:
1. Random test 10% of the fire dampers, selected by the OR, for proper operation by
applying heat to release fusible links.
2. After test, replace fusible links and reset dampers.
3.8 HYDRONIC BALANCING AND ADJUSTING
A. Balancing shall not begin until systems have been installed complete, including pumps,
piping, valves and coils.
B. Make adjustments as required to deliver water volumes within specified tolerances, or as

required to properly balance cooling and heating loads throughout conditioned areas.
C. Adjustments in water volumes shall be made in manner satisfactory to OR.
D. For systems with backup equipment ensure that terminal balancing is adjusted for both
conditions - flow from control system and flow from back-up system.
E. Water Systems Balancing Procedure
1. Record motor data, rotation, voltage, amperage, etc.
2. Close automatic system bypass valve.
3. Set all automatic control valves for full flow through the terminals.
4. Operate the system pumps at their rated speed.
5. For chilled and hot water system, operate building at design differential pressure.
Adjust main supply valve to maintain this differential.
6. Proportionately balance flow through heat exchangers.
a. Actual flow divided by design flow shall equal actual pump delivery
divided by design pump delivery.
7. Proportionately balance multiple coil terminals by adjusting throttling valve at each

coil and common balancing valve for entire terminal.

August 12, 2013
a. Actual flow divided by design flow shall equal actual pump delivery
divided by design pump delivery.
b. Balance all coils in terminal so that at least one coil's throttling valve is
fully open at the completion of balance with proper flow through that coil.
8. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements.
9. Set pump flow to design requirements by adjusting the throttling valve at the pump
discharge.
10. Check and adjust flows through equipment to design requirements after pump flow
adjustment.
11. Check leaving and return water temperatures through heat exchangers, and at
building entrances. Reset to correct design temperatures.
12. Check water temperatures at inlet side of equipment. Note rise or drop of
temperature from source.
13. Measure pressure at control points of the system bypass control valve.
14. Set all terminal controls to the fully closed position.
a. Adjust system bypass throttling valve to obtain measured pressure control

points in the system and to prevent hunting or overpressure of bypass
control valve.
F. Report on system performance shall include:
1. Manufacturer, size, type, location including room number, and zone of each coil and
piece of equipment.
2. Design and actual water flow, and pressure drop.
3. Complete nameplate data for each piece of equipment reported along with actual
pressure readings.
4. Complete identification of data.
3.9 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION
A. Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed
instructions of the referenced standards.
3.10 RECORD AND REPORT DATA
A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on
the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report
forms.

August 12, 2013
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances

when system cannot be successfully balanced.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training:
1. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures. Review with the OR's personnel, the
information contained in the Operating and Maintenance Data specified in Division
1 and Section 20 05 00.
2. Schedule training with OR with at least 21 days prior notice.
END OF SECTION

100% Construction Documents Specifications St John Hall
August 12, 2013
SECTION 23 06 00
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................. 4
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 6
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................. 6
1.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................... 8
1.6 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................... 9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 9

2.2 DUCTWORK, ACOUSTICAL LINING.................................................................................... 26
2.3 DUCTWORK SILENCERS ....................................................................................................... 28
2.4 INSULATION, DUCTWORK ................................................................................................... 29
2.5 PIPING AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................................... 32
2.6 PIPING, PREINSULATED UNDERGROUND ........................................................................ 36
2.7 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 37
2.8 VALVES AND STRAINERS .................................................................................................... 46
2.9 INSULATION, PIPING.............................................................................................................. 53
2.10 PIPING, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .................................................................................... 56
2.11 WATER SPECIALTIES............................................................................................................. 57
2.12 INSULATION, EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 58
2.13 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING .................................................................................... 59
2.14 DRIVES ...................................................................................................................................... 62
2.15 PUMPS, CENTRIFUGAL.......................................................................................................... 62
2.16 PREFABRICATED BOILER BREECHING STACK, FLUE, AND MECHANICAL DRAFT
COMBUSTION EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................. 63
2.17 CHEMICAL TREATMENT - WATER SYSTEMS .................................................................. 68
2.18 PRESSURE GAUGES, THERMOMETERS AND TEST PLUGS ........................................... 71
2.19 FILTER, MEDIUM EFFICIENCY, THROW AWAY TYPE ................................................... 72
2.20 FILTERS HIGH EFFICIENCY, THROW AWAY TYPE......................................................... 72
2.21 FILTER, AIR FILTER GAUGE................................................................................................. 72
2.22 FILTER HOUSING, SIDE ACCESS ......................................................................................... 73
2.23 BUILT-UP AIR HANDLING UNIT .......................................................................................... 73
2.24 TERMINAL UNITS, VARIABLE VOLUME ........................................................................... 83
2.25 CABINET HEATERS - ELECTRIC .......................................................................................... 84
2.26 FIN TUBE RADIATION............................................................................................................ 84
2.27 COIL - HOT WATER HEATING.............................................................................................. 86
2.28 HEAT EXCHANGER - PLATE-AND-FRAME........................................................................ 86
2.29 WATER CHILLERS - AIR COOLED ....................................................................................... 87
2.30 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES .................................................................................................... 97
2.31 CONDENSER - AIR-COOLED (ADD ALTERNATE) ............................................................ 98
2.32 FAN - CENTRIFUGAL............................................................................................................ 105
2.33 VIBRATION ISOLATION (NON-SEISMIC AND SEISMIC)............................................... 105
2.34 ACCESS PANELS (WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED).................................................. 105
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 06 00 - i

d:\ddriveold_folders\a1202-choate\a1202-specifications\a1202-cd specifications\a1202-100% cd specifications\230600 heating, ventilating & air conditioning-8-12-13.doc
August 12, 2013
2.35 RETURN FAN ARRAY........................................................................................................... 105

2.36 WINDOW INTERLOCKS ....................................................................................................... 114
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 114
3.1 REFERENCE............................................................................................................................ 114

3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................................................. 114
3.3 TAGS AND VALVE TAG CHARTS ...................................................................................... 114
3.4 PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................... 115
3.5 CHILLER INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 115
3.6 BOILER ERECTION AND CLEANING - HOT WATER...................................................... 116
3.7 BURNER LIGHTOFF, ADJUSTMENT AND PRESSURE TEST ......................................... 116
3.8 EQUIPMENT TESTING.......................................................................................................... 117
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM CLEANING AND TESTING .................................................................... 119
3.10 ENERGY CONSUMPTION REPORT .................................................................................... 126
3.11 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS (PRESSURE TESTS) ................................................................... 129
3.12 OEM CONTROLS INTEGRATION........................................................................................ 129
3.13 EQUIPMENT START UP........................................................................................................ 130
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 06 00 - ii

August 12, 2013
SECTION 23 06 00
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section is governed by the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions, Sections in Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 of the Project Manual.
B. Perform work and provide materials and equipment as shown on Drawings and as
of this Section with work of other trades and provide complete and fully functional
systems installation.
D. Commissioning


E. In general, the work of this section shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Access panels.
2. Air and water system balancing.
3. Air conditioning unit and air cooled condenser.
4. Air distribution system including all pressure classes of ductwork, diffusers,
registers, grilles, splitters, dampers, etc.
5. Air flow control valves.
6. Air flow measuring stations.
7. Air handling units.
8. Air separators.
9. Air volume terminal boxes.
10. Automatic temperature controls, variable air volume controls and other controls.
11. Boiler flue pipe and breeching.
12. Cabinet unit heaters.
13. Centrifugal water chiller.
14. Chemical water treatment.
15. Cleaning.
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 06 00 - 1

August 12, 2013
16. Complete hot water system including pumps, expansion tanks, piping, valves,
fittings and other hardware.
17. Complete chilled water system including pumps, expansion tanks, piping, valves,
fittings and other hardware.
18. Condensate piping.
19. Condensate pumps
20. Constant volume and variable air volume air handling units, including fans, coils,
filters, motors and mixing boxes.
21. Coordination drawings.
22. Ductwork, piping, tanks and equipment insulation.
23. Electric cabinet heaters.
24. Equipment bases and supports.
25. Expansion joints.
26. Expansion tanks.
27. Fans : supply, exhaust, return, ventilation, miscellaneous, etc.
28. Fin-tube radiation.
29. Flexible connections for pumps and other vibrating and rotating equipment.
30. Flexible ductwork.
31. Grilles, registers, and diffusers.
32. Heat exchangers.
33. Hoisting and rigging required to complete the work of this Section.
34. Hot water boilers, trim and controls.
35. Hot water heating packaged pumping system.
36. Hot water radiant heating panels: floor, wall or ceiling.
37. Hot water unit heaters.
38. Instruction manuals and startup instructions.
39. Insulation materials.
40. Motors.
41. Motor starters.
42. Piping materials.
43. Pressure gauges.
44. Prime painting.
45. Record drawings.
46. Self-operating temperature regulator.
47. Sheet metal work.
48. Sleeves, inserts and hangers.
49. Sound attenuators.
50. Strainers.
51. Testing and balancing.
52. Thermometers.
53. Unit heaters.
54. Valves.
55. Variable frequency drives. (Furnished by this section, specified under section 26
10 00).
56. Vibration isolators and inertia blocks.
57. Water flow metering stations.
58. Water prefilters and water softener.
59. Water system accessories.
60. Water treatment equipment and chemicals and testing.

August 12, 2013
F. Furnish the following items for installation under other Sections:
1. Starters, except starters in Motor Control Centers (MCC) furnished under

Division 26 10 00.
2. Variable Frequency Drives specified under Section 26 10 00 provided by this
Section.
3. Access Panels.
G. Install the following items furnished under other Sections or by the Owner:
1. Duct Smoke Detectors.
H. Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Cutting and Patching: Openings in masonry, concrete, tile, and other parts of
structure, except drilling for hangers, providing holes and openings in metal
decks, and core drilling.
2. Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary heat for use during construction.
3. Concrete: Housekeeping pads and inertia pads for vibrating equipment.
4. Structural Steel: Equipment supports.
5. Metal Fabrications: Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from

equipment to roof or floor.
6. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Flashing of roof penetrations.
7. Firestops and Smokeseals: Caulking of pipe penetrations through floor slabs and
fire-rated partitions.
8. Metal Flashing and Sheet Metal: Roof and wall penetrations.
9. Access Panels: Access to all equipment requiring access including but not limited
to VAVs, circuit setters, concealed valves, cleanouts, and water hammer
arrestors.
10. Painting: Except as specified herein.
11. Acoustical Ceilings: Removal of existing ceilings for new work under this
Section.
12. Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements.
13. Section 20 05 48 - Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control.
14. Section 23 09 00 Building Controls System.
15. Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

August 12, 2013
16. Section 26 10 00 - Electrical: Power and alarm wiring. Variable frequency

drives.
I. Allowances: Refer to pertinent Sections of Division 1 for description of work under this
Section requiring Allowances.
J. Unit Prices: Refer to pertinent Sections of Division 1 for description of work under this
Section requiring Unit Prices.
K. Alternates: Refer to pertinent Sections of Division 1 for description of work under this
Section affected by Alternates. Air cooled chiller and associated hydronic components in
lieu of air cooled condensing unit.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. B9.1: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

2. B31.5: Refrigeration Code and Heat Transfer Components
3. Z21: Gas, Oil and Solid Fuel Appliances and Equipment
B. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
1. 360: Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment

2. 410: Forced-Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils
3. 430: Central Station Air Handling Units
4. 550: Centrifugal or Rotary Screw Water Chilling Packages
5. 560: Absorption Water Chilling and Water Heating Packages
6. 575: Method of Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment
Space
C. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA)
1. Standard 500: Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters

2. Standard 500D: Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Ratings
3. Standard 511: Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1. B31.1: Power Piping

2. ASME-83: Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
3. CSD-1: Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers
E. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
1. Standard 52: Gravimetric and Dust Spot Procedures for Testing and Cleaning
Devices Used in General Ventilation for Remaining Particulate
Matter
2. Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

August 12, 2013
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. E-84: Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

2. E-477: Standard Method of Testing Duct Liner
3. E-814: Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
4. E90: Laboratory Measurements of Airborne Sound Transmission of
Building Partitions
5. E413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
6. C423-66: Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
1. Standard 112: Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators
2. RS 232:Set of Standards Specifying Three Types of Interfaces
Electrical, Functional and Mechanical
3. RS 485:Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for
Stationary Applications.
4. RJ11: A Six Conductor Modular Jack that is Typically Wired to Four
Conductors
H. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1. Standard MG.1 Motors and Generators
I. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI)
1. Standard 201 Certification Standard for Commercial Water Cooling Towers
J. Adhesives and Sealant Council (ASC)
1. Standard ASC-A-7001A Adhesive Standard for Duct Liner
K. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. No. 555: Fire Dampers

2. No. 555S: Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems
3. No. 900: Test Performance for Air Filter Units
4. No. 723: Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material
5. No. 1479: Fire Tests for Through-Penetration Firestops
6. Fire Resistance Directory
L. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
1. Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems

2. HVAC Duct Construction Standards
3. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
4. Industrial Duct Construction

August 12, 2013
M. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. No. 70: National Electric Code (NEC)

2. No. 72: National Fire Alarm Code
3. No. 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
4. No. 90B: Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
5. No. 101: Life Safety Code
6. No. 255: Surface Building Characteristics of Building Materials
A. Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled, licensed workers who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of
this Section.
B. Substitutions: Comply with pertinent Sections of Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic

Mechanical and Electrical Requirements.
C. All materials and work provided shall be in accordance with most recent editions of
applicable standards and publications of the organizations referenced above.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the pertinent provision of Sections in Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 Basic
B. Organization of Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and product data submittals in
bound packages organized and titled to match the Articles of Part 2 as specified in this
Section.
C. Submit shop drawings and/or product data submittals for all materials and equipment
specified in Part 2 of this Section.
D. Submit sheet Metal Fabrication Drawings.
E. Submit equipment start-up and commissioning reports.
F. Submit duct pressure testing report.
G. Submit record drawings in accordance with the pertinent provisions of Division 1 for
Project Record Documents and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical
Requirements.
H. Submit copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in compliance with the
requirements of Division 1 as specified for Contract Close-Out requirements, Section 20
05 00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements, and the additional requirements
of this Section.

August 12, 2013
I. Prepare and submit shop drawings, O&M manuals and perform training as indicated on
Shop O&M Spare

Products Dwgs Man. Parts Training
List
ACCESS PANELS
ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING
AIR HANDLING UNIT
AIR VENTS
BREECHING AND STACK
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
CHEMICAL TREATMENT SYSTEM
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM ANTIFREEZE
FLUID
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
TEMPERATURE STABILIZING TANK
CONDENSATE PUMPS
CONTROL SYSTEM
DAMPERS AND SPLITTERS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
DUCTWORK
EXPANSION TANK
FILTERS
FINNED TUBE RADIATION
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
FLEXIBLE DUCT
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
HEAT EXCHANGERS/CONVERTORS
HORIZONTAL UNIT HEATERS
HOT WATER BOILERS
HOT WATER REHEAT COILS

August 12, 2013
Shop O&M Spare

Products Dwgs Man. Parts Training
List
INSULATION
MOTORS, DRIVES AND STARTERS
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
PRESSURE GAGES
PUMPS
REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND
ACCESSORIES
SAFETY VALVES
SHEET METAL ACCESS PANELS
SOUND ATTENUATORS
STRAINERS
THERMOMETERS
VALVES
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL
UNITS
VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND SEISMIC
RESTRAINTS
WALL PENETRATION CLOSURES
WATER CHILLER
WATER FLOW MEASURING SYSTEM
WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
1.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATION DRAWINGS
A. Definition: Sheet Metal fabrication drawings are the installation shop drawings normally
prepared by the installing sheet metal sub-contractor.
B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare sheet metal fabrication drawings in accordance with the
requirements for coordination drawings as specified in Section 20 05 00 - Basic

August 12, 2013
C. Submit sheet metal fabrication drawings for review after all coordination with specialty
trades is completed. Drawings shall show the following:
1. Ductwork including sizes and elevations.
2. Duct fittings, transitions and takeoffs.
3. Equipment including terminal boxes, coils, diffusers, grilles, fans, air handling
units, air flow stations, and sound attenuators.
4. Volume, fire, smoke, and automatic control dampers.
5. Duct smoke detectors.
6. Duct access doors.
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare manuals in compliance with the pertinent
requirements of Division 1 Section regarding Contract Close-Out Issues, Section 20 05
00 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements and the additional requirements of
this Section. In addition to the requirements of other Sections, each manual shall include:
as specified in this Section.
2. Lubrication instructions.
3. Equipment Start-Up and Commissioning Reports.
Owners Representatives after preparation and review of the Operations and Maintenance
Manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A. Reference Standards
1. Material, construction and installation shall meet requirements of most recent

editions of the following standards and references, except for more stringent
requirements specified or shown on Drawings:
Standard As Applicable to
SMACNA HVAC Duct Sheet Metal Ductwork; Duct Liners;
Construction Standards (Metal and Adhesives; Fasteners; Flexible Ductwork.
Flexible)

August 12, 2013
Standard As Applicable to
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Duct Leakage Testing
Leakage Test Manual
Industrial Ventilation and Dust Collection System; Canopy Hoods;
SMACNA Industrial Duct 4" and higher negative pressure ductwork
Construction and 3" neg. pressure round ductwork
NFPA 90A Fire Dampers; Fire Resistance

Standards for Ducts and Liners
SMACNA Guidelines for Welding Welded Galvanized, Black Iron and
Sheet Metal Stainless Steel Ductwork
B. General
1. There shall be no tags or labels installed inside of ductwork.
2. Provide supporting and hanging devices necessary to attach entire HVAC system
including ductwork and equipment, and to prevent vibration.
3. Provide vertical and horizontal supports as required by codes to meet minimum

applicable earthquake resistance standards.
4. Ductwork shall be free from vibration under all conditions of operation.

Dimensions shown on Drawings for lined ductwork are net inside dimensions.
Increase ductwork to accommodate lining requirements.
5. Pipe or conduit crossing duct:
a. No pipe, conduit, hanger, Architectural element nor structural member

shall pass through duct without Architect's written approval.
b. Where it is impossible to re-route pipe or conduit and when written

approval has been obtained, increase duct size to maintain constant
cross-sectional area at point of interference. Provide streamlined
enclosure for pipe or conduit, as illustrated in SMACNA.
6. When making offsets and transitions necessary to accommodate structural

conditions, preserve full cross-sectional area of ductwork shown on Drawings.
a. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the following

pressure classifications shall be used for the types of ductwork listed
below:
4" (POS) Class: All supply ductwork from discharge of air

handling units to inlets of terminal volume
boxes.
4" (NEG and POS): All return ductwork.

August 12, 2013
2" Class: All other ductwork.
7. Ducts required to be continuously welded and with all penetrations sealed

(damper rods, access doors, etc.) shall be liquid-tight and shall be airtight. The
leakage test shall yield a zero leak rate. All welding shall use inert gas shielding
with filler rod equal to or exceeding the base metal properties.
8. Sealing Requirements for Class A, Leakage Class 3, Galvanized, Non-Welded

Aluminum or Non-Welded Stainless Steel Ductwork:
a. Transverse Joints
1) During assembly seal all flanged transverse joints with sealing

tape of quality equal to Hardcast Inc. 1902-FR. Corners shall be
sealed as described by SMACNA and when applicable per
manufacturer's published procedures. After sealant has cured,
seal entire joint with Hardcast Inc. RTA-50 adhesive onto
Hardcast Inc. DT tape or approved equal.
2) Seal all non-flanged transverse joints with Hardcast Inc. RTA-50

adhesive onto Hardcast Inc. DT tape or approved equal.
b. Longitudinal Seams
1) Seal all longitudinal seams during ductwork fabrication with

Ductmate PROseal or Hardcast Inc. Cold Seal 1001.
c. Joints and Ductwall Penetrations
1) Seal all duct joints at takeoffs, access doors, damper bearing

penetrations, flexible duct connections etc., with Ductmate
PROseal or Hardcast Inc. Versa Grip 102.
2) Note, access doors and damper rod penetrations shall be

equipped with proper hardware for sealing.
9. Support
a. Hang and support ductwork as defined in Section 4 of the 1995

SMACNA Manual, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal &
Flexible Second Edition or as defined within.
b. Supports, bar/angle reinforcements and other products that are not part of
the duct that are manufactured of uncoated mild steel shall either be
painted with two coats of primer or shall be manufactured of a
galvanized equivalent material.
c. Hanger spacing not to exceed 8 feet.

August 12, 2013
d. Support vertical duct on each floor or slab it penetrates.
10. Connections
a. Connect inlets and outlets of air handling units and fans to ductwork with
flexible connections unless fan has vibration isolator mounts inside unit
with flexible connections and no external vibration isolators. Exception:
Do not use flex on life safety smoke exhaust fans.
b. Indoors, flexible connections shall be neoprene-coated fibrous glass fire

retardant fabric, by Ductmate, Ventfabrics, or Durodyne. Outdoors,
flexible connections shall be Dupont hypalon-coated fibrous glass fire-,
weather-, and UV-resistant by Ductmate, Ventfabrics or Durodyne.
c. Secure flexible connections tightly to air handlers with metal bands.

Bands shall be same material as duct construction.
d. Connections from trunk to branch ducts shall be as detailed on Drawings.
11. Construction
a. No sharp metal edges shall extend into air streams.
b. Install drive slips on air-leaving side of duct with sheet metal screws on
6" centers.
c. Spin in collars shall NOT be used.
12. Joints
a. Longitudinal lock seams shall be double-locked and flattened to make

tight joints.
b. Make transverse joints, field connections, collar attachments and flexible

connections to ducts and equipment with sheet metal screws or bolts and
nuts. Do not use rivets and staples.
c. Round Joints
1) Construct ducts in accordance with Section 3 of the 1995

SMACNA Manual, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal
& Flexible Second Edition.
2) Round ducts shall be spiral seam construction except where

noted.

August 12, 2013
3) Up to 20 diameter: Interior slip coupling beaded at center and

fastened to duct with screws shall be used to join ducts. Seal
joint with an approved sealing compound, continuously applied
around joint prior to assembling and after fastening, making
certain that majority of sealant resides on interior of the joint.
4) 21 72 diameter: Install using a three-piece gasketed

flanged-joint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral
mastic sealant, and one external closure band, which compress
the gasket between the internal flanges. Approved systems:
Ductmate Spiralmate.
d. Flat Oval Ducts
1) Install using the Ovalmate Connection System manufactured by

Ductmate Industries, Inc. Consult the manufacturer for
installation and construction guidelines.
2) Beaded sleeve joints may be used and should be applied using an

approved sealing compound, continuously applied around joint
prior to assembling and after fastening, making certain that
majority of sealant resides on interior of the joint.
13. Prefabricated Transverse Duct Joints
a. Slide-On Transverse Joint Connectors: Prefabricated slide-on transverse

duct connectors and components will be accepted. Duct constructed
using prefabricated systems will refer to the manufacturer guidelines for
sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper
joint reinforcement(s). Approved connection systems: Ductmate
Industries or W.D.C.I.
b. Formed-On Flanges: Formed-on flanges T-25A (T.D.C.) or T-25B

(T.D.F.) will be accepted. Formed-on flanges will be accepted for use on
ductwork 42 wide or less and subjected to 2 static positive pressure or
less. Formed-on flanges will be constructed as T-25 A/B flanges, of
which the construction guidelines are given in Figure 1-4 of the 1995
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
No other construction standards pertaining to formed-on flanges will be
accepted. Formed-on flanges must include the use of corners, bolts, cleat
and gasket.
c. Angles shall be at least 20 gauge. Prefabricated transverse duct joints

shall not be used for duct 16 gauge and heavier, nor for duct 23 gauge or
lighter.
d. Secure angles to duct with screws (using clutched arbor) or spot-welds

spaced as recommended by manufacturer for duct pressure class.

August 12, 2013
14. Elbows and Bends
a. Elbows and bends for rectangular ducts shall have radiused heels and
(where possible) throats and shall have centerline radius of 1.5 times duct
width wherever possible. Elbows for grease exhaust and fume hood
exhaust shall be full radius. Square heeled elbows, turning vanes, or
mitered elbows are not allowed.
b. Where centerline radius is less than 1.5 times duct width (on supply,
return and exhaust ductwork), elbows shall be radius throat with radius
heel and full length splitter vanes when required. Minimum inside radius
(not centerline) shall be 2". Install vanes in accordance with SMACNA.
When centerline radius (r) divided by the duct width (w) is less than 1.5,
provide the following number of splitter vanes:
r/w No. of Vanes

0.7 to 01.49 1
0.6 to 0.69 2
0.55 to 0.59 3
c. For round ductwork provide stamped elbows, with centerline radii equal
to 1-1/2 times duct diameter, or gored elbows as follows:
Angle Gores
0 36 2
37 -72 3
73 -90 5
d. Elbows for flat oval ducts shall have centerline radii equal to 1-1/2 times
duct diameter in plane of bend, or gored elbows with gores as specified
for round ducts.
15. Duct Mounted Access Panels/Doors
a. Provide proper pressure and leakage rated, gasketed, duct mounted

access panels/doors. In insulated ducts, access doors shall be insulated
double wall. Gauges of door materials, no. of hinges, no. and type of
door locks shall be as required by the SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards. Unhinged doors shall be chained to frame with a minimum
length of 6" to prevent loss of door. For seal Class A, hinged doors are
not acceptable, screwed or bolted access panels are not acceptable.
Access doors shall be leakage rated, neoprene gasketed UL 94 HF1
listed, DUCTMATE "Sandwich." Door metal shall be the same as the
attached duct material. For grease and high temperature ducts, door
assembly shall be rated for 2300 degrees F. The minimum sizes are:
1) Fire dampers - 12" x 12", or larger.

August 12, 2013
2) Combination Fire/Smoke dampers - 12" x 12", or larger.
3) Smoke dampers - 6" x 6" minimum.
4) Automatic control dampers - 6" x 6" minimum.
5) Manual volume dampers 2 sf and larger - 6" x 6" minimum.
6) Inlet side to all coils - 12" x 12", or larger.
7) Suction and discharge sides of inline fans - 24" x 24" minimum.
8) At additional locations indicated on drawings, or specified

elsewhere - 12" x 12" minimum.
9) Flow measuring stations - 12" x 12" or larger.
10) Provide access door for all supply air ductwork upstream and
downstream of each elbow and tee and at intervals of
approximately 40 ft. to allow maximum reach of 20 ft. in straight
horizontal runs for cleaning - 24" x 24" unless duct size is
smaller in which case largest size possible shall be used (min. 6"
x 6").
b. Access doors are not shown on the drawings, but shall be provided in
accordance with the above.
16. Extractors shall have adjusting rod and locknut on outside of duct.
17. Plenums and connections to louvers:
a. Shall be 18 ga. minimum cross-broken and properly reinforced with

galvanized angle irons to SMACNA requirements.
b. Shall have bottom and corner seams soldered watertight at least 12" up
from bottom.
c. Shall have neoprene gaskets or other non-corrodible material to make

connections to louvers watertight.
d. Shall pitch connection back towards the louver. Provide half-coupling

drain connection at bottom of plenum unless noted otherwise Pipe drain
to nearest floor drain.
e. Shall have unused portions of louvers blocked-off with sheet metal;

sealed air- and water-tight; insulated with 2" thick 6-lb. density rigid or
board insulation.

August 12, 2013
18. Materials
a. Sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized sheet

metal with G90 Commercial coating according to ASTM A653/A653M
and A924/A924M unless specified otherwise.
b. Stainless steel ductwork shall be 316/No. 4 finish for exposed duct,

304/No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
19. Flexible Ductwork
a. Flexible ductwork, connecting to uninsulated or unlined duct, shall be

vinyl coated fiberglass cloth 0.0057" minimum thickness, 25 strands per
inch minimum thread count with corrosion-resistant helical wire
reinforcement. Flex duct shall be U.L. rated for 12" W.C. positive
pressure, 2" W.C. negative pressure with a maximum velocity of 4000
FPM. Flexduct must be listed as a Class 1 Connector according to UL
181 and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A - maximum ASTM
E-84 fire hazard rating shall be 25 flame spread, 50 fuel contributed and
50 smoke developed. Flexible duct shall be equivalent to Flexmaster
Type 4.
b. Flexible duct connected to insulated or lined duct shall be insulated with

1-1/2", 1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation and flame retardant (UL
Listed) vapor barrier, meeting ASTM E-84 rating.
c. Submittals shall include data on core, in addition to other data listed

above required to ensure that submitted product meets the requirements
of these specifications.
d. Provide sealing compound and draw bands for installation. See further
paragraphs in this specification, and details for other installation
requirements.
e. Provide supports at manufacturer's recommended intervals. Sag shall not

exceed 1/2" per foot of spacing between supports. Ducts shall not
exceed 6 feet long and shall be used for straight run only, no offsets or
turns.
f. Hanger and saddle in contact with flexible duct shall be wide enough to
prevent restriction of internal duct diameter when weight of supported
section rests on hanger or saddle material.
g. Factory-installed suspension systems integral to flexible duct are

acceptable as alternative hanging method when manufacturer's
recommended procedures are followed.
h. Collars to which flexible ducts are attached shall be at least 2" long.
Sleeves for joining sections of flexible duct shall be at least 4" long.

August 12, 2013
i. Runouts from ducts to inlet connections of air terminal boxes, except fan
boxes, shall not be flexible duct.
j. Apply sealing compound to metallic surface at connection of flexible

duct with sheet metal ducts, collars and mixing boxes. Slip flexible
ductwork over sealing compound. Complete seal with
commercially-made draw bands.
20. Provide factory fabricated round or oval ductwork and fittings as manufactured
by United Sheet Metal Company, Semco or Lindab.
C. 2" and Lower Pressure Class Metal Ductwork Rectangular
1. Ducts wider than 19" with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel shall be
beaded or cross-broken.
2. Internal stiffening struts shall only be used upon prior written approval of the
Architect.
3. Make changes in duct size with tapered connections as required by SMACNA.

Changes shall NOT exceed 30 from line of air flow. Take-off to the diffusers
shall be 45 leading edge type or Bellmouth type.
4. Transverse joints shall be TDF/TDC or slip joints; use flat or standing seam
according to SMACNA. Where duct size requires standing seam, but space
restrictions dictate flat seam, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
D. 2" and Lower Pressure Class Metal Ductwork Round
1. Joints
a. Longitudinal joints shall be spiral seam, butt welded, lap and seam
welded, or ACME lock-grooved seam. Snap lock seams shall be used on
1/2" w.g. pressure class duct only.
b. Transverse joints shall be beaded sleeve joint or other approved joints

listed in SMACNA. Use three or more sheet metal screws at 15"
uniform intervals along circumference of joints.
2. Branch fittings shall be conical tee (Buckley or equal) or combination tee as

shown in SMACNA.
E. 3" and 4" Pressure Class Metal Ductwork Rectangular
1. Joints
a. Joints shall be prefabricated type by TDC, TDF or Ductmate. See

Prefabricated Joints paragraph for specific requirements.

August 12, 2013
2. Duct reinforcement spacing and type shall comply with SMACNA.
3. Ductwork on both sides of transitions shall be run in same horizontal axis.
4. Diverging section slope shall be 1-1/2" per foot or less if possible.
5. Contraction section slope shall not exceed 7" per foot.
6. Takeoffs shall be 45 leading edge type except that Bellmouths (Buckley or equal)
may be used for takeoffs to terminal boxes if the distance between the box and
point of takeoff is less than 8 ft.
7. Ducts with an aspect ratio greater than 3:1 shall be minimum of 18 gauge unless
a thicker gauge is required by SMACNA.
F. 3" and 4" Pressure Class Metal Ductwork - Flat Oval - Single Wall
1. Joints
a. Ducts shall have spiral lock seams or longitudinal seams. Seams and
joints in fittings shall be continuously welded. If coating is damaged
during welding, repair joints to prevent corrosion.
b. Transverse joints shall be slip or flanged.
c. Ductmate Ovalmate Construction System.
G. 3" and 4" Pressure Class Metal Ductwork - Round - Single Wall
1. Joints
a. Longitudinal seams shall be lock spiral, lock longitudinal or butt welded

longitudinal.
b. Transverse joints shall be slip joints. Draw band joints shall be used on
longitudinal seam duct only. Loose flange Ductmate Spiralmate or
Vanstone joints may be used on ducts over 36" in diameter.
c. Seams and joints in fittings shall be continuously welded. If coating is

damaged during welding, repair joints to prevent corrosion.
2. Branch fittings shall be conical tee or combination tee as detailed in SMACNA.
H. 6" and 10" Pressure Class Metal Ductwork - Round - Single Wall
1. Joints
a. Longitudinal seams shall be lock spiral, lock longitudinal or butt welded

longitudinal.

August 12, 2013
b. Take offs shall be conical.
I. Combination Fire Smoke Dampers
1. Combination fire smoke dampers with air-foil shaped blades meeting the
requirements of the latest edition of UL Standard 555 and UL Standard 555S.
2. Due to the layout, some dampers may be out of the wall or floor through
penetration combination fire and smoke dampers. Coordinate with space
available in field.
3. References
a. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
b. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices.
c. IBC International Building Code.
d. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
e. NFPA 92A - Smoke-Control Systems.
f. NFPA 92B Smoke Control Systems in Atria, Covered Malls, and

Large Areas.
g. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
h. UL 555 - Standard for Safety; Fire Dampers.
i. UL 555S - Standard for Safety; Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in

Smoke Control Systems.
4. Submittals
a. Comply with requirements of Section 20 05 00 - Submittal Procedures.
b. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.
1) Include UL ratings, leakage, pressure drop, and maximum

pressure data.
2) Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation
details.
3) Verify conformance to NFPA, UL, BSA or MEA, CSFM, and
applicable building code.
4) Include damper pressure drop data based on tests and procedures
performed in accordance with AMCA 500.

August 12, 2013
5. Quality Assurance
a. Dampers shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of

5 years.
b. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest
UL requirements.
c. Damper pressure drop ratings shall be based on tests and procedures

performed in accordance with AMCA 500 and certified by AMCA (if
applicable).
6. Delivery, Storage, And Handling
a. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened

containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer
and material.
b. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage and
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
c. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and
installation to prevent damage.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Ruskin Company, model FSD60 series.

b. Air Balance Inc.
c. Nailor
d. Greenheck
8. Ratings:
a. Fire Resistance:
1) 1-1/2 hours in accordance with UL555.
b. Smoke Rating:
1) FSD60 - Leakage Class I Smoke Damper in accordance with

UL555S. A Class l smoke damper leaks no more than 8 cubic
feet per minute (.23 m3/min) at 4 in. wg. (1 kPa) differential
pressure.
c. Elevated Temperature Rating:
1)

August 12, 2013
d. Air Flow Rating:
1) 2000 fpm.
e. Differential Pressure Rating: 4 in. wg.
9. Construction:
a. Frame: 5 inches x minimum 16 gage (127 x minimum 1.6 mm) one-

piece roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped channel, reinforced at
corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gage (2.3 mm) U-channel type
frame.
10. Blades:
a. Style: True airfoil-shaped, single piece, double skin. Box or Square type
blades will not be accepted.
b. Action: Opposed.
c. Material: Minimum 14 gage (2.0 mm) equivalent thickness, galvanized
steel.
d. Width: Maximum 6 inches (152 mm).
11. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless steel sleeve, turning in extruded hole in

frame.
12. Seals:
a. Blade: Inflatable silicone fiberglass material to maintain smoke leakage
lly attached to blade edge (glue-

on or grip type seals are not acceptable).
b. Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type. Glue-on seals

will not be acceptable
13. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
14. Axles: Minimum ½ inch (13) diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically
attached to blade.
15. Mounting: Vertical and/or Horizontal.
16. Temperature Release Device: Heat-Actuated, Quick Detect.
a. Close (in a controlled manner) and lock damper during test, smoke
detection, power failure, or fire conditions through actuator closure
spring. At no time shall actuator disengage from damper blades.

August 12, 2013
b. Allow damper to be automatically and remotely reset after test or power

failure conditions. After exposure to high temperature or fire, inspect
damper before reset to ensure proper operation.
c. Controlled closing and locking of damper in 7 to 15 seconds to allow

duct pressure to equalize. Instantaneous closure is not acceptable.
17. Release Temperature:
a. 165 degrees F (74 degrees C).
18. Actuator:
a. Type:
1) Electric 24V, 60 Hz, two-position, fail close.
b. Mounting:
1) External.
c. Finish: Mill galvanized.
19. Accessories
a. Indicator or Auxiliary Switch Packages:
1) SP 100 Switch Package Two position indicator switches linked

directly to damper blade to remotely indicate damper blade
position.
20. Factory Sleeve:
a. Minimum 20 gage (1.0 mm) thickness, minimum 17 inches (432 mm)

long.
b. Silicone caulk factory applied to sleeve at damper frame to comply with

leakage rating requirements.
21. Breakaway Connections:
a. Drivemate.
b. Ductmate.
c. TDF.
22. Source Quality Control
a. Factory Tests: Factory cycle damper and actuator assembly to assure

proper operation.

August 12, 2013
23. Examination
a. Inspect areas to receive dampers. Notify the Engineer of conditions that

would adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the
dampers. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
24. Installation
a. Install dampers at locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance

with manufacturer's UL approved installation instructions.
b. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running
horizontally.
c. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening.
d. Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades,
actuator, or jackshaft.
e. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly

weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.
f. Automatic Dampers: Install automatic dampers furnished under

Automatic Temperature Control Section, as shown on Drawings, and as
specified. Provide sealed penetrations for Seal Class A ductwork.
J. Static Fire Dampers
1. Provide fire dampers throughout air supply system as shown on Drawings and as
required by applicable codes, standards and authorities. Provide access door for
each fire damper of sufficient size to repair internal link (see access panel/door
section).
2. Ratings
a. Fire Resistance
1) Dampers shall have a UL 555 resistance rating of 1-1/2 hours in

barriers with fire resistance fire rating less than 3 hours.
b. Fire Closure Temperature: Each fire damper shall be equipped with a

factory installed heat responsive device (fusible link) rated to close the
damper when temperature at the damper reaches:
1) 165°F

August 12, 2013
3. Static Fire Damper Construction
a. Frame: Galvanized steel (in gauges required by manufacturers UL

listing).
b. Sleeves: Damper shall be supplied as a single assembly with an integral

factory sleeve.
c. Retaining Angles: Damper shall be supplied with factory retaining

angles sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with the
manufacturers UL listing.
d. Blades: Galvanized curtain style. Damper blades shall be out of the air
stream.
e. Closure Device: Fusible link (replaceable).
f. Where duct passes through fire walls or partitions, the spaces around the
fire damper sleeves shall have the necessary clearance for expansion in
conformance with the UL approval. Installation shall conform to all UL-
555 requirements.
g. Use of dampers shall NOT reduce net free area of duct.
h. Dampers shall be installed per SMACNA with breakaway connections

and nose pieces on duct liner (see SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards).
i. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturers UL Installation

Instructions, labeling, and NFPA 90A at locations indicated on the
drawings.
j. Dampers must be accessible to allow inspection, adjustment, and

replacement of components. Furnish any access doors in ductwork or
plenums required to provide this access. Furnish any access doors
required in walls, ceilings or other general building construction.
k. Install dampers square and free from racking.
l. The installing contractor shall provide and install bracing for multiple
section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against
system pressure. Attach multiple damper section assemblies together in
accordance with manufacturers instructions. Install support mullions as
reinforcement between assemblies as required.
m. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening.
4. Fire dampers shall be Air Balance, Greenheck, Ruskin, Nailor Industries or

Prefco.

August 12, 2013
K. Volume Dampers
1. Provide manual adjustable volume dampers, with extended mount indicating and
locking quadrants:
a. On each supply, return and general exhaust duct take-off.
b. At each take-off to register, grille or diffuser (not all are shown on

drawings).
c. As indicated on details on drawings.
2. For Seal Class A, penetrations shall be provided with sealed assemblies, Ventlok
HIVEL 641 and HIVEL 609 end bearing or approved equal. For insulated ducts
provide proper assembly.
3. Dampers shall be 1/2" smaller in both dimensions or 1" smaller diameter than
size of duct in which they are installed; e.g., use 23-1/2" by 23-1/2" damper for
24" square duct.
4. Dampers larger than 12" in height shall be opposed multi-blade as manufactured

by Air Balance, Greenheck, Ruskin and Nailor. Below 12 in height as
manufactured by Durodyne, Titus and Young.
5. Damper blades shall be two gauges heavier than adjoining ductwork, and shall be
riveted to supporting rods. Hem over edges parallel to rods.
6. Brackets shall be galvanized metal, secured to ductwork with sheet metal screw
with locking quadrant arms (see seal class section for additional requirements).
Provide 2" handle extension for all dampers on externally insulated ductwork.
7. Volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the plans, but dampers shall be
provided as necessary for system balancing.
L. Automatic Dampers: Install automatic dampers furnished under Automatic Temperature

Control Section, as shown on Drawings, and as specified. Provide sealed penetrations
for Seal Class A ductwork.
M. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
1. Provide steel diffusers, registers and grilles for supply, return and exhaust outlets,
of size, type and design shown on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers shall be
Trox, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price or Titus.
2. Equipment shall be tested and rated per ASHRAE 91-70.
3. Equipment shall handle air quantities at operating velocities:
a. With maximum diffusion within space supplied or exhausted.

b. Without objectionable air movement as determined by Architect.

August 12, 2013
c. With sound pressure level not to exceed NC 30.
4. Supply, return and exhaust outlets shall have opposed blade volume dampers
operable from front, where scheduled.
5. Supply registers shall have two sets of directional control blades.
6. Diffusers within same room or area shall be of same type and style to provide
Architectural uniformity.
7. Surface mount diffusers, registers and grilles shall be furnished with gaskets and
installed with faces set level and plumb, tightly against mounting surface.
8. Finish shall be as directed by Architect.
9. Coordinate diffusers, registers and grilles with ceiling and wall construction.
Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact lengths and for framing and mitering
arrangements that may differ from those shown on HVAC Drawings.
N. Displacement diffusers for flush installation in a framed wall.
1. Air distribution faceplate with integral geometrically arranged plastic nozzles

with deflection scoops. Every nozzle provides a constant flow from the passing
airstream and directs it to the face plate. Perforated flat sheet metal face
providing a low-turbulence low velocity discharge, galvanized sheet steel,
powered-coated, standard color white, other colors optional. Rectangular air
inlet.
2.2 DUCTWORK, ACOUSTICAL LINING
A. Provide 1" thick acoustical lining by Certainteed, Knauf, Owens Corning or Manville for
following ductwork:
1. Supply and return air ductwork, including plenums, for minimum of 20 feet from
air handling units (or to sound attenuator if attenuator is located further than 20'
from fan). Exception: 3 feet before and 20 feet after humidifiers (use external
wrap); and dedicated life safety smoke exhaust systems.
2. Exhaust ductwork, including plenums, for minimum of 20 feet from fans.

Exceptions: kitchen hood, dishwasher, shower exhaust, and fume hood system.
3. Low pressure duct downstream from variable and constant volume boxes.
4. Sound attenuation boots.
5. Ductwork indicated as lined on Drawings.
6. 10 linear feet off each VAV box unless an integral sound attenuator is scheduled.
7. All return ductwork between grilles in vertical runs.

August 12, 2013
B. Increase duct dimensions to accommodate lining while maintaining inside clear

dimensions shown on the drawings.
C. Lining shall be as follows:
Minimum Maximum K-Factor

Lining for Material NRC at 75 F Mean
½, 1, 2 Class Black, matfaced, 2 pound 0.75 0.24

ductwork (positive density, flexible glass
or negative)
1. For all lined ductwork at the inlets and outlets of fans, and for all lined medium
and high pressure ductwork (including plenums) within 20 feet from AHU's
provide a perforated 24 gauge aluminum or 28 gauge galvanized steel liner, with
28% minimum free area on the side of the liner exposed to the moving airstream.
Metal liner shall be held in place by weld pins spaced no more than 12" O.C.
D. Materials and installation shall meet following standards, as applicable:
1. NFPA-90A, UL723, NFPA-255
2. SMACNA Duct Liner Applications Standard
3. SMACNA Mechanical Fasteners Standard
4. Adhesive and Sealant Council: Adhesives Standard for Duct Liner -

ASC-A-7001A
5. ASTM E-84 fire hazard classifications of 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed,

and 50 fuel contributed.
E. Duct liner shall be installed without interruptions or gaps, using 100% coverage of
adhesive and mechanical fasteners. Mechanical fasteners shall be welded or secured
mechanically to duct on 12" maximum centers.
F. Cut liner to ensure overlapped and compressed longitudinal joints at corners. Transverse
joints in liner shall abut precisely. Seal joints against fiber entrainment with approved
adhesive, as recommended by manufacturer. Use sheet metal nosing at beginning of
lining (in direction of flow) to minimize erosion.
G. The contractor shall ensure the integrity of acoustical lining when slip in duct heaters are
installed; loose lining shall not flap about in the airstream. Secure edges of lining with
sheet metal nosing, where liner is interrupted to make room for the slip in heaters.
H. Submit samples and catalog data for duct liner, mechanical fasteners, and adhesive to
Architect for approval.

August 12, 2013
I. Friction coefficient correction factor at 1000 FPM shall be no greater than 1.1. Liner
shall be Certain-teed Ultra Liner, Knauf Duct Liner M or Manville Linacoustic. Other
liners from these manufacturers with friction coefficient correction factors greater than
listed above, are not acceptable.
J. Mylar used for vapor barrier shall meet ASTM E-84 classification.
K. Any cut liner due to duct takeoffs and branches shall be totally sealed at edges (with sheet
metal nose pieces) to prevent entrainment of loose fibers.
2.3 DUCTWORK SILENCERS
A. Provide prefabricated duct silencers as scheduled and as described herein, at locations

shown on Drawings, by Industrial Acoustics, Commercial Acoustics or Vibroacoustics.
B. Outer casings of rectangular silencers shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel as required by

ASHRAE and SMACNA Standards.
1. Seams shall be lock-formed and mastic filled.
2. Interior casing for rectangular silencers shall be 26 gauge perforated galvanized

steel.
C. Filler material shall be inorganic mineral or glass fiber packed under not less than 5%
compression. Material shall be inert and vermin- and moisture-proof. Filler shall have
ASTM E-84 (NFPA Standard 255, UL No. 723) combustion rating of no greater than 25
flame spread, 15 smoke developed and 20 fuel contributed.
D. Silencers shall not leak air or fail structurally when subjected to differential pressure of
8" w.g. inside to outside of casing.
1. Acoustic testing shall meet ASTM E-477 standard method of testing duct liner
materials and manufactured silencers for acoustical and airflow performance.
2. Tests shall be run both with and without air flowing through silencer, and at not
less than three different flow rates.
3. Ratings shall be based on test data from nationally known, qualified independent
laboratory.
4. Test methods shall eliminate effects due to end reflection, vibration, flanking
transmission, and standing waves in reverberant room.
5. Air flow and pressure loss measurements shall be made in accordance with
applicable portions of ASME, AMCS, and ADC airflow tests.
E. Air flow shall be in same direction as attenuation for tests on dynamic insertion loss.
Sound power levels shall be measured at downstream end of silencer. Dynamic insertion
loss in dB shall not be less than that scheduled at scheduled face velocity.

August 12, 2013
F. Silencers shall not produce self-noise levels that would create sufficient noise to cause
the occupied space noise to be above its target noise level.
G. Installation of Duct Silencers
1. Silencer manufacturer's basic installation instructions shall not be compromised.

Duct silencer supplier or qualified representative shall be responsible for
providing such supervision as may be required to ensure correct and complete
installation of duct silencers.
2. Silencers shall be resiliently isolated from building construction at points of

penetration of building structure with 1/2" - 3/4" minimum of 3 lb/cf density
fibrous glass. Seal penetration airtight with non-hardening caulk.
3. Multiple silencer units grouped together in parallel within duct system shall be
sealed airtight with sealant by Ductmate, United Sheet Metal, 3M or Hardcast.
2.4 INSULATION, DUCTWORK
A. General
1. Insulation shall be Certain-Teed, Knauf, Johns-Manville or Owens Corning.

Install insulation, mastics, adhesives, coatings, covers, weather-protection and
other work exactly as required by manufacturer's recommendations. Materials
shall meet requirements of Adhesive and Sealant Council Standards and
SMACNA.
2. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by
Architect. Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and other foreign matter prior to
installation of insulation.
3. Leaks in vapor barrier or voids in insulation will not be accepted.
4. ASTM E-84 minimum fire hazard ratings shall be 25 flame spread, 50 fuel
contributed and 50 smoke developed.
5. Where ducts are insulated, flexible connections to ducts shall be insulated.
6. Insulate standing seams with same material and thickness as duct.
7. Acoustically lined ductwork shall not be insulated externally, except as noted

otherwise.
8. Return ductwork in ceiling plenums shall not be insulated.
9. Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and in sleeves.
10. Transmission rates of vapor barriers shall not exceed 0.02 perms.

August 12, 2013
11. Do not insulate fibrous glass duct.
B. Concealed Rectangular, Flat Oval and Circular Ductwork
1. Insulate supply and fresh air ducts and plena in concealed spaces and return duct
not in ceiling plenum with at least 1-1/2" thick fibrous glass duct wrap, with
foil-kraft flame resistant vapor barrier.
2. Insulation density shall be 3/4 lb/cf and maximum K-factor shall be 0.30 at 75
deg. F mean temperature.
3. If insulation does not have precut lap make lapped, butt joints by cutting 2" strip
of insulation away from vapor barrier. Apply 6" strips of approved adhesive on
16" centers and wrap duct with insulation. Staple lapped joint with
outward-clinching staples. Seal stapled joints airtight with approved vapor
barrier mastic or pressure-sensitive tape.
4. For rectangular duct 24" or larger in any dimension, augment application method
specified in item 3 with approved mechanical fasteners, such as weld pins with
speed washers, on 18" centers on bottom of duct.
5. Cover breaks in vapor material with patches of same material, secured with
adhesive and staples. Seal staples with approved vapor barrier coating.
6. Fill voids in insulation at jacket penetrations and seal with vapor barrier coating.
7. Seal and flash terminations and punctures with fibrous glass cloth between two
coats of vapor barrier coating.
8. Terminate vapor barrier and extend insulation at standoff brackets.
C. Exposed Rectangular Ductwork
1. Insulate exposed supply, return and fresh air ducts and exposed plena with 1"
thick, semi-rigid fibrous glass boards with factory-applied fire retardant
foil-reinforced kraft vapor barrier facing.
2. Insulation density shall be 3 lb./cf with maximum K-factor of 0.23 at 75 F mean

temperature.
3. Impale insulation on mechanical fasteners applied to duct surface on 12" centers.

Use at least two rows of fasteners on each side of duct. Provide fastener rows
within 3" of seams and edges. Secure insulation with suitable speed washers or
clips firmly embedded in insulation. Provide additional fasteners as necessary on
cross-broken ducts.

August 12, 2013
4. Extend insulation to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections 1"
and less; do not carry over. Vapor barrier jacket shall be continuous across
seams, reinforcing and projections. Insulation and jacket shall be carried over
projections that exceed insulation thickness.
5. Transverse joints shall be butted tightly. Longitudinal joints shall be butted,

ship- lapped or 45 mitered. Seal joints with 4" wide strips of approved vapor
barrier patch material and adhesive, or with approved pressure sensitive vapor
barrier tape.
6. Cover breaks, ribs and standing seam penetrations with patch of jacket material
no less than 2" beyond break; secure with adhesive and staple. Seal staples and
joints with brush-coat of vapor barrier coating.
8. Seal and flash-terminations and punctures with fibrous glass cloth between two
D. Exposed Round and Flat Oval Ductwork
1. Exposed supply, return and fresh air ducts and exposed plena shall be insulated
with at least 1-1/2" fibrous glass ductwrap with foil-kraft flame resistant vapor
barrier.
2. Insulation density shall be 3/4 lb/cf and maximum K-factor shall be 0.30 at 75
deg. F mean temperature.
3. If insulation does not have precut lap make lapped, butt joints by cutting 2" strip
of insulation away from vapor barrier. Apply 6" strips of approved adhesive on
16" centers and wrap duct with insulation. Staple lapped joint with
outward-clinching staples. Seal stapled joints airtight with approved vapor
barrier mastic or pressure-sensitive tape.
4. Cover breaks in vapor material with patches of same material, secured with
adhesive and staples. Seal staples with approved vapor barrier coating.
6. Seal and flash terminations and punctures with fibrous glass cloth between two
8. Cover insulation with 6 oz./sq. yd. canvas coat adhered with approved
fire-retardant lagging adhesive.

August 12, 2013
2.5 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Pipe materials and fitting materials shall be as indicated in Schedule of Pipe and
Fitting Materials. Provide dielectric fittings to connect different piping materials.
2. Steel piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be welded; 2" and smaller shall be screwed.
Steel piping shall be seamless or electric-resistance welded ASTM A53, Grade
B.
3. All steam condensate piping and all direct-buried piping regardless of pipe size
shall be welded. Piping shall be seamless or electric-resistance welded ASTM
A53, grade B.
4. Pipe takeoffs shall have no less than three elbow swings.
5. Solder for copper pipe shall be 95/5 tin/antimony. Lead solder shall not be used.
B. Special Requirements for Water
1. Provide air vent at each high point and drain valve at each low point for complete
system drainage.
2. Provide a shutoff/isolation valve in the following locations in the distribution

system:
a. To each supply and return riser or branch serving two or more devices.
b. To each supply and return riser or branch from a main serving two or
more devices.
c. To each supply and return main take-off serving two or more devices.
d. As shown on the details.
e. Not all valves are not shown on the floor plans or flow diagrams but are
necessary as described.
3. Equipment condensate drains shall be trapped at equipment connection. Drain

lines shall run full size of drain tapping to nearest floor drain or as shown on
Drawings with a pitch of 1" in 20 feet.
4. Pitch water piping upwards and condensate pump discharge downward in

direction of flow 1" in 40 feet, unless otherwise noted.

August 12, 2013
C. Special Requirements for Refrigerant Piping:
1. Refrigerant piping shall be cleaned, dehydrated and capped for refrigerant service
conforming to ASTM B280. All fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.22. All
joints shall be made using a brazing alloy containing silver or using a
copper-phosphorous alloy. Brazing alloys shall have a minimum of 1,100
degrees F melting temperature and shall conform to ASTM B260.
2. Hangers for refrigerant piping shall be 1A band type of copper plated steel.
3. Install all refrigerant piping in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE

Standard B31.5, Refrigerant piping, ASHRAE Standard 15-1992, Standard
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration and all federal, state and local codes.
4. All refrigerant piping shall be installed to ensure that all oil returns to the
compressor. Suction line piping shall be sized on a pressure drop between the
evaporator and the compressor equal to an equivalent temperature of not greater
than 2 degrees F, with a velocity in the vertical rise of not less than 1,000 FPM.
Hot gas line piping shall be sized for 3 psig drop between the compressor and the
evaporator. Liquid line piping shall be sized on a pressure drop not to exceed 5
psig.
5. Test refrigerant system for leaks with halide torch. After leaks have been made
tight, thoroughly dehydrate system and charge with Refrigerant. Be responsible
for any leakage of refrigerant during first year of operation and replace any
refrigerant lost.
6. Adjust the refrigeration system (head pressure control valve and the condenser
pressure differential valve to maintain a constant pressure at the refrigerant
receiver. Adjust the) liquid expansion valve and hot gas regulator to maintain a
relatively constant suction temperature at all entering air conditions of operation
and therefore, a constant discharge air temperature leaving the cooling coil.
7. Provide all pilot operated expansion valves, liquid (and hot gas) solenoid valves,
(hot gas regulators), (side connectors for each coil distributor for hot gas bypass),
(adjustable head pressure control valve, condenser differential pressure valve,
refrigerant receiver), strainers, sight glasses with moisture indicators, silica gel
dryers, purge valves, relief valves, service valves, shut off valves and all other
accessories and appurtenances to provide a complete and properly functioning
refrigerant system under all conditions of operation. Provide sufficient valves to
enable system to be pumped down.
8. Side connector at each coil distributor shall be a Sporlan Type ASC. Hot gas
bypass valve shall be a Sporlan Type ADRPE.
9. Refrigerant service valves shall be designed for use with refrigerant used and
shall have pressure ratings compatible with system working pressure
encountered. Valves shall be packed, wing cap, non-rotating swivel seat disk
valves as manufactured by either Henry or Mueller.

August 12, 2013
10. Check valves shall be brass body suitable for refrigerant liquid or gas service as
required by the system design operation. Valves shall be as manufactured by
either Henry or Mueller.
11. Filter dryer in the liquid line shall consist of a steel cylinder filled with a suitable
desiccant that will not plug, cake, rust, channel or break down and shall remove
both water and acid from the refrigerant. The dryer shall be constructed so that
none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines. The filter dryer shall be
replaceable core type "Catch-All" as manufactured by either Sporlan or Alco.
12. Sight glasses shall be see through type with cover cap on each side. Sight glasses
shall be provided in liquid line before each expansion valve. Sight glasses shall
be "See All" combination moisture and liquid indicator as manufactured by either
Sporlan or Alco.
D. Schedule of Pipe and Fitting Materials
Service Pipe Material For Type of Fitting Pressure Rating psi

Weight Joints Material swp. or Weight
Chilled/hot water Steel Screwed Malleable 150
2" and under Schedule 40 or Iron Copper 125
Copper 95/5 Solder
Chilled/hot water Steel Welded Steel Schedule 40
2 ½ and above to 10 Schedule 40
Heating Steel Screwed Malleable 150
hot water Schedule 40 or Iron Copper 125
2 and under Copper 95/5 Solder
Heating Steel Welded Steel Schedule 40
hot water Schedule 40
2 ½ to 10
Condensate Copper Soldered Copper 125
drain Type L
Cold water Copper 95/5 Copper 125
Type L Soldered
Galvanized Steel Screwed Malleable 150
Vents Schedule 40 Iron
Refrigerant Copper Brazed Wrought 200

Type ACR Copper
1
Underground fuel oil piping shall be installed in PVC conduit to provide secondary
containment.
2
PVC shall not be substituted for copper for the drains of self-contained electronic
humidifiers under any circumstances.

August 12, 2013
E. Connections
1. Provide dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar materials.
2. Provide eccentric reducing couplings to bring pipes flush on top for water service
and flush on bottom for steam service.
3. Branch lines in welded piping shall be made with welding tees except that branch
lines less than one-half diameter of main may be made with Weld-O-Lets.
4. Nipples shall be same material, make and thickness as pipe with which they are
used. Close nipples shall not be used.
5. Make piping connections 2-1/2" diameter and larger to valves and equipment
with flat face welding neck flanges for pressures 125 psig and less raised face for
pressures above 125 psig.
6. Make piping connections 2" dia. and smaller to valves and equipment with 300
psi brass seat unions on steel piping and with heavy semi-flushed brass unions on
copper tubing.
7. Fit flanged joints with Johns-Manville or approved equal ring gaskets. Flanges
shall be faced and drilled to ASA standards and fitted with semi-finished
hexagon machine bolts and nuts of proper number and size.
8. Make screw joints tight with Teflon (polytetrafluoroethylene) tape for water or
litharge-glycerin mixture for steam applied to male threads. Use tapered threads.
9. Make fusion welded joints as required by ANSI B31.1. Make changes in

direction of welded pipe with welded fittings only. Bevel connections before
welding, mechanically or by flame-cutting.
F. Probe Type Leak Detection/Location
1. System
a. The discreet point monitoring system (DPMS) shall consist of a

monitoring unit, probe module, relay module and probes. The DPMS
shall be capable of detecting liquids in contact with the sensor probe
connected to the monitoring panel. It shall not detect vapors or gases.
b. When liquid is detected, an audible alarm shall sound and LCD readout
of the probe activation shall be visible on the front display. The DPMS
shall alarm within one (1) minute or less after contact with liquid.
c. The system supplier shall have at least ten (10) years experience in the
manufacturing of leak detection systems.

August 12, 2013
2. Components
a. The standard sensors shall be probes. The probes shall be less than ¾ in
diameter and less than 2 long for use with organic or conductive (water
based) liquids. The probe shall be of solid state construction and in a
corrosion resistant housing with no moving parts. The probes shall reset
after liquids are removed from the probe. Lead wires shall consist of 24
AWG shielded conductor with color-coded insulation.
b. The use of other probes such as float switches, ground water monitoring
or other devises shall use a dry contact to indicate an alarm condition.
Float switch probes shall be resettable after fluids are removed and shall
use material of construction suitable for liquids to be sensed for
corrosion resistance.
c. The monitoring panel shall be modular in design and accept up to sixty-

four (64) probes and sixteen (16) programmable alarm relays.
d. The LCD shall provide indication of the systems status. When a probe
alarms, the type of alarm (active, short or break) and the probe number
shall be indicated. Using the membrane keypad the operator shall be
able to program the system and review the history archive. An RS-232
interface port shall be available for use in remote monitoring of the unit
using ASCII commands. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4X.
3. Safety
a. The unit must be UL Listed and provide connections for intrinsically safe
sensor circuits for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous
locations where required.
2.6 PIPING, PREINSULATED UNDERGROUND
A. Provide preinsulated piping by NOVA, Ricwil or Perma-pipe for underground chilled

water service with thermosetting fibrous-glass-reinforced plastic (FRP) outer casing,
glass foam insulation as specified in Piping Insulation Paragraph, and steel carrier pipe as
specified for applicable service in Piping Paragraph. Pipe shall be 40-ft. straight sections
without fittings.

August 12, 2013
B. Installation and testing of all components of underground piping system shall be in strict
accordance with manufacturers best recommended practice. Give the Owners
Representative 48 hr. notice prior to commencing installation of piping. A field engineer,
employed by the piping system manufacturer, shall be on site during the entire time that
the installation takes place. At the completion of the installation, the manufacturer of the
system shall deliver a letter to the Owners Representative, stating that the piping system
has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions, and that a factory
employed engineer was on site during the entire time that the installation and testing took
place, and that the installation and testing conforms to manufacturers recommended
practice. The general contractor shall also deliver a letter to the Owners Representative
stating that the installation of the piping system was made in accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer. Both letters shall be signed by an officer of the
respective company.
C. Provide structural insulating cement support guides on 10-ft. centers. Guides shall be 1"
wide and same diameter as pipe. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Provide oval, prefabricated expansion ells with oval support guides incorporated in ells.
E. Provide steel plate anchors welded to carrier pipe and bonded to FRP casing. Plate shall
be 3/8" for pipe sizes through 6", 1/2" for 8 through 16" pipe and 3/4" for 18 through 30"
pipe. Provide holes in anchors between carrier and casing, for drain and vent. Pour
concrete thrust blocks at anchors as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Provide compressible silicon rubber, adjustable gland seals between carrier and casing,
suitable for 450 deg. F.
G. Provide 1/2" NPS vent and drain connections on vertical center lines of casing where
pipe terminates inside building or manhole wall, at least 3" inside wall.
H. Provide FRP leak plate fusion welded to casing, protruding 3" beyond outside casing
diameter, where pipe penetrates building wall, as close as possible to center of wall.
I. Provide polyester resin end seals welded to outside casing and bonded to carrier to seal
insulation terminations.
J. Provide steel head plates welded to carrier pipe and to steel sleeve of same size as casing,
at anchors within 5 ft. of piping terminal ends. Casing shall be wound on and bonded to
steel sleeve. Weld drain and vent connections to sleeve.
2.7 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEM
A. General Requirements
1. The contractor at his option may propose for the owners consideration, the use
of a grooved piping system as an alternate for chilled water, condenser, hot water
(below 230°F), dual-temperature and glycol as specified below. System shall be
manufactured by Victaulic (Basis of Design), Grinnell, Anvil Intl. or an
approved equal provided comparable performance requirements to the basis are
met.

August 12, 2013
2. The Contractor shall include all work, material, connections, installation, related
work, accessories, testing, adjusting and balancing, freight, rigging, labor, profits,
overhead and taxes, and all other items necessary to provide complete and
functional installation as required by Contract Documents.
3. Paragraph titles, service designation references, listings, descriptions,

instructions, etc. in following paragraphs shall be used as a guide in establishing
materials and performance standards. This shall in no way limit provisions of
Contract Documents, nor change, reduce or limit Contractor's responsibility to
comply fully with provisions of Contract Documents.
4. Grooved piping shall not be used on steam systems, or on any hot water piping
loop above 230°F, or any piping installed in inaccessible areas such as hard
ceilings or in shafts or any hot water piping connected to a steam heat exchanger
in the immediate area of the heat exchanger.
5. Pipe, used with grooved fittings, shall be Schedule 40 steel, or as specified in the
"Piping" paragraph of these specifications.
B. Products
1. Grooved Piping
a. Grooved pipe couplings may be used in lieu of welding, threaded or

flanging on 2 " and over carbon steel pipe, on water or glycol services
from 30°F to 230 F within the manufacturer's rated working pressures.
Pipe grooving shall be cut grooved and/or rolled grooved as per
manufacturer's latest recommendations.
2. Branch Connections
a. For piping 2 1/2" and larger, full size branch connections shall be made
with manufactured grooved end tees. Branch connections for less than
full size shall be made with hole cut products. Similar to Victaulic, Style
920 or Style 920N branch connections with locating collar engaging into
hole or Style 72 outlet coupling used to join grooved pipe and to create a
branch connection.
3. Gaskets
a. All gaskets for water services 8 and smaller shall be Grade EHP
EPDM synthetic rubber compound with working temperature of -30F to
250F. For 10 and larger, Grade "E" EPDM synthetic rubber compound
with working temperature of -30°F to 230°F and manufactured in
accordance with ASTM D-2000.
b. Gaskets shall be developed and manufactured by the coupling

manufacturer.

August 12, 2013
c. Gaskets for Copper Systems: Synthetic rubber conforming to the copper

tube size (CTS) outside diameter and coupling housing of elastomers
having properties as designated in ASTM D-2000. Grade EHP EPDM
rated for -30F to 250F.
4. Flange Adapters
a. Flange Adapters shall be similar to Vic-Flange Style 741 (2" - 12") for
connection to ANSI class 125 and 150 flanged components, or
Vic-Flange Style 743 (2" - 12") for connection to class 300 flanged
components. AGS Vic-Flange Style W741 (14-24) for connection to
class 125 and 150 flanged components
b. Flange Adapters for grooved Copper Tubing (26) for copper tubing
for connection to ANSI Class 125 Cast Iron and Class 150 Steel flanged
components. Victaulic Style 641.
5. Standard Fittings (2 12)
a. Fittings shall be full flow cast fittings, steel fittings or segmentally

welded fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end
couplings. All fittings (2 12) shall be similar to Victaulic IPS.
b. Standard Fittings - shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM

A-536 (Grade 65-45-12), painted with a rust inhibiting modified vinyl
alkyd enamel or hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A-153 or zinc electroplated
to ASTM B-633, as required.
c. Standard Steel Elbow Fittings shall be forged steel conforming to ASTM

A-234 Grade WPB (0.375" wall), painted with rust inhibiting modified
vinyl alkyd enamel or hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A-153.
d. Standard Segmentally Welded Fittings - shall be factory fabricated, by

fitting manufacturer, of carbon steel pipe as follows: 3/4" - 4"
conforming to ASTM A-53, Type F; 5" - 6" Sch. 40 conforming to
ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Grade B; 8" - 12" Sch. 30 conforming to
ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Grade B; 14" - 24" O.375" wall conforming
to ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Grade B, painted with rust inhibiting
modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A-153, as
required.
e. Copper System Fittings: Fittings shall be manufactured to copper tubing

sizes, with grooves designed to accept grooved end couplings of the
same manufacturer. Fittings shall be wrought copper, conforming to
ASTM B-75 alloy C12200 or ASTM B-152 alloy C11000 and ANSI
B16.22, or bronze sand castings per ASTM B-584-87 copper alloy CDA
836 (85-5-5-5) per ANSI B16.18.

August 12, 2013
6. Couplings (2 12)
a. Standard IPS Grooved couplings (2 -12) shall consist of two housings

cast of ductile iron. Coupling gaskets will be a synthetic rubber gasket
with a central cavity pressure responsive design and shall be of a grade
suitable for the intended service. Coupling bolts and nuts shall be heat
treated carbon steel, trackhead conforming to chemical and physical
properties of ASTM A-449 and the physical properties of ASTM-A-183.
All rigid grooved couplings shall be similar to Victaulic Co. Style 107,
W07 or 07. Style 177, W77 or 77 flexible couplings may be used with
the Architects approval as outlined in the Pipe Hanging paragraph below.
1) Rigid Type Couplings: Housings cast with offsetting, angle-

pattern bolt pads (metal-to-metal contact) to provide rigidity and
system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1,
31.3 and B31.9. Victaulic Style 107H (8 and smaller) or 07 (10
and 12).
2) Flexible Type Couplings: Used where angular deflection,
vibration attenuation or stress relief are required. Three (3)
Flexible Couplings, located in close proximity to the vibrating
source, may be used in lieu of a flexible connector. Victaulic
Style 177 (8 and smaller), or 77 (10 and 12).
b. Copper System Couplings: 2"-8" for copper tubing consisting of ductile

iron cast housings (cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads), complete
with a synthetic rubber gasket with plated nuts and bolts. Couplings shall
be manufactured to connect copper tubing sized tube and fittings.
(Flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed.)
Victaulic Style 607
7. Fittings (14 24)
a. Fittings shall be full flow cast fittings, steel fittings or segmentally

welded fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept AGS Series
grooved joint couplings. Fittings shall be supplied with wedge shaped
AGS grooves. All fittings 14 to 24 shall be equal to Victaulic AGS.
b. Standard Cast Fittings - shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to

ASTM A-536 (Grade 65-45-12), painted with a rust inhibiting alkyd
enamel or hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A-153 as required.
c. Standard Steel Elbow Fittings - shall be forged steel conforming to

ASTM A-234 Grade WPB (0.375" wall), painted with rust inhibiting
modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A-153 as
required.
d. Segmentally Welded Fittings - shall be factory fabricated, by fitting

manufacturer, of carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53, painted
with rust inhibiting modified vinyl alkyd enamel or hot-dip galvanized to
ASTM A-153 as required.

August 12, 2013
8. Valves, Strainers, Suction Diffusers & Grooved Specialties
a. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used for all applicable services on

grooved piping installations up to and including 300 PSI. Valves shall
be dead-end rated to full working pressure of valve, bi-directional and
bubbletight shutoff:
1) Sizes 2-12: Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal. Valve body shall

be ductile iron with grooved ends. Valves shall have electroless
nickel coated offset ductile iron disc with stainless steel stem and
pressure-responsive elastomer seat. Seat (EPDM) shall be rated
for service up to 250F.
2) Sizes 14" - 24": Victaulic Style AGS Vic®-300 (300 psi rated)
grooved valves. Valve body shall be ductile iron with AGS
grooved ends. Valves shall have PPS coated ductile iron disc
with stainless steel stem.
3) Copper Systems: Sizes 2-1/2" - 6": 300 psi maximum pressure

rating, with copper tubing sized grooved ends. Cast bronze body
to CDA-836 (85-5-5-5). Elastomer encapsulated ductile iron
disc, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with integrally cast stem.
Victaulic Series 608.
b. Ball Valves shall be similar to Victaulic style 726 Ball Valves, designed
for 800 psi (CWP) bubble tight working pressure.
c. Check valves (2" - 24") for pump discharge shall be spring loaded non-
slam design similar to Victaulic Style 716, 779 or W715. Rates as
shown:
1) 2-1/2 and 3: PPS (Polyphenylene Sulfide) coated ductile iron

body and seat, aluminum bronze disc, with disc mounted EPDM
seat. Rated for 300 psi (Victaulic 716H)
2) 4 through 12: Black enamel coated ductile iron body, EPDM

encapsulated ductile iron disc, and welded in nickel seat. Rated
for 300 psi (Victaulic 716H)
3) Series 779 with venturi-like flow measuring ports for sizes 4

through 12. Rated for 300 psi
4) 14-24 black enamel coated ductile iron body, stainless steel

dual-disc and stainless steel spring and shaft. Victaulic W715.
Rated for 230 psi

August 12, 2013
d. Swing Check Valves shall be similar to Victaulic Swinger series 712 in

sizes 2" - 4" with full port opening and bolted coupling closure access.
Valves shall be rated for 300 PSI working pressure, "E" EPDM Disc Seat
ASTM D-2000.
e. Eccentric Balancing Plug Valves shall be Victaulic Style 377 for sizes
3"-12" sizes, with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing
service. Unidirectional bubble-tight shut-off, bi-directional sealing
optional. Ductile iron body, bonnet, and plug, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-
45-12. Plug encapsulated with synthetic rubber suitable for intended
service. Welded-in nickel seat, stainless steel self-lubricating bearings.
175 PSI. AWWA rigid groove dimensions may be adapted to IPS sized
system through the use of Victaulic Style 307 transition couplings.
f. Strainer shall be similar to Victaulic Style 730 Tee Pattern Strainer for
easy access and cleaning with grooved ends for installation in vertical
downflow or horizontal flow position. Victaulic Style 732/W732 "Y"
pattern may be used for sizes 2" - 18".
1) Strainers for 14-24 shall be similar to Victaulic Style W730

T pattern strainer with T-bolt hinged closure and AGS grooved
ends
g. Suction Diffuser shall be similar to Victaulic Style 731-D or W731-D.

Ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-536. Diffuser stainless steel
type 304 frame and perforated sheet with 5/32 or 3/16" diameter holes.
h. Tour and Anderson (1/2" - 12") circuit balancing valves.
1) 2 and Smaller Sizes: 300 psi , threaded or sweat ends, non-

ferrous Ametal® brass copper alloy body, EPDM o-ring seals. 4
turn digital readout handwheel for balancing, hidden memory
feature with locking tamper-proof setting. Victaulic / TA
Hydronics Series 787 STAD or 786 (STAS).
2) 2-1/2 and Larger Sizes: 300 psi , grooved or flanged ends,

ASTM A536 ductile iron body, all other metal parts of Ametal®
brass copper alloy, EPDM O-ring seals. 8, 12 or 16-turn digital
readout handwheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with
locking tamper-proof setting. Victaulic / TA Hydronics Series
789 STAG or 788 (STAF).
3) Koil-Kit Assemblies: Coil hook-up assemblies may be utilized to

reduce space requirements and simplify installation. Victaulic
/TA Hydronics Series 78U (Union Port Fitting consisting of
manual air vent and P/T port) and Series 78Y (Strainer/Ball
valve combination) or Kit 799.

August 12, 2013
i. Tri-Service Pump Discharge Valve Assembly: Combination shut-off,

throttling and non-slam check valve. Vic®-300 MasterSeal butterfly
valve assembled with Style 779 Venturi Check. Working pressures to
300 psi for 2-12. AGS Tri-Service Assembly for 14-24 (232 psi).
j. Victaulic Hole-Cut Products:
1) Bolted Branch Outlet: Branch reductions on 2" through 8"

header piping. Bolted branch outlets shall be manufactured from
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with
synthetic rubber gasket, and heat treated carbon steel zinc plated
bolts and nuts conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-
183. Victaulic Style 920 / 920N.
2) Strapless Outlet: 1/2" or 3/4" NPT outlet on 4" and larger header
sizes rated for 300 PSI. Victaulic Style 923.
3) Strapless Thermometer Outlet: To accommodate industrial glass

bulb thermometers with standard 1-1/4"-18 NEF 2B extra fine
thread and 6" nominal bulb length on 4" and larger header sizes
rated for 300 PSI.
k. In-Line Grooved-end Expansion Joints:
1) 2 through 6 Sizes: Packless, gasketed, type with grooved end

telescoping body, suitable for axial end movement (only) to 3.
350 psi. Victaulic Style 150 Mover®.
2) 3/4" and Larger Sizes: Expansion joint consisting of a series of

grooved end nipples joined with flexible-type couplings. Joint
movement and expansion capabilities determined by number of
couplings / nipples used in the joint. Victaulic Style 155.
l. Expansion Loops: Utilize Flexible Coupling Style 177/77/W77 couplings

only. Rigid couplings shall not be used on loops. Loop shall be sized and
supported in accordance with published guidelines
m. Dielectric Waterways: 1-8 sizes, grooved, plain end, or threaded end,

ASTM A-53 carbon steel or ASTM A-536 ductile iron body, zinc
electroplated, with LTHS high temperature stabilized polyolefin polymer
liner. Victaulic Style 47.
9. Hanging and Installation
a. All components installed and requirements for hanging, supporting,

anchoring, expansion and contraction shall be in accordance with the
latest published instructions of the manufacturer.

August 12, 2013
b. Pressure and temperature ratings shall be as shown in manufacturer's

latest published literature for individual style of coupling and gasket.
Pressure and temperature ranges for valves shall conform to those in
valves paragraph in this specification.
c. Pipe Hanging:
1) Rigid piping systems, using Style 107/07/W07 Zero Flex

couplings or equal, shall be supported in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and as called for by the ASME
Building Services Piping Standard B-31.9.
2) Piping systems using Style 177/77/W77 or other flexible

couplings may be used if explicitly approved by the Owners
Representative. The contractor shall submit a schematic piping
diagram to the Owners Representative. The diagram shall show
all points of anchorage, where flexible type couplings are used
and where rigid couplings are used. The diagram shall show
expansion joints (if any). The diagram must be approved and
signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer.
d. Install all grooved joint products in accordance with the manufacturers

latest installation instructions.
e. Grooved joints shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and
roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.
f. The grooved coupling manufacturers factory trained representative (a

direct manufacturer employee) shall provide on-site training for
contractors field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of
groove, and installation of grooved joint products. The manufacturers
representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation.
Contractor shall remove and replace any joints deemed improperly
installed.
g. AGS series products shall be installed with the latest in accordance with
the latest Victaulic Installation Instructions. Do not install AGS products
with standard grooved-end components. Grooved pipe using an
approved grooving tool equipped with an AGS roll set.

August 12, 2013
SCHEDULE OF OPTIONAL PIPING METHOD (GROOVED JOINT)
CHILLED, CONDENSER, HOT WATER, DUAL TEMPERATURE AND GLYCOL SERVICES

MAXIMUM SERVICE RATING OF 250F
Valve Size Type Body/Trim Type of Maximu
Type Application Body/Seat Connection m
Pressure
Rating
Ball 1½ 2-piece Isolation DI (ASTM A- Grooved 800 PSI
-6 536)/Cr.-plated
stem, ball
TFE seats
Ball 2 1-piece Diverting (3- DI (ASTM A- Grooved 600 PSI

port) 395)/SS
TFE
Butterfly 2- General Isolation or DI (ASTM A- Grooved 300 PSI
24 Service ATC 536) (dead-end
2-Position DI/EPDM to full
rating of
valve)
Balancing/ ½- Flow Isolation and Ametal® Sweat or 300 PSI
Shutoff 2 Indication balancing Brass-Copper Threaded
Alloy/EPDM
Balancing/ 2½ Flow Isolation and DI (ASTM A- Flanged or 300 PSI
Shutoff -16 Indication balancing 536)/EPDM Grooved
Tri-Service 2½ Flow Pump discharge DI (ASTM A- Grooved 300 PSI
-12 Indication isolation, check 536)
and balancing DI/EPDM
Check 2½ Silent, Pump DI (ASTM A- Grooved 300 PSI
-12 Spring- Discharge, 395 & 536)
Assist Piping DI/EPDM
Check 4- Silent, Pump DI (ASTM A- Grooved 300 PSI
12 Spring- Discharge, 395 & 536)
Assist Piping DI/EPDM
Strainer 2- Y-Type ACVs, P&F DI (ASTM A- Grooved 300 PSI
18 HXs 395 &
536)/EPDM
SS 1/16 or
1/8 screen
Strainer 1½ T-Type ACVs, P&F DI (ASTM A- Grooved 750 PSI
-12 HXs 395 &
536)/EPDM
SS 1/8 screen
Strainer 3- Suction Pump Inlet DI (ASTM A- Grooved 300 PSI
12 Diffuser (non-reducing) 395)/EPDM System x
SS 3/16 ANSI Class
screen with 20 150 Pump

August 12, 2013
SCHEDULE OF OPTIONAL PIPING METHOD (GROOVED JOINT)
CHILLED, CONDENSER, HOT WATER, DUAL TEMPERATURE AND GLYCOL SERVICES

MAXIMUM SERVICE RATING OF 250F
Valve Size Type Body/Trim Type of Maximu
Type Application Body/Seat Connection m
Pressure
Rating
mesh start-up Flange
sleeve
2.8 VALVES AND STRAINERS
A. Valves on steam, steam condensate, condenser water, chilled water, hot water, glycol and
fuel oil services shall be as shown on tables.
B. Valves shall have name of manufacturer and guaranteed working pressure cast or
stamped on bodies. Valves of similar type shall be by single manufacturer. Provide
chain operators for valves 3" and larger and that are 7 feet and higher above floor.
Gaskets and packings shall not contain asbestos.
C. Ratings shall include ANSI Class Rating and hole pattern for flanges.
D. Butterfly Valves: Provide lug style butterfly valves shown in tables. Provide balancing
stop on at least one valve per equipment connection and as necessary for balancing
services. When manufacturer requires, valves must be installed in proper direction for
shutoff and dead end service.
1. High Performance valves shall be carbon steel body, threaded-lug with

reinforced Teflon seats, 316 stainless disc and 17-4 stainless stem, by Flowseal,
Keystone, Posi-Seal, Bray, or DeZurik.
2. General Service valves shall be Ductile iron body, threaded-lug with resilient
EPDM seats, bronze disc and 416 stainless stem, by Centerline, DeZurik,
Keystone, or Grinnell.
3. Valves 6" and larger shall have gear operator.
4. Valves smaller than 6" shall have seven-position lever.
5. If valves are used for fuel oil, provide reinforced Teflon seats and 316 stainless
disks.
E. Ball Valves: Provide full port ball valves with reinforced Teflon seats, seals, bearings
and packing. Provide balancing stop on at least one valve per equipment connection and
as necessary for balancing service. Valves on insulated piping shall have 2" extended
stems. All ball valves shall have locking handles to allow servicing and removal of
equipment. Valves shall be by Apollo, Cannon, Kitz, Milwaukee, Rockwell, Stockham,
Grinnell or Watts.

August 12, 2013
F. Globe Valves: Provide globe valves as shown in table by Crane, Jenkins, Milwaukee,
Stockham, Grinnell or Walworth. All packing shall be non-asbestos type.
G. Plug Valves: Provide plug valves with 70% port opening shown in tables for balancing.
Valves shall be by DeZurik, Mueller, Rockwell, Stockham or Walworth. Provide gear
operator with memory indicator.
H. Check Valves: Provide check valves shown in tables by APCO, Milwaukee, Mueller,
Stockham, Grinnell or Metraflex.
I. Spring Loaded Relief Valves: Reliefs shall be brass with external lever,
ASME-approved. For water reliefs pipe discharge to indirect drain. Pipe chiller
refrigerant and steam relief devices through building envelope.
J. Gate Valves: Provide gate valves shown in tables by Crane, Milwaukee or Stockham.
All packing shall be non-asbestos type.
1. In general, valves shall have OS&Y rising stems to indicate position. For
restricted clearances valves shall have non-rising stems. Contractor shall submit
where each type is used.
K. Vacuum Breaker: Provide vacuum breakers as required. Vacuum breaker shall be

installed in the horizontal position, flow arrow pointed towards the coil and of same size
as connected pipe. Mount vacuum breaker above connected pipe and enter pipe tee via
90 ell-drop after vacuum breaker. Inlet to vacuum breaker shall be piped so that it does
not allow discharge from a faulty vacuum breaker to spray on someone or electrical or
wet-sensitive equipment. Piping shall turn towards pieces of equipment it's serving.
Breaker shall be Stockham Figure B-320T.
L. Provide unions for threaded end valves to facilitate removal from pipe.
M. Suction Diffusers
1. Suction diffuser/strainers shall have 200 psi cast iron body and stainless steel
sleeve with 5/32" perforations. Units shall include flanged connections,
removable gasketed cover and straightening vanes units shall be Mueller type
1011, Taco or B&G.
2. Provide 16 mesh start-up strainer.
3. Provide blow-off tapping on bottom of unit.
4. Provide full size inlet and outlet.
N. Combination Balancing Shut-off Valves
1. Provide combination calibrated balancing valves. Acceptable manufacturers

shall be: Armstrong, Bell and Gossett, Flowset, HCI Terminator B, Illinois,
Taco, or Tour Anderson.

August 12, 2013
2. Valves shall be rated for operating pressures.
3. Valves shall be bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled
TFE seat rings. Valves shall have dual temperature and differential pressure
readout ports across valve seat area. Valves shall be equipped with readout ports
fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valves shall have memory stop
to allow valve to be closed for service, then reopened to setpoint without
disturbing balancing position.
4. Each valve shall be equipped with a Venturi flow measuring section and ball
valve.
5. Provide preformed insulation, which permits access for balance and readout.
6. Provide one direct reading flow meter complete with calibration charts for the
project. The meter shall be used for balancing and turned over to the Owner at
the close of the job.
7. Valves shall provide bubble-tight shut off at 150 psi differential.

August 12, 2013
GLYCOL, CHILLED AND CONDENSER WATER SERVICE

Maximum 150 F and 150 psig (½"-12")/125 psig (14"-24")
Specialty Application Type Size Body/Seat Connection Minimum
Body/Trim Rating1,2
Full Port ½"-2" Bronze/Teflon Threaded or 400 psig WOG
Ball Valve Isolation (with 3-pc. Sweat
locking handle)
and Modulation
Full Port ½"-2" Bronze/Teflon Threaded 400 psig WOG
2 pc.
Gate Valve Not Used
Globe ATC Modulation Control Valve 1/2"-2" Bronze/Metal Threaded 400 psig WOG
Valve
Isolation and General 2½"-12" Ductile Threaded Lug 175 psig CWP
Butterfly Modulation Service Iron/EPDM 150 psig bi-
Valve directional
shutoff
150 psig dead
end service
General 14"-24" Ductile Threaded Lug 150 psig CWP
Service Iron/EPDM 150 psig bi-
directional
shutoff
150 psig dead
end service
Plug Value Throttling Non-lubricated 3"-12" Steel/Iron Flanged Class 125
Check Pumps Silent ½"-2" Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG
Valve
Silent Globe 2½"-24" Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125
Piping Y-Pattern ½"-2" Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG
Swing
2½"-24" Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125
Strainer Control Valves Y-Type ½"-2" Bronze/Stainless Threaded 200 psig WOG
and Flow Meters (1/16" dia.)
2½"-4" Iron/Stainless Flanged Class 125
(1/16" dia.)
5"-24" Iron/Stainless Flanged Class 125
(1/8" dia.)
Pump Suction In-Line ½"-2" Bronze/Stainless Threaded 200 psig WOG
Y-Type (1/16" dia.)
(3/16" dia.)3
(¼" dia.)3

August 12, 2013
Angle Suction 2"-12"

Iron/Stainless Flanged Class 125
Diffuser End
(3/16" dia.)3
Suction Pumps
Start Up Strainer =
16 Mesh Bronze
1. These are minimum ratings for ASTM A126, Class B and ASTM B-61 and 62. For higher pressures and
temperatures, adjust these values to include static head plus 1.1 times pressure relief valve setting plus pump
shutoff head pressure. For actual maximum allowable valve and strainer ratings, refer to "Pressure-
Temperature Ratings - Non Shock" tables and "Adjusted Pressure Ratings" for copper tube, soldered end valves
[and strainers].
2. SWP=Steam Working Pressure CWP=Cold Water Working Pressure

WSP=Working Steam Pressure WOG=Water, Oil or Gas
Class=ANSI Standard
3. Use 1/8" dia for plate heat exchanger application.

August 12, 2013
GLYCOL AND HOT WATER SERVICE

Maximum 250 F and 175 psig (½"-12")/125 psig (14"-24")
Specialty Application Type Size Body/Seat, Connection Minimum
Body/Trim Rating1,2
Full Port ½"-2" Bronze/Teflon Threaded or 400 psig WOG
Ball Valve Isolation (with 3-pc. Sweat
locking handle)
and
Modulation
Full Port ½"-2" Bronze/Teflon Threaded 400 psig WOG
2 pc.
Gate Not Used
Valve
Globe ATC Control Valve 1/2"-2" Bronze/Metal Threaded 400 psig WOG
Valve Modulation
Isolation and General 2½"-12" Ductile Threaded 200 psig CWP
Butterfly Modulation Service Iron/EPDM Lug 200 psig bi-
Valve directional
shutoff
200 psig dead
end service
14"-24" Ductile Threaded 150 psig CWP
Iron/EPDM Lug 150 psig bi-
directional
shutoff
150 psig dead
end service
Plug Value Throttling Non- 3"-12" Steel/Iron Flanged Class 125
lubricated
Check Pumps Silent ½"-2" Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG
Valve
Silent Globe 2½"-24" Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125
Piping Y-Pattern ½"-2" Bronze/Bronze Threaded 200 psig WOG
Swing
2½"-24" Iron/Bronze Flanged Class 125
Strainer Control Valves Y-Type ½"-2" Bronze/Stainless Threaded 200 psig WOG
and Flow (1/16" dia.)
Meters
(1/16" dia.)
(1/8" dia.)
Pump Suction In-Line ½"-2" Bronze/Stainless Threaded 200 psig WOG
Y-Type (1/16" dia.)

August 12, 2013

(3/16" dia.)3
Iron/Stainless 5"-24"
Flanged Class 125
(¼" dia.)3
Angle Suction 2"-12" Iron/Stainless Flanged Class 125
Diffuser End (3/16" dia.) 3
Suction Start Up
Pumps Strainer = 16
Mesh Bronze
1. These are minimum ratings for ASTM A126, Class B and ASTM B-61 and 62. For higher pressures
and temperatures, adjust these values to include static head plus 1.1 times pressure relief valve setting
plus pump shutoff head pressure. For actual maximum allowable valve and strainer ratings, refer to
"Pressure-Temperature Ratings - Non Shock" tables and "Adjusted Pressure Ratings" for copper tube,
soldered end valves [and strainers].
2. SWP=Steam Working Pressure CWP=Cold Water Working Pressure

WSP=Working Steam Pressure WOG=Water, Oil or Gas
Class=ANSI Standard
3. Use 1/8" dia for plate heat exchanger application.

August 12, 2013
2.9 INSULATION, PIPING
A. Provide pipe insulation manufactured by Owens Corning, Certain-Teed, Johns-Manville

or Knauf.
B. Insulation shall be fibrous glass insulation with factory-applied fire retardant vapor
barrier jacket with K factor of at least 0.23 at 75 deg. F mean temperature.
C. ASTM E-84 fire hazard ratings shall be 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50 fuel
contributed.
D. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by Architect.
Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and foreign matter prior to installation of insulation.
E. No leaks in vapor barrier or voids in insulation will be accepted.
F. Insulation and vapor barrier on piping which passes through walls or partitions shall pass
continuously through sleeve, except that piping between floors and through fire walls or
smoke partitions shall have space allowed for application of approved packing between
sleeves and piping, to provide firestop as required by NFPA. Seal ends to provide
continuous vapor barrier where insulation is interrupted.
G. Insulate flexible connections to same thickness and with same material as adjoining pipe
insulation.
H. Provide fibrous dual temperature insulation with factory applied vapor barrier jacket on
condensate, chilled water, drain, hot and cold water piping, unless noted otherwise.
I. Provide PVC jacket covers over all pipe insulation located in mechanical rooms within 5
feet of the floor.
J. Cooling coil condensate drain piping shall have 3/4" thick insulation. Insulation
thickness for indoor, chilled water, hot water and cold water piping shall be as follows:
TABLE A Insulation Thickness

Piping System Fluid Runouts 1" main 1-1/4" 2-1/2" 5" to 6" 8" main Insulation
Types Temperatu Up to 2", and Less main main main and Conductivity
re Range, 12' Long to 2" to 4" Larger Btuh-in/Hr- F-SF
F or Less at Mean
Temperature F
HEATING SYSTEMS
Hot Water
Low temp. 141-200 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.25 @ 125
COOLING SYSTEMS
Chilled Water 40-55 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.23 @ 75
Refrigerant or Below 40 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.23 @ 75
brine

August 12, 2013
K. Provide longitudinal lap and 6" wide vapor barrier joint seal strips secured with approved
adhesive.
L. Seal ends of pipe insulation and seal insulation to pipe with approved fire retardant vapor
barrier, at flanges, valves and fittings and at intervals of no more than 21 feet on
continuous runs of piping.
M. Secure covers on concealed pipe with metal bands at least 3/4" wide and no more than
18" apart, spaced to hold ends and centers of each section.
N. Insulate all refrigerant suction piping with 1-1/2 inch thick and all refrigerant hot gas
piping with ¾ inch thick and all condensation drainage piping with ¾ inch thick flexible
elastomeric thermal piping insulation similar and equal to Armaflex AP Pipe Insulation
that meets 25 Flamespread and 50 Smoke-Developed ratings as tested by ASTM E84-89.
All joints, slits and seams shall be sealed with Armstrong 520 contact adhesive to provide
a continuous vapor seal. Coat all insulation that is exposed or that is outdoors with two
coats of Armstrong Armaflex Coating to provide a protective finish.
O. Outdoor Pipe Insulation and Waterproofing (Water Service Only).
1. Provide 1" thick flexible unicellular elastomeric foam rubber tubing insulation by
Armstrong (Armaflex), Manville, Owens Corning or Halstead/Nomaco
(Insultube), with maximum K-factor of 0.27. Install as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Insulate valves and fittings with same thickness insulation as pipe using
manufacturer's preformed fitting and valve insulation or field-fabricated covers
made with manufacturer's templates.
3. Adhere insulation to pipe and seal butt joints with full coverage of insulation
manufacturers approved adhesive.
4. Apply two coats of finish material to insulation.
5. Apply two coats of approved vinyl lacquer coating over woven glass yarn mesh
adhered to insulation surface with Insulcolor or approved equal lagging adhesive.
6. Provide cork or dowel supports and metal shields at pipe hangers and supports as
recommended by manufacturer.
P. Piping outdoors or underground shall be waterproofed with 45 lb. glazed roofing felt, as
follows:
1. Orient laps to shed water.
2. Wire in place with 16 gauge annealed copper wire at 9" on center.
3. Provide 4" butt joint strips and secure with two wire ties.

August 12, 2013
Q. Insulation on Fittings, Valves and Flanges
1. Fittings, valves and flanges shall be insulated with precut, factory-supplied

fibrous glass, or insulated with same material and to same thickness as adjoining
pipe insulation, by Certain-Teed, Knauf, Owens Corning or Manville.
2. Pipe fittings shall be pre-tested, clean and dry before insulation.
3. Installation of insulation wrap on fittings shall be as follows, in order:
a. Wrap insulation around fitting and tuck ends into fitting throat.
b. Edges of adjacent insulation shall be tufted and tucked in, to fully

insulate fitting to thickness of adjacent pipe insulation. Use two or more
thicknesses if necessary.
c. If two layers of insulation are used on fittings, wrap and secure first layer
with twine before applying second layer.
4. Top layer of insulation shall be covered with one piece, PVC, molded jacket
cover. Secure cover with stainless steel tack fasteners inserted into jacket throat
overlap seam.
5. Tape joints with pressure-sensitive vapor barrier tape; tape shall extend 2" on
either side of joint.
6. Prior to taping of joints on chilled water and condenser water lines, apply vapor
barrier mastic (brushed on) to fitting cover, throat overlap and edges. Also apply
vapor barrier mastic to pipe insulation jacket ends.
7. For strainers and other valves or fittings which need maintenance, provide
preformed removable insulation section.
R. Refrigeration Line Insulation
1. Suction lines, hot gas bypass lines, and outdoor liquid lines shall be insulated
with 3/4" thick rigid closed cell foam insulation, Armstrong Rigid Armaflex,
Manville, Owens Corning or Halstead/Nomaco (Insultube), except in computer
room plena.
2. Installation shall meet manufacturer's recommendations. Seal butt joints with

insulation manufacturers approved adhesive.
3. Outside above ground insulation shall be protected with two coats of approved
vinyl lacquer coating over woven glass mesh adhered to insulation with
Insulcolor or approved equal lagging adhesive, as recommended by
manufacturer.

August 12, 2013
4. Refrigerant piping in hung ceiling and underfloor supply and return plena shall
be insulated with 1" thick fibrous glass insulation that meets applicable
requirements of this Paragraph.
2.10 PIPING, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide pipe stands, supports, hangers and other supporting appliances as necessary to
support work required by Contract Documents.
B. Secure vertical piping to building construction to prevent sagging or swinging.
C. Space hangers for horizontal piping as follows:
Nom. Pipe Size Max. Span Min. Rod Size Hanger Type
(inches) (feet) (inches)
1-1/4 and Smaller 7 3/8 Clevis Hanger
1-1/2 9 3/8 Clevis Hanger
2 10 3/8 Clevis Hanger
2-1/2 10 1/2 Clevis Hanger
3 12 1/2 Clevis Hanger
4 14 5/8 1 Rod Roll Hanger
8 - 12 15 7/8 (two) 2 Rod Roll Hangers
D. Horizontal copper tubing shall have maximum hanger spacing of 5 ft. for tubing 1-1/4"
dia. and smaller and 10' for tubing 1-1/2" and larger. Maximum spacing for PVC pipe
hangers shall be 4'.
E. Reduce spacing, regardless of pipe size, as necessary for fittings, valves and other
concentrated loads.
F. Support piping 4" dia. and larger from structure with pipe roll hangers with adjustable
steel rod hangers, sized to accommodate insulation.
G. Support piping 3" dia. and under from structure with Carpenter and Patterson Fig. 100
clevis hangers or approved equal.
H. Hangers shall be by Carpenter and Patterson, F & S, or Grinnell Co. Figure numbers of
Carpenter and Patterson are specified to establish standards of quality for performance
and materials.

August 12, 2013
I. Provide spring hangers with travel stops as specified in Vibration Isolation Paragraph of
Section 20 05 48 and where shown on Drawings.
J. Pipe supports for 4" and larger pipe and insulated high-temperature piping shall have
welded inserts of equal thickness to insulation to prevent compression of insulation.
Other insulated pipe shall have 12", 14 GA shields at hangers, composed of 180 coverage
of galvanized sheet metal and high density, preformed, rigid insulation. Where rollers are
required, shield shall be steel pipe.
K. Hangers for horizontal lines shall be vertically adjustable to obtain pitch requirements of
Piping Paragraph.
2.11 WATER SPECIALTIES
A. Provide water specialties by Bell & Gossett, Taco or Amtrol as follows.
1. ASME constructed, approved and stamped diaphragm expansion tank with

replaceable diaphragm of capacity shown on Drawings designed and tested for
maximum allowable working pressure of 125 psi in accordance with ASME code
for unfired pressure vessels. Expansion tank shall be factory-charged as required
for system.
2. One drain valve for each expansion tank.
3. Automatic air vent valves with manual shut-off for each high point on supply and
return mains with 1/4" copper overflow run to nearest plumbing fixture for
drainage.
4. Air vent valve installed on each piece of equipment.
5. Drain valve at each low point with 3/4" brass heads with hose connections.
B. Provide a Spirotherm (Spirovent Air / Dirt Eliminator), Bell & Gossett, Amtrol or Taco
air eliminator on hot water heating, chilled water and other closed water system. All
units shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected for
specified flow rate with pressure drop not to exceed one foot of head and velocity not to
exceed 4 feet per second. Units to include copper coalescing medium to facilitate
maximum air and dirt elimination. Alternate units shall be furnished with galvanized
steel strainer and stainless steel collector tube for a similar purpose. Provide integral high
capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank. Alternates must include cast iron
float vent rated at 150 psig located at top of vessel. All units will include bottom blow
down connection.

August 12, 2013
C. Provide at high points Spirotherm (Spirotop), Bell & Gossett, Spirax Sarco or approved
equal air release valves on hot and/or chilled water systems and other closed water loops.
All valves shall be cast brass, rated for 150 psig design pressure and 270 degree F
operating temperature. Units to include non-ferrous floats, stainless steel linkage and
Viton seal, which closes against a brass spring operated seat. Alternate units shall be
high capacity cast iron type with brass or Viton shut-off valve. Alternates must be rated
for 150 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F operating temperature.
2.12 INSULATION, EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by
Architect. Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and foreign matter prior to installation of
insulation.
2. No leaks in vapor barrier or voids in insulation will be accepted.
3. Insulation shall be Certain-Teed, Knauf, Manville or Owens Corning and shall be

installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Insulate the following equipment:
a. Chiller
b. Hot and chilled water storage tanks
c. Heat exchangers
d. Expansion tanks
e. Air separators
f. Drain pans
g. Duct-mounted coils
h. Pumps
i. Surge and flash tanks
j. Valve heads
5. Insulation shall be 1" thick fibrous glass rigid block or semi rigid board rated for
temperature intended. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit equipment.
Ensure tight fit. Bevel edges and butt and stagger joints.
B. Secure with bands or wires at intervals recommended by manufacturer, no more than 12"
centers. Provide corner angles.
C. Set cellular glass insulation and seal joints with bedding compound. Fill mineral fiber
joints with insulating cement.
D. Apply two coats of adhesive with fibrous glass cloth embedded in first coat before
application of second. Dry film thickness of finish shall be 1/8". Apply insulating
cement over coated insulation; do not coat removable sections.

August 12, 2013
E. Equipment, which needs servicing, such as pumps and plate heat exchangers shall be
provided with removable insulation sections. Coordinate method of insulating plate heat
exchanger with exchanger manufacturer.
2.13 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING
A. Provide motors and controls. Furnish starters for HVAC equipment. Provide control and
other related wiring including interlocks. Power wiring (to panelboards, disconnect
switches, starters and motors) will be provided under Section 26 10 00, ELECTRICAL.
Starters that are not integral to equipment will be furnished under this Section 23 06 00
and installed and wired under Section 26 10 00, ELECTRICAL.
B. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be NEMA Design B, constant speed,

self-ventilated squirrel cage induction. Motors shall have 1.15 service factor unless
totally enclosed. Motors shall have Class B insulation.
1. Motors under 1/2 HP, shall be designed for 120 V, 60 Hz, single phase, unless
otherwise specified.
2. Motors 1/2 HP and over shall be as required in schedules.
C. Motors for use with variable frequency drives (VFD's) shall be "inverter-duty" or "drive
duty" motors, compatible with the drive to which it is connected. Use of the motor with a
VFD shall not adversely affect the operation, useful life, or warranty of the motor.
Motors listed in the schedules to be powered by VFD shall conform to the following:
1. Motors shall have Class F or H insulation.
2. Motor windings shall be spike resistant to withstand 1,600 peak volts.
3. Motors used with VFD shall have a minimum three (3) year warranty.
4. If the motor is located more than 50 feet away from the VFD it serves, the
contractor shall provide an output filter on the VFD.
D. All motors shall be premium efficiency type. They shall conform to NEMA Standard
MG-1-12.53a and shall have their efficiencies determined in accordance with IEEE
Standard 112 Method B. The NEMA nominal efficiency shall be listed on the motor
nameplate. Minimum nominal efficiencies shall be according to the tables below:
TABLE I
PERFORMANCE DATA for ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS
DRIP-PROOF TYPE
Minimum Efficiency at Full Load
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
Eff. Eff. Eff.
1 82.5 85.5 80.0

August 12, 2013
TABLE I
DRIP-PROOF TYPE
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
Eff. Eff. Eff.
1.5 86.5 86.5 85.5
2 87.5 86.5 86.5
3 89.5 89.5 86.5
5 89.5 89.5 89.5
7.5 91.7 91.0 89.5
10 91.7 91.7 90.2
15 92.4 93.0 91.0
20 92.4 93.0 92.4
25 93.0 93.6 93.0
30 93.6 94.1 93.0
40 94.1 94.1 93.6
50 94.1 94.5 93.6
TABLE II
TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN COOLED TYPE
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
Eff. Eff. Eff.
1 82.5 85.5 78.5
1.5 87.5 86.5 85.5
2 88.5 86.5 86.5
3 89.5 89.5 88.5
5 89.5 89.5 89.5
7.5 91.7 91.7 91.0
10 91.7 91.7 91.7
15 92.4 92.4 91.7
20 92.4 93.0 92.4

August 12, 2013
TABLE II
TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN COOLED TYPE
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
25 93.0 93.6 93.0
30 93.6 93.6 93.0
40 94.1 94.1 93.6
50 94.1 94.5 94.1
200 95.8 96.2 95.8
E. Starters that require interlocks or remote control shall be magnetic with HAND-OFF-
AUTOMATIC switch (fast-slow-off-auto for two speed motors) in cover. Provide
magnetic starters as necessary, with auxiliary contacts, buttons and switches in required
configurations. Refer to specification section AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS and to Control Drawings for interlock requirements. Starters shall be by
single manufacturer: Cutler-Hammer, Clark, Arrow Hart or Square D.
1. Each 3-phase, 60 Hz motor shall be provided with combination starters with

thermal magnetic circuit breakers with either ON-OFF push button or
hand-off-automatic switch.
2. Other motors shall be provided with a manual starter with ON-OFF switch.
3. Control relay for each starter shall be for operation on 120 V, single phase, and
transformer of sufficient capacity within starter case shall be furnished for this
purpose.
4. Provide inverse time limit overload and under voltage protection in each leg and
with pilot lights. Provide red and green On-Off pilot lights.
5. Provide nameplates with engraved white lettering to designate area and

equipment served.
6. Starters for refrigeration machines shall be furnished by unit manufacturer.
7. Provide starters for two-speed motors with deceleration relay.
8. Furnish for all single speed motors, 10 HP and above, 95% power factor
correction capacitors. Capacitors shall be in NEMA enclosure of the same rating
as the motor's starter.
9. Furnish reduce voltage starters for all 3 phase motors, 20hp and above.

August 12, 2013
10. Starters shall be furnished as combination magnetic and circuit breaker type, non-
reversing (unless otherwise noted). Each combination starter shall be rated
65,000 symmetrical amperes at 480V.
2.14 DRIVES
A. Drives for belted motors shall be flame retardant and by Allis-Chalmers, Browning or
Woods V-belt drives with adjustable motor sheave. Drives shall be as short as practical
and shall have number of belts necessary to transmit required horsepower without undue
slip or strain.
B. Sheaves shall be balanced statically and dynamically.
2.15 PUMPS, CENTRIFUGAL
A. General Requirements
1. Provide, where shown on drawings, centrifugal pumps, of capacities types and

configurations shown on schedules. Acceptable manufacturers shall be:
*Armstrong
*Bell and Gossett
*Taco
2. Pumps that operate in an inappropriate portion of their performance curves,

including, but not limited to, operating in the rightmost third of the curve will be
rejected. Provide in submittals, the factory performance curve specific for the
pump submitted with the operating point clearly indicated.
3. Pumps shall be designed specifically for intended classes of service, with

non-overloading characteristics throughout the design curve (motors shall not
operate in their service factor). Impeller shall be statically and dynamically
balanced. Impeller size shall be no more than 90% of casing size. Pump shall be
factory tested at operating conditions, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one
coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Installation instructions shall be
included with pump at time of shipment.
4. Coordinate with manufacturer of water treatment to ensure that normal life of

pumps and components shall not be shortened by water treatment.
5. Provide cyclone type abrasive separators to provide clean water flush to seals for
all pumps on open systems (open cell cooling towers), and all pumps over 3 HP
on closed systems requiring flush. Separator materials and pressure ratings shall
be suitable for intended class of service and maximum working pressure of the
pump. Provide sheet metal guard to protect separator tubing from damage - do
not use plastic tubing for separator. Provide shut off cocks with three valve
bypass line to allow separator to be removed for cleaning while seals continue to
be flushed.

August 12, 2013
6. Provide, under the work of the mechanical section, flexible connections (if
shown on details) and vibration isolation components for all pumps. See the
vibration isolation section.
7. Provide steel channel base for each pump with drip rim and drain connection.
8. Refer to motor and starter paragraph of these specifications for requirements.
9. Provide an allowance for all necessary work in the field and shop to trim each
pump impeller, if needed, for water balancing purposes.
B. Pump Types and Materials of Construction
1. General:
a. For all types of pumps listed below, bearing frame and pump internals
shall be serviceable without disturbing motor or connected piping.
b. For all types of pumps listed below, provide mechanical seals with
carbon rings and ceramic faces, stainless or brass metal parts, stainless
springs and synthetic rubber bellows. Seals shall operate satisfactorily to
225.
c. Unless otherwise stated in the schedules, all pumps shall be single stage.
d. Provide tappings for pressure gauges at inlet and discharge of all pumps.
e. All couplings for variable speed pumps shall be capable of operating

under all conditions without fatigue.
2. In-Line Pumps
a. In Line pumps shall have bronze fitted construction, including cast iron
casings, bronze or copper shaft sleeves, alloy steel shafts and bronze
impellers. Bearings shall be either be sleeve type or regreasable ball
bearings. Provide casing wear rings, drain and vent connections and
flexible coupling or direct drive connection between pump and motor. If
the scheduled pump includes ball bearings and a direct drive motor to
impeller connection, the submitted pump shall not have sleeve bearings
or a flexible coupling between pump and motor.
2.16 PREFABRICATED BOILER BREECHING STACK, FLUE, AND MECHANICAL DRAFT

COMBUSTION EQUIPMENT
A. Provide round double wall air or fill insulated to limit skin temperature to 140 deg. F,
prefabricated double-wall duct breeching for water heaters furnished under plumbing
section and for boilers and other mechanical equipment that burn gas or oil, by Ampco,
Van Packer, Metal Fab, Schebler or Metalbestos. UL 1738 approved and suitable for
positive pressure ANSI Class III and IV equipment.

August 12, 2013
B. The inner diameter of the breeching and stack shall be verified by the manufacturers
computations. The computation shall be technically sound, shall follow ASHRAE
calculation methods and incorporate the specific flow characteristics of the inner pipe.
The contractor shall furnish the exact boiler, generator or water heater and their
respective operating characteristics to the factory representative. Operating
characteristics shall include exhaust flow rate, BTU input, outlet temperature, local
altitude, stack layout and available external pressure at the devices outlet, etc. necessary
to determine system operation at the maximum and minimum levels of burner turndown
range. The calculations shall be submitted to the engineer with the breaching and stack
submittal.
C. This contractor shall coordinate with the plumbing subcontractor, to ensure that if a water
heater using forced draft venting is submitted, a stack designed for positive pressure will
also be submitted. Do not submit Type B gas vents for water heaters.
D. Breeching shall be 304 stainless steel outer jacket where exposed to the weather,
galvanized where not exposed. Internal pipe shall be 304 stainless steel. Provide stack
with integral spacers or insulation. For condensing boilers and condensing water heaters,
use AL 294C stainless steel internal pipe or material recommended by the boiler
manufacturer.
E. Provide fire stop fittings at wall and ceiling penetrations.
F. Joints shall be vapor-tight with locking groove slip joints with locking tabs and bands.
G. Provide high temperature expansion fittings between flue and structural penetrations.
H. Provide aluminized water-tight insulated thimble, exit cone, rain collar and supporting
hardware, including guys and bands.
I. Provide vapor, gas and liquid tight connection between boiler or water heater and flue.
J. Vent connectors shall be fitted directly to the exhaust connection of the gas fired
appliances with a gas tight flanged connection. Combustion test holes shall be factory
built into the appliance adapter. The vent pipe shall be supplied with a slip ring/tab
connection to positively join the pipe inner liner, and draw band connections to join the
outer jacket airtight. All inner liner joints shall be field sealed with RTV high
temperature RTV sealant to prevent leakage of condensate from the inner liner surfaces.
Fittings shall be of the same materials and be constructed to facilitate the flow of flue
gases and allow drainage of any condensate inside the vent.
K. Breeching shall be pitched a minimum of 1/4 per foot back towards the appliance for
elimination of any condensate. Wherever breeching passes through combustible material,
a suitable wall thimble or fire stop fitting shall be employed. The breeching shall be
fitted with an inspection end cap on the end opposite the chimney.

August 12, 2013
L. The chimney system shall be at least the size of the largest breeching diameter, and the
required diameter as shown on the plans. The chimney shall be supported at the base
without any of the chimney weight being supported by the breeching connector or the
vented appliances. A drip tee connection shall be fitted at the base of the chimney for
elimination of any condensate within. The drip connection shall be piped with a trap to a
suitable disposal point. The chimney shall have roof braces of stainless steel as provided
by the manufacturer at least every 12 feet of linear pipe. The chimney shall be supplied
with an insulated roofjack and flashing collar. The chimney shall have a rain cap of the
same materials on top to prevent entering rain. The chimneys shall be guyed at the roof
as required. The chimney manufacturer shall provide all necessary components for a
complete operating system.
M. Engineered System - The venting system shall be an engineered system. The system
design shall be consistent with current national and local venting codes, and in
accordance with the installation instructions of the installed appliance. Combustion air
requirements shall also be considered. ASHRAE or other approved venting calculations
shall be supplied including the specific heating appliance and final flue/combustion
system routing.
N. Test ports, baffles, Test port, and accessories shall be supplied by the vent manufacturer.
O. Depictions on drawings are for bidding purposes only. Offset and accessories may be
required. Inner diameter size may change based on the submitted appliance, coordinate
with appliance and draft equipment manufacturer for system diameter size.
P. Follow all manufacturers installation instructions.
Q. The chimney or gas vent system shall be designed to prevent recirculation of exhaust gas
through idle boilers.
R. Outlet dampers designed to prevent recirculation shall be interlocked to appliance

management system to disable all appliances upon damper failure.
S. Confirm combustion air requirements of the appliances.
T. Follow all pertinent national, state, and/or local codes where applicable.
U. All barometric dampers and draft hoods equipment shall have safety interlocks devices
such as thermal spill switches or carbon monoxide detector.
V. Flanged connections shall not be approved for condensing applications.
W. Submittals: Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer or manufacturer representative

shall provide Gas Vent, Chimney or Exhaust systems calculation based on as built
drawings to be submitted for review and approval. Revised calculations MUST be
submitted for any adjustment from submitted drawings.

August 12, 2013
1. The computation shall follow ASHRAE chimney design methods and

incorporate manufacturer specific resistance characteristics of the chimney, gas
vent or exhaust system.
2. The contractor shall furnish the appliance, muffler, economizer, draft equipment
and operating characteristics to the chimney, gas vent or exhaust system
manufacturer representative.
Operating Characteristics shall include the following
a. CFM
b. Velocity
c. CO2
d. BTU Max/Min inputs
e. Outlet Temperature
f. Additional pressure losses including muffler and economizer
g. Vent layout
h. Available draft
i. Other parameters that could affect system operation at maximum and
minimum levels of burner turndown range.
3. Gas Vent, Chimney, Exhaust, Mechanical Draft Equipment, Economizer and

combustion air calculations shall be based on submitted equipment.
4. Product Data: Submit data indicating the system layout details, including
dimensional details of components, dimensions and weights.
5. Product Data: Submit data on mechanical draft/combustion air equipment and

accessories including fan curves, voltage/phase, RPM, HP, amps, and
construction type and connection requirements.
6. Manufacturers Installation Instructions
7. Manufacturers Warranty
X. PRODUCTS
1. Acceptable Manufacturer:
Security Chimney International
2. Alternate manufacturers complying with plans and specifications must be

submitted and approved by the Consulting Engineer within 5 days prior to bid
date. A representative sample product included with a Substitution Request
Form shall be submitted.
3. Vents shall be listed for an internal static pressure of up to 35" w.c.
4. All connections to Breechings and Chimneys shall enter at 45°.

August 12, 2013
5. The entire stack system from each appliance to the termination; including
adapters, supports, drains, test ports, pressure probe port, and baffles shall be
supplied by the vent manufacturer.
Y. Accessories
1. Provide following components for a complete system per appliance, draft

equipment and stack manufacturer requirements for complete system: appliances
adapter, vertical and horizontal supports, appliances test ports, baffles,
barometric dampers, in-line drains, condensate drain section, increasers,
expansion joints, guy section, 45° manifold tee, elbows, roof thimble, storm
collar, mitered termination (horizontal), rain cap (vertical), exit cone, wall
thimble and guy straps.
2. Provide pertinent operating and service instructions in illustrated and bound form
which shall be furnished by the manufacturer, minimum three (3) copies, within
30 days of Substantial Completion with close-out documents
3. At startup (plant assembly), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish skilled

personnel to supervise, check out performance, make any required adjustments,
place the venting system in service, and instruct the Owners personnel for a full
period of one (1) hour in the care and operation of the venting systems. Start-up
of heating equipment shall be performed by a service representative of the
appliance manufacturer. Refer to other sections of these specifications for those
requirements.
4. The venting system manufacturer shall provide complete venting systems

diagrams to the Mechanical Systems installer and shall provide drawings
indicating all required external arrangements and connections.
Z. Examination of site conditions
1. Contractor shall examine areas and conditions at the site for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been fully
corrected.
AA. Installation of listed vents and chimneys
1. Installations not conforming to vent manufacturer installation instructions shall

be corrected at contractors expense.
2. Located to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum

termination heights according to product listing.

August 12, 2013
3. Seal between sections of positive pressure vents according to manufacturers

written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
4. Support gas vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight

of vents and all accessories without exceeding appliance loading.
5. Chimney and engine exhaust support system from building structure using rigid
structural shapes for attachment of fixed point supports (vertical and horizontal).
Anchor supports to structure by welding to inserts, bolting, steel expansion
anchors or concrete inserts. Size of structural shapes shall be in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.
6. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance with condensate drain

connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain.
7. Connect base section of foundation using anchor lugs of size and number
recommended by manufacturer.
BB. Cleaning
1. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,

inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris and repair
damaged finishes.
2. Clean breeching internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and
debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film.
3. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys and stacks that are to
be completed or connected to equipment.
CC. Warranty
1. Transfer the full Warranty to Owner to include all parts and labor for a full one
(1) year period after the venting systems is put into sustained operation.
2. Transfer any and all other special warranties, as applicable, over to the Owner.
2.17 CHEMICAL TREATMENT - WATER SYSTEMS
A. General
1. Provide treatment systems and service for primary water systems. Water
treatment shall include feeding devices necessary to feed chemical solution into
piping system and bring chemical properties of water to within manufacturer's
recommended operating limits, in order to minimize corrosion and reduce
build-up of slime or other contaminants. Provide all equipment, chemicals and
service necessary for a complete water treatment program.

August 12, 2013
2. Provide a water analysis prepared by the chemical treatment supplier to

determine the type and level of chemicals required for prevention of scale and
corrosion based on the local water chemistry. Perform initial treatment after
completion of system cleaning and testing.
3. Do not operate systems without water treatment.
a. Water treatment chemicals shall be by Barclay, Nalco, Intercool or GE.

b. Chemical drums shall be by the manufacturers of the chemicals or Liquid
Metronics.
c. Pump shall be by Liquid Metronics, Nalco or Neptune.
d. Coupon Rack shall be by J.L Wingert, Neptune or Nalco
e. Shot Feeder shall be by J.L Wingert, Neptune or Nalco
f. Nalco and Liquid Metronics model numbers are used to establish
standards of quality.
5. Provide piping necessary for complete systems.
6. Mechanical contractor shall provide the steel support shelf for the chemical feed
pumps and other equipment.
7. Effluent from HVAC system discharged to sewer shall meet requirements of

applicable local, state and national water quality standards.
8. Electrical Wiring and Controls Interlocking
a. Provide all necessary interlocking between water valve, solenoid bleed

valve and conductivity controller.
b. Provide power wiring for solenoid valves, pumps and controller.
9. Shot Feeder
a. Closed loop systems shall have water treatment to feed chemical solution
into each piping system.
b. Provide five gallon bypass feeder for systems equal to or less than 1,000
gpm of system flow.
c. Provide ten gallon bypass feeder for systems over 1,000 gpm of system
flow.
10. Chemical Storage Tanks
a. The containers shall be made of heavy wall construction of UV resistant

polyethylene.
11. Chemicals
a. Cleaning (Pre-operational, off-line System)

August 12, 2013
1) Flush and clean all systems with cleaner after completion of

installation.
b. Closed System (Online System)
1) Provide Nitride Corrosion Inhibitor to maintain control limits at

800-1000 parts per million of sodium nitrite.
2) If local water conditions warrant, provide an additional caustic or
acid solution
12. Filtration Equipment
a. Provide side stream filtration to remove particulates to prevent fouling of

system components. Equipment shall be by Flowmatic model 231-
FMJCH or equal.
b. Filters for closed loops will be sized for 3-5 % of total gpm flow.
c. Provide a pressure gauge piped across the filter to check on pressure
drop.
d. Micron Size
1) Rough 50 micron. Used first until the system can be operated for
an appropriate period of time without noticeable build up.
2) Fine 5 micron. Used second. Circulate water and replace as need
until the system can be operated for an appropriate period of
time without noticeable build up.
B. Ongoing Service
1. One year service from the date of substantial completion.

2. All tasks below should be performed at maximum intervals of every thirty days.
3. Delivery and maintenance of water treatment chemicals
4. Collection and analysis of samples of circulating water
5. Adjustments to the rate of chemical feed to suit each system
6. Make recommendations as to the use of coupons and shall include the furnishing
and analysis of the coupons/system (steel and copper).
7. Inspection and maintenance chemical feeding devices
C. Service Binder
1. All information shall be stored on site in a 3 ring binder labeled Water

Treatment
2. Report of the initial city water chemistry that describes the chemicals required to
maintain the system at appropriate levels of performance.
3. Report indicating that systems have been thoroughly cleaned.
4. Report indicating that systems have been charged with corrosion inhibitor.
5. Results of monthly water tests for each system.
6. Monthly service reports for each visit.
7. Report with all of the systems targeted operating levels

August 12, 2013
8. Material Safety Data Sheets for each chemical

9. Operation and Maintenance Manual for each piece of equipment.
10. Product data on all of the chemical treatment equipment and chemicals.
2.18 PRESSURE GAUGES, THERMOMETERS AND TEST PLUGS
A. Provide bronze Bourdon tube pressure gauges where shown on Drawings and where
specified, by U.S. Gauge, Trerice, or Weksler, accurate to +1%.
1. Gauges shall have white faces with black-filled engraved lettering. Gauge bodies
shall be set in phenolic cases. Provide syphons and shut-off cocks.
2. Gauges shall be easily accessible and easily read. Gauges readable from floor at
less than five feet shall have 4-1/2" dials. Other gauges shall have 6" dials.
Gauges graduations shall meet limit requirements of normal operation. Gauge
shall indicate at mid-scale.
B. Provide separable well V-case thermometers by U.S. Gauge, Trerice, or Weksler where
shown on Drawings and where specified. Thermometers shall have 9" scale and white
face with black-filled engraved letters. Thermometers shall be angular or straight
stemmed, as conditions necessitate. Thermometer wells shall be bronze and shall be
installed so as to ensure minimum restriction of water flow in pipe.
1. Provide thermometer ahead of and beyond cooling coils, chillers and where
shown on Drawings. Thermometers shall have scale range of 0 -120 deg. F with
2 scale division.
2. Provide thermometer in condenser water system at each chiller, cooling tower

and where shown on the drawings. Scale range shall be 20 180 deg. F with 2
scale division.
3. Provide thermometer in hot water system ahead of and beyond each boiler, coil
and where shown on the drawings. Scale range shall be 30 300 deg. F with 2
scale division.
4. Provide additional thermometers where shown on Drawings.
C. Combination Temperature Pressure Test Plugs
1. Provide, where shown on details, combination pressure temperature test plugs by

Peterson Equipment Company "Petes Plug" or Sisco, Inc. "P/T Plugs".
2. Plug shall be 1/4" or 1/2" NPT, constructed of solid brass with a Nordel valve
core suitable for temperatures up to 350 deg. F. Plug shall be rated zero leakage
from vacuum to 1000 psig.
3. Provide extension fitting for each plug suitable for use with 2" maximum pipe
insulation.

August 12, 2013
4. Provide gauge test kit consisting of the following items:
a. (2) 3-1/2" dial face gauges 0-100 psi and 0-231 feet.
b. (2) Gauge adapters with 1/8" O.D. probe.
c. (2) 5" stem pocket testing thermometers ranges 25-125 F; 0-220 F.
d. (1) Carrying case.
e. (2) 4' length of flexible hose with adapters.
2.19 FILTER, MEDIUM EFFICIENCY, THROW AWAY TYPE
A. Do not operate systems without design filters. Provide a new set of filters before the
balancing is performed.
B. Filters shall be Farr or AAF, as scheduled on Drawings. Filters shall be listed by

Underwriters Laboratories, Class 2, and rated at a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) of 8 per ASHRAE 52-99.
C. Filter media shall be bonded to an enclosed beverage board frame. The media shall be of
non-woven cotton, which is laminated to a welded wire grid, and have an average
efficiency of 25-30% by ASHRAE test standard 52-76. Filter area shall be not less than
11 pleats per lineal foot for 4" thick or 15 pleats per lineal foot for 2" thick filter.
D. Filters shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as Class 2.
2.20 FILTERS HIGH EFFICIENCY, THROW AWAY TYPE
A. Filters shall be AAF or Farr Riga Flo of the sizes and quantities shown on the drawings.
B. Each filter shall consist of high loft micro fine glass fiber media, which has a non-woven
backing and is laminated to a welded wire grid. The entire pack shall be sealed into a
galvanized frame with metal contour stabilizers, and galvanized steel diagonal support
braces on air entering and air leaving side (cardboard is not permitted). Each filter shall
have a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 by ASHRAE test standard
52-99.
C. Filter shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as Class 2.
2.21 FILTER, AIR FILTER GAUGE
A. The Contractor shall furnish a dry air filter gauge by Dwyer Magnehelic across each filter
bank. Gauge shall have static pressure tips, vent valves, and tubing and shall have an
adjustable flag to indicate need to change filter. The scale shall be 1.0" greater than the
final pressure drop.
B. A decal containing filter service information (quantity, size, type, final resistance) shall
be placed at each gauge.

August 12, 2013
2.22 FILTER HOUSING, SIDE ACCESS
A. Filter housing shall be AAF or Farr 4P Glide Pack side service filter housing, as noted on
the drawings. Unit shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel with
gasketed access doors on each side and extruded aluminum tracks (for filter insertion).
B. Unit shall have an integral static pressure tap to measure pressure drop across the filters.
2.23 BUILT-UP AIR HANDLING UNIT
A. General
1. Provide fan array indoor air handling units as shown and scheduled on Drawings.
2. Unit Manufacturer shall be responsible for complete design of units, all

components, complete shop erection of units and all components, operation and
performance of units under unit manufacturers nameplate. The Mechanical
Division Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the delivery and
erection of all units in compliance with construction schedule; provision of all
necessary external piping, ductwork and miscellaneous connections required to
complete the installation of the units in cooperation with and as directed by the
manufacturer.
3. The unit manufacturer shall be responsible for provision and warranty of fans,
dampers and all other unit and plenum components as specified in this Section or
other Sections of this division and performance characteristics as shown in
schedules or on drawings.
4. Shop drawings shall be subject to approval of the Owner and the Engineer.
a. The air handling unit shop drawing shall be submitted in a binder with
the following features:
1) Cover page with the building, product, engineer, contractor, date

and revision number
2) Table of Contents
a) General comments
b) Clarifications
c) Deviations from the drawings or specifications
d) Performance Data
(1) Static pressure analysis
(2) Fan curves
(3) Coils at summer and winter design conditions
(4) Filters
e) Sound analysis

August 12, 2013
f) Equipment cut sheets

(1) Filters
(2) Coil
(3) Fan
(4) Spring isolators
(5) Differential pressure gauge
(6) Cooling Coil
(7) Dampers
g) Unit construction section

(1) Internal components
(2) Warranty information
(3) Rigging instructions
h) Electrical information and cut sheets
5. The unit may require field erection to get into the project area and into the new
mechanical rooms. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate the required
shipping splits with the required dimensions for shipping and in the field.
6. Provide services of experienced field engineer employed by manufacturer to

oversee erection, testing and troubleshooting of units. Erection supervision shall
be as required for the manufacturer to provide installation training and approval
and certification of all unit installations.
7. Certify conformance with performance requirements specified and shown on

Drawings.
8. Provide necessary appurtenances to perform as specified, whether or not

expressly required by Contract Documents mentioned herein in conformance
with good trade practice, as determined by Engineer.
9. Seal casing penetrations made in field for piping, conduit, tubing and equipment
installed under Sections 15600 and 16100. Advise manufacturer in advance of
required field penetrations of casing. Make and seal penetrations under
supervision of manufacturers field engineer.
10. Acceptable manufacturers will be Johnson Controls, McQuay, York, Trane and
Carrier. Providing they meet the requirements of this Section and the
performance requirements listed and scheduled.
11. All units shall be ETL listed. All manufactured products shall be ETL listed and
shall be labeled with an ETL certification label at the plant. Field approvals are
not acceptable.
12. Appurtenances
a. Safety grates capable of supporting a 300 lb. person shall be provided in

the fan section.

August 12, 2013
b. Base rails suitable for rigging and lifting will be provided as needed.
c. Lifting lugs shall be provided for proper lifting.
13. Finishes
a. External unit surfaces will be factory cleaned prior to finishing or

shipping.
b. Unpainted air-handling units constructed of galvanized steel will pass the

ASTM B-117 test for 220-hour salt spray solution (5%) without any sign
of red rust.
B. Testing
1. Test to ensure structural integrity, design suitability under simulated operating

conditions, system operation and minimum vibration levels as specified. Certify
that unit complies with design intent and Contract Documents.
2. The following tests shall be performed at the factory on all units:
a. Pressure test water coils if coil manufacturer has not already performed
pressure test and piping. The test shall be per the latest edition of
ARI 410. 150 psig for heating coil and 300 psig for cooling coils.
b. Unit operation and vibration analysis. All fans have a dynamic balance
performed after assembly at the fan manufacturers facility. An IRD or
PMC analyzer shall be used to measure velocity. The final reading shall
not exceed 0.1 inch per second vertically or horizontally at the bearing
caps nor exceed 0.09 inch per second in the axial direction. The exact
level of vibration shall be recorded on the operation and maintenance
manual as proof of the dynamic balance at the factory.
c. Energize electrical devices to ensure operational integrity prior to

shipment. Replace non-functioning items.
C. Unit Construction
1. Unit Casing
a. Casing leakage will not exceed 1% of design CFM at 8 static pressure

differential across casing.
b. Panel deflection will not exceed L/240 at 8 static pressure differential

across casing.
c. Unit casing will consist of a structural frame and insulated roof, wall, and
floor panels.

August 12, 2013
d. Removal of wall panels will not affect structural integrity of units.
e. Unit will have double wall, 2 insulated panels for walls, roof, and floor.
Exterior skin will be galvanized sheet steel. Individual segments will
have galvanized sheet steel.
f. Panels with optional perforated liner will have 1 of 3 lb./ft.3 fiberglass

board insulation, faced to prevent fiber erosion, and 1 of foam
insulation. Minimum perforated panel thermal resistance will be R10 hr-
ft2-°F/BTU.
g. Exterior skin will be galvanized sheet steel.
h. Interior liner will be perforated galvanized.
i. Minimum perforated panel thermal resistance will be R10 hr-ft2-°F/BTU.
j. Floor panels will be double wall construction, designed to provide at

most L/240 deflection when subjected to a 300 lb. load at mid-span.
k. Unit casing will be insulated with spray injected foam to achieve a

minimum thermal resistance of R12 hr-ft2-°F/BTU.
l. Insulation application meets the requirements of NFPA 90A.
m. Drain pans will be insulated with spray injected foam.
2. Double wall access doors will be provided on the fan, filter, mixing box and
before and after the coil sections.
a. Stainless steel hinges permit a 180 door swing.
b. Access door will be of the same material type as exterior/interior casing.
c. Access door latches will use a roller cam latching mechanism.
3. Primary drain pans comply with the guidelines of ASHRAE 62.
a. Drain pans will be double sloped at least 1/8 per foot, and have no
horizontal surfaces.
b. Drain connection material will be the same as drain pan.
c. Drain pans drain to one point.
d. Drain connections will be welded to drain pans

August 12, 2013
e. Drain pans will have at least 1 clearance between pan and coil supports.
1) Joints between aluminum safing and equipment and casing shall

be fastened with aluminum screws or closed end rivets.
4. Electrical
a. Fan motors will be built in accordance with the latest NEMA and IEEE
standards.
b. Fan motors will be furnished in sizes, electrical power and starting

characteristics as shown in performance specifications.
c. Motors shall be Premium Efficiency.
d. Motors shall be rated for VFD duty.
D. Fan Variable Frequency Drives
1. Provide VFD on Fan Array
2. Variable frequency drives will be furnished (shipped loose) or provided (factory

mounted and wired to motor) with units, as shown in submittal documents.
3. VFDs will be UL or ETL listed and comply with applicable provisions of the
National Electric Code.
4. VFDs will be housed in a dedicated, weather resistant compartment.
a. Shipped loose VFDs and VFDs provided on units without single point
power will be housed in a NEMA 3R enclosure.
b. Weatherproof compartments will be provided on units with single point
power.
5. VFDs furnished or provided with units will be programmed and started by a

Johnson Controls trained and employed technician.
6. VFD will include harmonic distortion feedback protection:
a. Swinging DC Line Choke (equivalent to 5% input line reactor)

b. Integral RFI/EMI filtering to meet EMC EN61800-3 for First
Environment
7. User interface will include:
a. 30 Character multi-lingual alphanumeric display
b. Parameter set-up and operating data
c. Display data includes:

August 12, 2013
1) output frequency (Hz)

2) speed (RPM)
3) motor current
4) calculated % motor torque
5) calculated motor power (kW)
6) DC bus voltage
7) output voltage
8) heat sink temperature
9) elapsed time meter (re-settable)
10) kWh (re-settable)
11) input / output terminal monitor
12) PID actual value (feedback) & error
13) fault text
14) warning text
15) scalable process variable display
d. VFD protection circuits will include:
1) over current
2) ground fault
3) over voltage
4) under voltage
5) over temperature
6) input power loss of phase
7) loss of reference/feedback
8) adjustable current limit regulator
8. VFD will be UL 508C approved for electronic motor overload (12t).
9. VFD will include high input transient protection and surge suppression:
a. 4 MOVs ahead of diode bridge

b. 120 Joule rated 1600V diode module
c. Compliant with UL 1449 / ANSI 61.4
10. VFD communication features include:
a. Two programmable analog inputs

b. Six programmable digital inputs
c. Two programmable analog outputs
d. Three programmable digital relay outputs
e. Modbus RTU Communications protocol
f. Adjustable filters on analog inputs and outputs
g. Input speed signals, including 4-20 mA and 0-10 VDC
h. Acceleration/Deceleration contacts (floating point control)
i. Auto restart (customer selectable and adjustable)
j. Start/Stop options will include 2 wire (dry contact closure), 3 wire
(momentary contacts), application of input power, and application of
reference signal (PID sleep/wake-up)

August 12, 2013
k. Integrated control interface for Siemens FLN, Johnson N2, Modbus

RTU, and BACnet MS/TP
1) Optional LONworks over RS-485.
11. VFD will have the following functions:
a. Premagnetization on start
b. DC braking/hold at stop
c. Ramp or coast to stop
d. Seven preset speeds
e. Three critical frequency lockout bands
f. Start function will include ramp, flying start, automatic torque boost, and
automatic torque boost with flying start
E. Water Coils
1. Coils have 5/8 O.D., 0.035 thick copper tubes with continuous aluminum plate
fins. U Bends shall have a minimum of 0.035 wall thickness, rated for 400 psi
working pressure.
a. Casings shall be stainless steel.
b. Headers shall be copper barrels with vents, drains and serpentine

continuous tube design.
2. Coils shall be housed in factory-fabricated frame independent of unit casing.

Coil frames shall be stainless steel.
a. Coil frames shall support coil sections independently allowing coil to be

removed through unit casing, normal to direction of air flow, without
disturbing other coil sections.
b. Coil casing shall have removable panel on each side.
c. After coils are piped through casing, seal pipe penetrations and cap with
grommets or escutcheon plates on both the inside and outside of the
casing.
F. Air Filters and Frames
1. Refer to the filter section of the specification
2. Filter segments will be provided required on the drawings.
3. Filter tracks/frames will be an integral part of the unit.
4. Filter types, nominal sizes, efficiencies, and performance characteristics will be

as shown on the drawings.

August 12, 2013
5. Filter access will be provided via access doors on filter segments or adjacent
segments as required by filter loading scheme. See product drawings for details.
G. Fans
1. Fans will provide CFM and static pressure, as shown in performance

specifications.
2. Fans will be Class I, II, or III, as required to meet selected RPM and horsepower
shown in performance specifications.
3. Airfoil fans will bear the AMCA Seal. Airfoil fan performance will be based on
tests in accordance with AMCA standard 210 and will comply with the
requirements of AMCA certified ratings programs for air and sound. Airfoil
wheels will comply with AMCA standards 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82.
4. Fans shafts will be polished steel and sized such that the first critical speed will
be at least 125% of the maximum operating speed for the fan pressure class.
Shaft will be coated with an anti-corrosion coating.
5. Fan and motor assembly will be internally mounted on a common base. Fan and
motor base will be spring isolated on a full width isolator support channel.
a. Fan motor will be on an adjustable base.
b. Fan discharge will be connected to cabinet via a flexible connection.
c. Access doors will be provided as shown on product drawing.
6. Multiple Fans will be Model MPQS centrifugal plenum type, as manufactured

by Twin City Fan & Blower. Fans will have a sharply rising pressure
characteristic extending through the operating range and continuing to rise
beyond the peak efficiency to ensure quiet and stable operation. Fans will have a
non-overloading design with self-limiting horsepower characteristics and will
reach a peak in the normal selection area.
a. Performance Fans will be tested in accordance with AMCA 210 and

AMCA 300 test standards for air moving devices and will be guaranteed
by the manufacturer to deliver rated published performance levels.
b. Construction Fans will be designed without a scroll type housing and
will incorporate a non-overloading type backward inclined airfoil blade
wheel, heavy-gauge reinforced steel inlet plate and structural steel frame.
c. Frame and Inlet Panel Inlet panels will be of heavy-gauge reinforced
steel construction. The inlet panel incorporates a removable spun inlet
cone designed for smooth airflow into the accompanying inlet retaining
ring of the fan wheel. A square, formed lip suitable for attachment of a
boot connector will surround the unit.
d. Wheel Wheels will have a spun non-tapered style blade retaining ring
on the inlet side to allow higher efficiencies over the performance range
of the fan. Wheels will have airfoil-shaped extruded aluminum blades.
All hollow blade wheels will be continuously welded around all edges.
Wheels will have twelve blades for better sound quality. All wheels will
be statically and dynamically balanced per ANSI/AMCA 204.

August 12, 2013
e. Finish and Coating The entire fan assembly will be thoroughly

degreased and deburred before application of a rust-preventative coating.
Aluminum components will be unpainted.
f. Motors Provide TEFC Premium Eff. with Aegis Shaft Grounding
factory installed. Motor frames will be cast iron rolled steel frames are
not acceptable
g. Fan Balancing All fans prior to shipment will be individually
balanced. Maximum vibration will be within the limits of ANSI/AMCA
204 Fan Application Category BV-4. Balance readings will be taken by
electronic type equipment in the axial, vertical, and horizontal directions
on each of the bearings.
h. Vibration Isolation Fans will not require spring isolators in order to
meet the ANSI/AMCA 204 Fan Application Category BV-4 rating.
i. Blank off Panels Each Multiple Fan section to be provided with one
fan blankoff panel to enable manual isolation of fan for servicing.
j. Fan Options The following options will be available for multiple fans:
1) Piezometer Ring: Airflow station will be factory installed in each

fan inlet. Tubing will be manifolded so that the measurement is
representative of all fans in the array. The device will have a
measurement accuracy of ± 5%.
2) Backdraft Damper: Backdraft dampers will be available for
automatic isolation of individual fans.
H. Bearing and Drives
1. Fan bearings will have average life (L50) of at least 200,000 hours. Bearing
fatigue life ratings will comply with ANSI/AFBMA 9.
2. Re-greaseable fan bearings will be factory lubricated and equipped with standard
hydraulic grease fittings.
3. Fan drives will be selected for a 1.5 service factor and will be furnished with
anti-static belts.
a. Drives will be adjustable pitch.
b. Sheaves will be machined from close grain cast iron and statically
balanced.
c. Drive belts will be V type, precision molded, raw edge construction, anti-
static, oil and heat resistant.
I. Provide filter gauges for each filter as shown:
1. Dwyer Magnehelic Type 2003 AF dry air filter gauge, with an appropriate scale
across each filter with appropriate static pressure tips, vent valves and tubing
with flag suitably marked to indicate need to change filter.

August 12, 2013
J. Dampers
1. Dampers will be factory installed.
a. Multizone damper assemblies may be shipped loose when shipping

restrictions require.
2. Dampers will have airfoil blades with extruded vinyl edge seals and flexible
metal compressible jamb seals.
3. Dampers will have a maximum leakage rate of 4 CFM/square foot at 1" w.g. and
comply with ASHRAE 90.1.
4. Maximum damper torque requirement will be 7 in. lbs./ft2.
5. Damper blades will be parallel acting unless submitted otherwise.
6. Damper blades will be galvanized steel or aluminum.
K. Appurtenances
1. Safety grates capable of supporting a 300 lb. center load will be provided over
bottom openings, as shown in performance specifications.
2. Formed steel base rails suitable for rigging and lifting will be provided, as shown
on product drawings.
a. Lifting lugs will be provided where required for proper lifting.
L. Finishes
1. External unit surfaces will be factory cleaned prior to finishing or shipping.

2. Unpainted air-handling units constructed of galvanized steel will pass the ASTM
B-117 test for 220-hour salt spray solution (5%) without any sign of red rust.
3. Unit will be painted, as shown in performance specifications.
a. Painted units will be prime-coated prior to painting.

b. Paint will be acrylic polyurethane.
c. Painted unit will exceed 500-hour salt spray test, with (5%) solution,
without any sign of red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B-
117.
M. Tests And Inspections
1. Fan skid will be run-balanced at specified speed to insure smooth operation.
a. Constant volume fan assemblies will be balanced at design RPM.

b. Variable volume fan assemblies will be balanced from 10% to 100% of
design RPM.

August 12, 2013
c. Filter-in measurements will be taken in horizontal and vertical axes on

drive and opposite-drive sides of fan shafts.
d. Constant speed fan vibration limits: filter-in measurements will not
exceed 4 mils.
e. Variable speed fan vibration limits: filter -in measurements will not
exceed 7 mils.
2. Unit wiring with voltage greater than 30VAC will be hipot tested prior to
shipping.
2.24 TERMINAL UNITS, VARIABLE VOLUME
A. Provide single duct variable volume air control assemblies of sizes and capacities shown
on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers shall be: Titus, Envirotec, Trane, Metalaire, or
Krueger. Units shall be 24 gauge galvanized steel, lined with 1-1/2 pound insulation as
required by UL-181 and NFPA-90A.
1. Responsibility for the provision of damper actuator, DDC VAV box controller
including velocity pressure transducer and control transformer shall be by
Automated Logic as campus standard and under the Automatic Temperature
Controls paragraph of this specification. Terminal box manufacturer shall
include with his bid, costs of mounting the Automated Logic controller on his
box at his factory and piping the controller's transducer to his flow sensor (in
accordance with control manufacturers instructions).
B. Provide 3' long sound attenuators where scheduled and shown on Drawings. If sound
attenuator is not scheduled, provide 10 linear feet of lined duct at discharge of the VAV.
C. Boxes shall have multipoint averaging type airflow sensors. Boxes with single point
sensors are unacceptable.
D. Assemblies shall be pressure independent between supply unit's external static pressure
and minimum static pressure schedule on Drawings. Valves shall be normally open or
normally closed as shown on Schedules. Differential static of complete assembly shall
not exceed 0.45" wg for units with sound attenuators or 0.20" wg for units without.
Damper leak rate shall not exceed 2% of full volume at 3" static pressure rated by ADC.
Units shall not deviate from set minimum or maximum flow settings by more than 10%
regardless of inlet angle. Inlet velocities shall not exceed 2250 fpm.
E. Sound ratings shall not exceed noise criteria (NC) levels scheduled on the Drawings. All
NC data must be in accordance with ADC 1062 R4. Discharge NC data shall include
10db room attenuation only. Radiated NC data is to assume a ceiling with sound
transmission class 35-39.
F. Terminal units shall be capable of the heating and cooling operation sequences and
quantities shown on the schedule, plan and control drawings. Units' control apparatus
shall be compatible with the control system.

August 12, 2013
G. The mechanical division contractor shall have complete responsibility for ensuring that
the submitted terminal box and VAV DDC controller are compatible with each other, and
that they can perform all sequences of operation shown on the control drawings.
Contractor shall submit the following items with his shop drawing submittal:
1. The name of the terminal box manufacturer.
2. The name of the temperature controls manufacturer.
3. A statement that the mechanical division contractor has contacted both vendors
and verified that the terminal box and DDC controller are compatible with each
other.
2.25 CABINET HEATERS - ELECTRIC
A. Provide electric cabinet heaters where shown on Drawings and on schedules. Cabinet
heaters shall be factory assembled for field installation. Cabinets shall be 16 gauge steel
with corrosion-resistant finish. Color selection shall be by Architect.
B. Heating coils shall be single terminal end long life electric fin tube with brazed helical
coiled fins.
C. Provide cabinet heaters with automatic reset thermal overload protector.
D. Provide integral thermostats.
E. Filters shall be disposable.
F. Cabinet heaters shall be by Raywall, Q Mark, Brasch or Trane.
2.26 FIN TUBE RADIATION
A. Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths and in locations as indicated and of
capabilities, style and having accessories as scheduled. Heating panel radiation shall be
one-piece all welded steel construction, consisting of flattened water tubes welded to
headers at each end. FTR to have steel corrugated fins welded to the rear side of the
water tubes to increase the convective output of the unit. There shall be no less than 32
fins per foot. Fins shall start within 1 of the headers and shall be spot-welded three
times per tube.
B. The radiators headers shall include all necessary inlet, outlet and vent connections as
required. Standard connection sizes are ½ NPT tapered thread for supply and return
piping and 1/8 for the vent connection. Internal baffling is provided where required for
proper water flow. Optional ¾ connections shall be available at an additional cost.

August 12, 2013
C. The radiant heating panels shall be available in lengths from 2-0 to 29-6 in two inch
even increments without the need for splicing. The panel radiation shall be capable of
being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking strapping.
Appropriate wall mounting brackets or optional floor post mounting shall be provided
with the radiation. Panel radiation expansion shall not exceed 1/64 per foot of radiation
at 215°F. The installer shall provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator.
D. Provide hot water fin-tube heating elements and enclosures, where, and of capacities
shown on Drawings, by Runtal, Slant Fin, Vulcan, Sterling, Trane or Sigma.
E. Heating elements shall consist of 0.012" thick aluminum plate fins permanently bonded
to seamless copper tube and guaranteed for working pressure at 300 deg. F of 128 psi for
1" tube. Fins shall be bonded to copper tube by mechanical expansion.
F. Enclosures shall be galvanized steel with 18 gauge front panel, baked enamel finish.
Color selected by Architect from factory-provided color chart.
G. Provide end trims with roll-flanged edges between ends of enclosures and walls on
wall-to- wall applications, attached without visible fasteners and flush with enclosures.
H. Enclosure brackets and element hangers shall be no farther than 4 ft. apart. Brackets
shall be die-formed from 16 gauge stock, 1-1/2" wide.
1. Secure enclosures to brackets with set-screws operated from beneath enclosures.
2. Insert brackets in prepunched slots in mounting channel to ensure correct

alignment and secure to wall at bottom.
3. Support heating element with sliding saddles and provide positive positioning of
element in enclosure. Fins shall not impinge on brackets or enclosure joints
during expansion or contraction.
4. Element supports shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. Saddle shall slide freely on
saddle support arm bolted to support bracket.
a. Support arm shall allow 1-1/2" height adjustment.
b. Element support saddle shall allow 1-5/8" lateral movement.
5. Provide tamper-proof modulating output control damper.
I. Provide hinged access doors with tamper-proof operators.
J. Provide expansion compensators every 20 ft. on straight runs.
K. Provide 5-year Limited Warranty.
L. Flex connectors shall be used where appropriate to provide expansion compensation for
the radiators.

August 12, 2013
2.27 COIL - HOT WATER HEATING
A. Provide hot water coils suitable for duct installation with capacities, pressure drops and
leaving air temperatures as scheduled on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers shall be
Aerofin, Carrier, McQuay, York, Trane or Precision.
B. Coil shall be 1/2" or 5/8" copper tube expanded mechanically into continuous aluminum
fin collars, with copper or bronze headers and galvanized steel casings.
C. Proof test at 300 psi and leak test at 250 psi air pressure under water. Certify suitability
for 200 psi working pressure.
D. Coil shall meet requirements of ARI 410-74.
2.28 HEAT EXCHANGER - PLATE-AND-FRAME
A. Provide plate-and-frame heat exchanger for the purpose of fluid heating of capacity and
pressure rating scheduled and shown on Drawings by Taco, Alfa-Laval, Tranter,
American Vicarb or Mueller.
B. Construction shall meet requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(Section VIII), American Water Works Association, and TEMA Standards.
C. Construction
1. The heat exchanger shall be brazed plate construction, consisting of stainless

steel plates, embossed with a specific heat transfer surface. Plate material shall
be:
a. 316L stainless steel.
2. The plates shall be vacuum brazed together with material compatible with
application, brazed material shall be:
a. Copper (standard).
3. The heat exchanger shall be U.L. Listed (Underwriters Laboratory) or ASME

Certified.
4. The heat exchanger shall be stud bolts for mounting.
D. Installation
1. Contractor must install fluid strainers on the inlet of each circuit to ensure proper
protection of the heat exchanger. Strainer shall be 16 mesh or better.

August 12, 2013
E. Warranty
1. The supplier shall provide its standard product warranty and shall warrant the
unit for 18 months from the date of manufacture, or one year from date of
installation, whichever is longer.
2.29 WATER CHILLERS - AIR COOLED
A. General
1. Provide, where shown on drawings, air cooled water chillers, of capacities as

shown on schedules. Acceptable manufacturers, providing they meet the
requirements of this specification, and the equipment schedules, shall be:
* Carrier
* McQuay
* Trane
* York
2. The chiller shown on the drawings has been coordinated with architectural and
structural elements, and with electrical service requirements. If a different unit is
submitted, ALL mechanical, electrical, architectural and structural modifications
which are required shall be performed under the work of the mechanical section,
by the mechanical contractor, under the original contract price.
3. Provide hot gas bypass.
4. Provide all noise reducing options available by manufacturer.
B. Quality Assurance
1. Chiller shall be rated in accordance with the latest edition of ARI Standard 590.
2. Unit construction shall comply with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code, National Electrical
Code and applicable ASME Codes.
3. Unit Cabinet shall be capable of withstanding Federal Test Method Standard No.
141 (method 6061) 500 hour salt spray test.
4. Cooler shall be tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for a
minimum refrigerant working side pressure of 225 PSIG and a minimum water
side pressure of 150 PSIG.
5. Air cooled condenser coils shall be leak tested at minimum 150 PSIG and
pressure tested at 425 PSIG.
6. Each chiller shall be factory tested at full and part load conditions-the current
draw shall be noted. Results of the test shall be provided to Owner. The chiller
shall be tested for refrigerant leaks and shipped with a full charge of refrigerant.

August 12, 2013
C. Equipment
1. Casing
a. Casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels, capable of

meeting the salt spray test referenced above. Casing surface shall be
phosphatized and painted.
2. Evaporator
a. Evaporator shall be shell and tube type with copper tubes expanded into
tube sheets. Provide drain connection and wells for temperature and
safety controls as required. Provide 3/4" insulation over entire surface of
the evaporator; maximum insulation k factor shall be 0.28. Provide
heater tapes, and thermostatic controls, to protect evaporator and water
piping (to field provided piping). Heat tapes shall protect evaporator to
-20 degrees. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate with the
electrical section to ensure that heat trace is supplied for all outdoor field
supplied water piping. If such trace, and all required controls, have not
been provided under the work of the electrical section, they shall be
provided by the mechanical contractor under the work of the mechanical
section. Field supplied trace will protect piping to -20 degrees.
3. Condenser
a. Air cooled condenser coils shall have aluminum fins bonded to copper
tubing with integral subcooling circuits.
b. Condenser fans shall have three phase motors with three phase overload
protection, permanently lubricated ball bearings, and shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. Fans shall discharge vertically.
c. Provide decorative grilles to provide protection for all interior

components. Grilles shall cover all open ends of units.
4. Refrigerant Circuits
a. Provide independent refrigerant circuits. Each circuit shall include a

liquid line sight glass, liquid line solenoid valve, filter drier, hot gas
muffler and thermal expansion valve.
5. Controls
a. The units shall be wired to meet UL and IEC type 2 protection to

withstand a fault level of 42,000 amps. Type 1 protection is
unacceptable.

August 12, 2013
b. Provide control transformer, starter and refrigeration controls in a

weathertight enclosure. The starter section shall contain the main unit
power connection, starting contactors, compressor overloads and oil
pressure cutouts. The refrigeration controls section shall contain reset
relays, compressor service switches, motor protector, high and low
pressure controls and the control microprocessor. The microprocessor
shall control the compressor anti-recycle function, compressor staging,
low water temperature cutout, low ambient temperature operation logic
and hot gas bypass logic.
c. Provide all controls necessary to start and operate the chiller at 0 deg. F.
Controls may be modulating damper or fan speed control and shall be
activated by sensing refrigerant head pressure. Control systems which
are activated exclusively by ambient temperature are unacceptable.
d. Provide all valves, piping and other controls necessary for hot gas bypass
operation. All components shall be factory installed.
e. Provide controls to pump-out evaporator when compressor is off.

Pump-out shall occur at intervals recommended by chiller manufacturer.
f. The mechanical contractor, shall provide under the work of the

mechanical section, a flow switch to lock out chiller in the absence of
evaporator flow as well as all control wiring for it to operate.
g. Chiller manufacturer shall provide any controls not explicitly listed

above, necessary for proper operation of his system. The mechanical
contractor shall provide all field control wiring necessary to interface
sensors to the chiller control system. Such wiring will be coordinated
with the chiller manufacturer and be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and wiring diagrams. The unit shall be
compatible with and tied to the ALC controls system.
6. Compressors
a. Provide hermetic or semi hermetic reciprocating compressors complete

with oil pump, crankcase heater, shutoff valves, gauges to monitor
suction and discharge pressure (on each refrigerant circuit) and all other
controls and components required by the manufacturer for proper
operation. Provide rubber in-shear or spring type vibration isolation, for
compressors.
b. Provide a minimum of four steps of capacity control, in response to

leaving chilled water temperature, for units 60 tons and under, 6 steps of
control for units over 60 tons.
D. General
1. General Requirements

August 12, 2013
a. The requirements of this Section shall conform to the general provisions

of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
Conditions of the Contract, and Contract Drawings.
2. Scope
a. Provide Microprocessor controlled, twin-screw compressor, water-

cooled, liquid chillers of the scheduled capacities as shown and indicated
on the Drawings, including but not limited to:
1) Chiller package with zero Ozone Depletion Potential Refrigerant

R-410A
2) Charge of refrigerant and oil
3) Electrical power and control connections
4) Chilled liquid connections
5) Condenser liquid connections
6) Manufacturer start-up
a. Products shall be Designed, Tested, Rated and Certified in accordance

with, and Installed in compliance with applicable sections of the
following Standards and Codes:
1) AHRI 550/590 Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor

Compression Cycle
2) AHRI 575 Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an
Equipment Space
3) ANSI/ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
4) ANSI/ASHRAE 34 Number Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants
5) ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-
Rise Residential Buildings
6) ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (N.E.C.)
7) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division
1
8) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
9) Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9001
10) Conform to Intertek Testing Services for construction of chillers
and provide ETL/cETL Listed Mark
b. Factory Run Test: Chiller shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and fully

charged with refrigerant and oil, and shall be factory operational run
tested with water flowing through the vessel.
c. Chiller manufacturer shall have a factory trained and supported service

organization.

August 12, 2013
d. Warranty: Manufacturer shall Warrant all equipment and material of its

manufacture against defects in workmanship and material for a period of
eighteen (18) months from date of shipment or twelve (12) months from
date of start-up, whichever occurs first.
4. Delivery And Handling
a. Unit shall be delivered to job site fully assembled with all

interconnecting refrigerant piping and internal wiring ready for field
installation and charged with refrigerant and oil by the Manufacturer.
b. Provide protective covering over vulnerable components for unit

protection during shipment. Fit nozzles and open ends with plastic
enclosures.
c. Unit shall be stored and handled per Manufacturers instructions.
E. Products
1. Manufacturers
a. The design shown on the Drawings is based on YORK model YLAA

chiller manufactured by Johnson Controls / YORK. Alternate equipment
will be acceptable if the manufacturers equipment meets the scheduled
performance and complies with these specifications. If equipment
manufactured by a manufacturer other than that scheduled is utilized,
then the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating
with the General Contractor and all affected Subcontractors to insure
proper provisions for installation of the furnished unit. This coordination
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1) Structural supports for units.

2) Piping size and connection/header locations.
3) Electrical power requirements and wire/conduit and overcurrent
protection sizes.
4) Chiller physical size on plant layout.
5) Site noise considerations.
b. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by

the General Contractor, Subcontractors, and Consultants to modify the
building provisions to accept the furnished alternate equipment.

August 12, 2013
2. General
a. Description: Furnish, Install, and Commission factory assembled,

charged, and operational run tested air-cooled scroll compressor chiller
as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Chiller shall be
designed, selected, and constructed using a refrigerant with Flammability
rating of 1, as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE STANDARD 34 Number
Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants. Chiller shall
include not less than two refrigerant circuits above 50 tons (200kW),
scroll compressors, direct-expansion type evaporator, air-cooled
condenser, refrigerant, lubrication system, interconnecting wiring, safety
and operating controls including capacity controller, control center,
motor starting components, and special features as specified herein or
required for safe, automatic operation.
b. Operating Characteristics: Provide high ambient temperature control to

ensure unit is capable of operation from 30°F to 115°F (-1°C to 46°C)
ambient temperature.
c. Cabinet: External structural members shall be constructed of heavy

gauge, galvanized steel coated with baked on powder paint which, when
subject to ASTM B117, 1000 hour, 5% salt spray test, yields minimum
ASTM 1654 rating of 6.
d. Pressure Transducers and Readout Capability
1) Discharge Pressure Transducers: Permits unit to sense and

display discharge pressure.
2) Suction Pressure Transducers: Permits unit to sense and display
suction pressure.
3) High Ambient Control: Allows units to operate when the
ambient temperature is above 115°F (46°C). Includes discharge
pressure transducers.
e. Shipping: Unit shall ship in one piece and shall require installer to
provide only a single evaporator inlet and outlet pipe connection. If
providing chiller model that ships in multiple pieces, bid shall include all
the material and field labor costs for factory authorized personnel to
install a trim kit to connect the pieces as well as all interconnecting
piping and wiring.
3. Compressors
a. Compressors: Shall be hermetic, scroll-type, including.
1) Compliant design for axial and radial sealing.

2) Refrigerant flow through the compressor with 100% suction
cooled motor.
3) Large suction side free volume and oil sump to provide liquid
handling capability.

August 12, 2013
4) Compressor crankcase heaters to provide extra liquid migration

protection.
5) Annular discharge check valve and reverse vent assembly to
provide low-pressure drop, silent shutdown and reverse rotation
protection.
6) Initial oil charge.
7) Oil level sight glass.
8) Vibration isolator mounts for compressors.
9) Brazed-type connections for fully hermetic refrigerant circuits.
10) Compressor Motor overloads capable of monitoring compressor
motor current. Provides extra protection against compressor
reverse rotation, phase-loss and phase-imbalance.
4. Refrigerant Circuit Components
a. Each refrigerant circuit shall include: a discharge service ball type

isolation valve, high side pressure relief, liquid line shutoff valve with
charging port, low side pressure relief device, filter-drier, solenoid valve,
sight glass with moisture indicator, thermostatic expansion valves.
[OPTIONAL]: electronic expansion valves
5. Heat Exchangers
a. Evaporator:
1) Evaporator shall be brazed-plate stainless steel construction

capable of refrigerant working pressure of 650 psig (3103 kPa)
and liquid side pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPa) (Option for 300
psig [2068 kPa] available).Constructed, tested, and stamped in
accordance with applicable sections of ASME (PED) (GB)
pressure vessel code for minimum 235 psig (16 barg) refrigerant
side design working pressure and 150 psig (10 barg) liquid side
design working pressure.
2) Brazed plate heat exchangers shall be UL listed.
3) Exterior surfaces shall be covered with 3.4 (19mm), flexible,
closed cell insulation, thermal conductivity of 0.26k ([BTU/ HR-
Ft2 -°F]/in.) maximum.
4) Water nozzles shall be provided with grooves for field provided
ANSI/AWWA C-606 mechanical couplings.
5) Evaporator shall include vent and drain fittings and
thermostatically controlled heaters to protect to -20°F (-29°C)
ambient in off-cycle.
6) A 20-mesh, serviceable wye-strainer and mechanical couplings
shall be provided for field installation on evaporator inlet prior to
startup.

August 12, 2013
6. Air-Cooled Condenser:
a. Coils: Condenser coils shall be constructed of a single material to avoid

galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals. Coils and headers are brazed
as one piece. Integral sub cooling is included. Coils shall be designed for
a design working pressure of 650 PSIG (45 bar). Condenser coil shall be
washable with potable water under 100 psi (7 bar) pressure.
b. Ultra Quiet Fans: Provide reduced sound fans. Unit should have the
following sound criteria as the maximum allowed:
Sound
Full
Value 63
Load 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz
dB(A) Hz
Stage
1 95 99 94 93 94 88 87 82 80
2 94 99 94 92 93 88 87 82 79
3 94 98 94 92 93 87 86 81 79
4 91 96 91 89 90 85 84 79 76
5 88 92 88 86 87 81 79 75 74
c. Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 6 pole, 3 phase, insulation

class F, current protected, Totally Enclosed Air-Over (TEAO), rigid
mounted, with double sealed, permanently lubricated, ball bearings.
7. Power And Electrical Requirements
a. Power/Control Panel:
1) NEMA 3R/12 rain/dust tight, powder painted steel cabinets with

hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer doors. Provide main
power connection(s), control power connections, compressor and
fan motor start contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring.
2) Power supply shall enter unit at a single location, be 3 phase of
scheduled voltage, and connect to individual terminal blocks per
compressor. Separate disconnecting means and/or external
branch circuit protection (by Contractor) required per applicable
local or national codes.
3) Compressor, control and fan motor power wiring shall be located

in an enclosed panel or routed through liquid tight conduit.
8. Controls
a. General: Automatic start, stop, operating, and protection sequences

across the range of scheduled conditions and transients.
b. Power/Control Enclosure: Rain and dust tight NEMA 3R powder painted

steel cabinet with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed door.

August 12, 2013
c. Microprocessor Control Center:
1) Automatic control of compressor start/stop, anti-coincidence and

anti-recycle timers, automatic pumpdown at system shutdown,
condenser fans, evaporator pump, evaporator heater, unit alarm
contacts, and chiller operation from 0°F to 125°F (-18°C to
52°C) ambient. Automatic reset to normal chiller operation after
power failure.
2) Remote water temperature reset via 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA input
signal or up to two steps of demand (load) limiting.
3) Software stored in non-volatile memory, with programmed
setpoints retained in lithium battery backed real-time-clock
(RTC) memory for minimum 5 years.
4) Forty character liquid crystal display, descriptions in English (or
Spanish, French, Italian, or German), numeric data in English (or
Metric) units. Sealed keypad with sections for Setpoints,
Display/Print, Entry, Unit Options & clock, and On/Off Switch.
5) Programmable Setpoints (within Manufacturer limits): display
language; chilled liquid temperature setpoint and range, remote
reset temperature range, daily schedule/holiday for start/stop,
manual override for servicing, low and high ambient cutouts,
low liquid temperature cutout, low suction pressure cutout, high
discharge pressure cutout, anti-recycle timer (compressor start
cycle time), and anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts).
6) Display Data: Return and leaving liquid temperatures, low
leaving liquid temperature cutout setting, low ambient
temperature cutout setting, outdoor air temperature, English or
metric data, suction pressure cutout setting, each system suction
pressure, discharge pressure (optional), liquid temperature reset
via a 4-20milliamp or 0-10 VDC input, anti-recycle timer status
for each compressor, anti-coincident system start timer
condition, compressor run status, no cooling load condition, day,
date and time, daily start/stop times, holiday status, automatic or
manual system lead/lag control, lead system definition,
compressor starts/operating hours (each), status of hot gas
valves, evaporator heater and fan operation, run permissive
status, number of compressors running, liquid solenoid valve
status, load & unload timer status, water pump status.
7) System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to
perform auto shut down; manual reset required after the third trip
in 90 minutes. System Safeties include: high discharge pressure,
low suction pressure, high pressure switch, and motor protector.
Compressor motor protector shall protect against damage due to
high input current or thermal overload of windings.
8) Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut
down if low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature,
under voltage, and flow switch operation.
9) Alarm Contacts: Low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid
temperature, low voltage, low battery, and (per compressor
circuit): high discharge pressure, and low suction pressure.

August 12, 2013
10) BAS Communications: YORKTalk 2, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus

and N2 communication capabilities are standard. (Option: LON
communication via ELink Microgateway). Unit shall be
compatible with and tied to ALC controls system.
d. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for
automatic chiller operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field
control wiring necessary to interface sensors to the chiller control
system.
9. Accessories And Options
a. Some accessories and options supersede standard product features. All

options are factory-mounted unless otherwise noted.
b. Microprocessor controlled, Factory installed Across-the-Line type

compressor motor starters as standard.
c. Outdoor Ambient Temperature Control
1) High Ambient Control: Permits unit operation above 115°F

ambient
d. Power Supply Connections:
1) Single Point Circuit Breaker: Single point Terminal Block with

Circuit Breaker and lockable external handle (in compliance with
Article 440-14 of N.E.C.) can be supplied to isolate power
voltage for servicing. Incoming power wiring must comply with
the National Electric Code and/or local codes.
e. Control Power Transformer: Converts unit power voltage to 120-1-60

(500 VA capacity). Factory-mounting includes primary and secondary
wiring between the transformer and the control panel.
f. Protective Chiller Panels (Factory Mounted)
1) Louvered Panels (condenser coils only): Painted steel as per

remainder of unit cabinet, over external condenser coil faces.
g. Flow Switch with Extension Kit
h. Evaporator options: Provide standard 3/4.
i. Hot Gas By-Pass: Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities

below the minimum step of unloading to as low as 5% capacity
(depending on both the unit & operating conditions) by introducing an
artificial load on the evaporator. Hot gas by-pass is installed on only one
refrigerant circuit.

August 12, 2013
j. Sound Reduction (Factory installed):
1) Ultra Quiet - Low speed, reduced noise fans.
k. Vibration Isolation (Field installed):
1) 1 Deflection Spring Isolators: Level adjustable, spring and cage

type isolators for mounting under the unit base rails.
l. BACnet Interface
F. Execution
1. Installation
a. General: Rig and Install in full accordance with Manufacturers

requirements, Project drawings, and Contract documents.
b. Location: Locate chiller as indicated on drawings, including cleaning and

service maintenance clearance per Manufacturer instructions. Adjust and
level chiller on support structure.
c. Components: Installing Contractor shall provide and install all auxiliary

devices and accessories for fully operational chiller.
d. Electrical: Coordinate electrical requirements and connections for all

power feeds with Electrical Contractor (Division 16).
e. Controls: Coordinate all control requirements and connections with

Controls Contractor.
f. Finish: Installing Contractor shall paint damaged and abraded factory

finish with touch-up paint matching factory finish.
2.30 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Provide each side of the expansion joints as shown and as recommended by the
expansion joint manufacturer alignment guides fabricated of steel plate and structural
steel angles KEFLEX Series P Pipe Alignment Guides, Adsco Model E pipe alignment
guides or equal. Units shall consist of a guide spider clamped and/or welded to the pipe
and a guide body that is anchored to the structure of the building. The spider shall move
through the guide body as the pipe expands and contracts.
B. Guides shall be sized to allow for the thickness of insulation specified for the service in
accordance with this specification. The first guide at each side of the bellows expansion
joint shall be located four pipe diameters from the joint. The second guide shall be
located fourteen pipe diameters from the first guide. Intermediate guides shall be spaced
as shown on the drawings between the second guides and the anchors.

August 12, 2013
2.31 CONDENSER - AIR-COOLED (ADD ALTERNATE)
A. Provide air-cooled condenser of size and capacity shown on Drawing schedule, by

Carrier, Trane, McQuay, or York.
B. Units shall consist of coils, with integral subcooling, and casing with stand. Coil shall be
aluminum plate fins on mechanically-expanded copper tubes. Coils shall be cleaned,
dehydrated, sealed, leak tested at 150 psig, and pressure tested at 420 psig.
C. Fans shall be direct-drive, propeller, protected with guards. Condensers shall have two
3-phase motors and one permanent split capacitor motor for use with accessory speed
control suitable for reduced voltage starting. Motors shall be prelubricated, with built-in
overload protection.
D. Fan shaft shall be corrosion protected. Fan blades shall have irradiated or aluminum
finish. Magnetic contactor shall be field supplied. Provide magnetic contactors in
accessory fan cycling control package to cycle fans in response to outdoor ambient
temperature.
E. Casing shall have baked enamel finish. Access panels shall be provided for electrical
connections.
F. Head pressure control shall be accomplished by fan cycling.

G. General
1. Scope
a. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,

Division 1, and Drawings apply to all work herein.
b. Provide Microprocessor controlled, multiple-scroll compressor, air-

cooled, condensing units of the scheduled capacities as shown and
indicated on the Drawings, including but not limited to:
1) Condensing Unit package

2) Holding Charge of nitrogen and oil
3) Electrical power and control connections
4) DX Central Station Air-Handling connections
5) Factory Start-Up
a. Products shall be Designed, Tested, Rated and Certified in accordance

with, and installed in compliance with applicable sections of the
following Standards and Codes:
1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 Safety Code for Mechanical

Refrigeration
2) ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency compliance.
3) ANSI/NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

August 12, 2013
4) Conform to Intertek Testing Services, formerly ETL, for

construction of condensing units and provide ETL/cETL Listing
label.
5) Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9002.
6) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
b. Factory Test: Condensing unit shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and

given a holding charge of refrigerant and a full oil charge, and shall be
factory operational run tested to assure each control device operates
properly.
c. Warranty: Manufacturer shall Warrant all equipment and material of its

manufacture against defects in workmanship and material for a period of
eighteen (18) months from date of initial start-up or date of shipment,
whichever occurs first.
3. Delivery And Handling
a. Unit shall be delivered to job site fully assembled, and given a holding
charge of nitrogen and a full oil charge by the Manufacturer. (R-410A
refrigerant supplied by others).
b. Unit shall be stored and handled per Manufacturers instructions.
a. Johnson Controls / York
b. Or equal as approved by the engineer 2 weeks prior to bid.
H. Products
1. Condensing Unit Materials And Components
a. General: Install and commission, as shown on the schedules and plans,

factory assembled, charged, and tested air cooled scroll compressor
condensing unit as specified herein. Condensing Unit shall be designed,
selected, and constructed using a refrigerant with Flammability rating of
1, as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE STANDARD - 34 Number
Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants. Condensing Unit
shall include, but is not limited to: not less than two refrigerant circuits,
scroll compressors, air-cooled condenser, refrigerant, lubrication system,
interconnecting wiring, safety and operating controls including capacity
controller, control center, motor starting components, and special
features as specified herein or required for safe, automatic operation.
b. Cabinet: External structural members shall be constructed of heavy

gauge, galvanized steel coated with baked on powder paint which, when
subject to ASTM B117, 1000 hour, 5% salt spray test, yields minimum
ASTM 1654 rating of 6.

August 12, 2013
c. Protective Condensing Unit Panels (Factory or Field Mounted)
2. Compressors
a. Compressors: shall be hermetic, scroll-type, including:
1) Compliant design for axial and radial sealing.

2) Refrigerant flow through the compressor with 100% suction
cooled motor.
3) Large suction side free volume and oil sump to provide liquid
handling capability.
4) Compressor crankcase heaters to provide extra liquid migration
protection.
5) Annular discharge check valve and reverse vent assembly to
provide low pressure drop, silent shutdown and reverse rotation
protection.
6) Initial Oil charge.
7) Oil Level sightglass.
8) Vibration isolator mounts for compressors.
9) Brazed-type connections for fully hermetic refrigerant circuits.
3. Refrigerant Circuit Components
a. Two independent refrigerant circuits will be furnished on each unit. All

unit piping will be copper, with brazed joints. The liquid line will include
a field connection shutoff valve with charging port located on each
condenser circuit. Suction line connections are provided on each
refrigeration circuit. Filter drier and sight glass are shipped loose for field
installation on each refrigerant circuit. All expansion valves and liquid
line solenoid valves and refrigerant field piping are supplied by others.
4. Heat Exchangers
a. Air Cooled Condensers
1) Coils: Internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes, mechanically

expanded into aluminum alloy fins with full height collars.
Subcooling coil an integral part of condenser. Design working
pressure shall be 650 psig (45 bar).
2) Fans: Shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive,
corrosion resistant glass fiber reinforced composite blades
molded into low noise, full airfoil cross section, providing
vertical air discharge from extended orifices for efficiency and
low sound. Each fan in its own compartment to prevent cross
flow during fan cycling. Guards of heavy gauge PVC (polyvinyl
chloride) coated steel.

August 12, 2013
3) Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 6 pole, 3 phase,

insulation class F, current protected, Totally Enclosed
Air-Over (TEAO), rigid mounted, with double sealed,
permanently lubricated, ball bearings
5. Controls
a. General: Automatic start, stop, operating, and protection sequences

across the range of scheduled conditions and transients.
b. Microprocessor Enclosure: Rain and dust tight NEMA 3R/12 (IP55)

powder painted steel cabinet with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed
door.
c. Microprocessor Control Center:
1) Condensing Unit control is set for Discharge Air Temperature

Control
2) Automatic control of compressor start/stop, anti-coincidence and
anti-recycle timers, automatic pump-down shut-down, condenser
fans, unit alarm contacts, and condensing unit operation from
0°F to 125°F (-18°C to 52°C) ambient. Automatic reset to
normal chiller operation after power failure.
3) Software stored in non-volatile memory, with programmed set-
points retained in lithium battery backed real time clock (RTC)
memory for minimum 5 years.
4) Forty character liquid crystal display, descriptions in English (or
Spanish, French, Italian, or German), numeric data in English (or
Metric) units. Sealed keypad with sections for Setpoints,
Display/Print, Entry, Unit Options & clock, and On/Off Switch.
5) Programmable Set-points (within Manufacturer limits): display
language; suction pressure setting and control range, remote
reset temperature range, set daily schedule/holiday for start/stop,
manual override for servicing, low and high ambient cutouts,
number of compressors, low suction pressure cutout, high
discharge pressure cutout, anti-recycle timer (compressor start
cycle time), and anticoincident timer (delay compressor starts).

August 12, 2013
6) Display Data: Suction temperatures (optional), low ambient

temperature cutout setting, outdoor air temperature, English or
metric data, suction pressure cutout setting, each system suction
pressure, discharge pressure (optional), discharge air reset via
Building Automation System (by others) via a 4-20milliamp or
0-10 VDC input with optional BAS interface, anti-recycle timer
status for each system, anti-coincident system start timer
condition, compressor run status, no cooling load condition, day,
date and time, daily start/stop times, holiday status, automatic or
manual system lead/lag control (when controlling based on
Discharge Air Temperature only), automatic lead/lag of
compressors within a system, compressor starts/operating hours
(each), status of hot gas valves, and fan operation, run
permissive status, number of compressors running, liquid
solenoid valve status, load & unload timer status.
7) System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to
perform auto shut down; manual reset required after the third trip
in 90 minutes. Includes: high discharge pressure, low suction
pressure, high pressure switch, and motor protector. Compressor
motor protector shall protect against damage due to high input
current or thermal overload of windings.
8) Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to
shut down if low ambient, or under voltage.
9) Alarm Contacts: Low ambient, low voltage, low battery, and (per
compressor circuit): high discharge pressure, and low suction
pressure.
10) High Ambient Control: Permits unit operation above 115°F
ambient.
d. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for
automatic condensing unit operation. Mechanical Contractor shall
provide field control wiring necessary to interface sensors to the
condensing unit control system.
6. Power Connection And Distribution
a. Power Panels:
1) NEMA 3R/12 (IP55) rain/dust tight, powder painted steel

cabinets with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer doors.
Provide main power connection(s), control power connections,
compressor and fan motor start contactors, current overloads,
and factory wiring.
2) Power supply shall enter unit at a single location, be 3 phase of
scheduled voltage, and connect to individual terminal blocks per
compressor. Separate disconnecting means and/or external
branch circuit protection (by Contractor) required per applicable
local or national codes.

August 12, 2013
b. Exposed compressor, control and fan motor power wiring shall be routed
through liquid tight conduit.
7. Accessories And Options
a. Microprocessor controlled, Factory installed Across the-Line type

compressor motor starters as standard.
b. Outdoor Ambient Temperature Control:
1) High Ambient Control (Factory Mounted):

2) Permits unit operation above 115°F ambient.
c. Power Supply Connections:
1) Single point: single non-fused disconnect supplied to isolate the

unit power voltage for servicing. Separate external fusing must
be supplied, by others, in the incoming power wiring, which
must comply with the national electric code and/or local codes.
d. Pressure & temperature transducers and sensors:
1) Discharge pressure transducers: permits unit to sense and display

discharge pressure.
e. Control power transformer:
2) Converts unit power voltage to 120-1-60 (500 va capacity).

Factory-mounting includes primary and secondary wiring
between the transformer and the control panel.
f. Sound reduction (factory-mounted):
1) Provide the following options as required to meet scheduled sound

performance data at all load points.
g. Ultra quiet fans, low speed, reduced noise (factory-mounted).
SOUND POWER LEVELS (In Accordance with AHRI 370) – Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz
YLUA0098YE46 ( Equipped with Ultra Quiet Fans )
Load % Ambient 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K LWA
(°F)
100.0 95.0 100.0 95.0 93.0 94.0 89.0 88.0 83.0 80.0 95.0
83.8 80.0 99.0 95.0 92.0 93.0 88.0 87.0 82.0 78.0 95.0
50.0 80.0 98.0 95.0 92.0 92.0 87.0 86.0 81.0 78.0 94.0
16.2 80.0 93.0 89.0 87.0 88.0 82.0 80.0 76.0 75.0 89.0

August 12, 2013
SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS in dB at 30.0 (ft.) **

YLUA0098YE46 ( Equipped with Ultra Quiet Fans )
Load % Ambient 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K dBA
(°F)
100.0 95.0 73.0 68.0 66.0 67.0 62.0 61.0 56.0 53.0 68.0
83.8 80.0 72.0 68.0 65.0 66.0 61.0 60.0 55.0 51.0 68.0
50.0 80.0 71.0 68.0 65.0 65.0 60.0 59.0 54.0 51.0 67.0
16.2 80.0 66.0 62.0 60.0 61.0 55.0 53.0 49.0 48.0 62.0
Chiller is assumed to be a point source on a reflecting (hemispherical radiation)
h. Vibration Isolation (Field-mounted):
1) Inch deflection spring isolators: level adjustable, spring and cage

type isolators for mounting under the unit base rails.
i. BACnet, MODBUS and N2 interface.
j. Louvered Condenser Panels (Factory Installed).
k. Startup by a Factory Trained Technician.
I. Execution
1. Installation
a. General: Rig and Install in full accordance with Manufacturers

requirements, Project drawings, and Contract documents.
b. Location: Locate condensing unit as indicated on drawings, including

cleaning and service maintenance clearance per Manufacturer
instructions. Adjust and level condensing unit on support structure.
c. Components: Installing Contractor shall provide and install all auxiliary

devices and accessories for fully operational condensing unit.
d. Electrical: Coordinate electrical requirements and connections for all

power feeds with Electrical Contractor (Division 16).
e. Controls: Coordinate all control requirements and connections with

Controls Contractor.
f. Finish: Installing Contractor shall paint damaged and abraded factory

finish with touch-up paint matchin

August 12, 2013
2.32 FAN - CENTRIFUGAL
A. Provide centrifugal fans by Buffalo, Chicago, Cook, Trane, Peerless, ILG, Barry, Twin
Cities, Greenheck, Aerovent, Avaho, Bayley, Hartzell or New York Blower with welded
steel housing and wheel, balanced dynamically and statically. Fans shall be
AMCA-certified and sealed.
B. Backdraft dampers shall not be provided when fans are specified or scheduled to be
equipped with automatic control dampers in or immediately below curb.
C. Provide V-belt, variable-pitch drives for +10% speed variation and with spring loaded
belt tensioner.
D. Fans shall have centrifugal with backward-curved blades fan connected to electric motor
so selected that in no instance can fan motor be overloaded at capacities shown on
schedule on Drawings. Provide open drip-proof motor on adjustable base. Motors shall
be high or premium efficiency type. See "Motors and Starters" paragraph of this
specification for required efficiencies and other requirements.
E. Provide V-belt (direct) drives sized as recommended by manufacturer. Belt construction

shall be rubber and cord. Belt sets shall be matched for length. Belt capacity shall be
150% of motor horsepower rating. Sheaves shall be cast and machined iron or steel
larger than minimum diameters recommended for particular belt. Sheaves shall be
balanced dynamically and statically.
F. Provide belt guards of 18 gauge steel mesh or perforated or expanded steel sheets with
angle frames and galvanized steel or iron trim, rigidly-braced. Provide ports for
tachometer speed measurements at fan shafts.
G. Provide spring vibration isolation bases as specified in Vibration Isolation Paragraph in

Section 20 05 48.
H. Provide variable inlet vanes.
2.33 VIBRATION ISOLATION (NON-SEISMIC AND SEISMIC)
A. Provide Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints as specified under Section 20 05 48.
2.34 ACCESS PANELS (WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED)
A. Furnish access panels as specified in Section 20 05 00 and 08310 for access to

mechanical equipment as required. Access panels shall be installed under other sections.
2.35 RETURN FAN ARRAY
A. General
1. Work Included
a. Provide Fan array with dimensions and performance as shown

August 12, 2013
b. Basis of Design is Johnson Controls fan and components as shown on

product drawings and described in performance specifications.
c. Other manufacturers shall be acceptable if approved by engineer 2 weeks

prior to bid.
d. Motors, disconnects, starters, and variable frequency drives, as shown on

product drawings and described in performance specifications.
e. Factory packaged controls, as shown on product drawings and described

in performance specifications.
f. Product drawings, performance specifications, and other submittal

documents show segments, components, options, and features furnished
by Johnson Controls. Options listed in this specification will not
necessarily be included.
B. Coordination
1. Installing contractor will coordinate the following items with applicable trades:
a. Structural supports for units.

b. Size and location of concrete bases/housekeeping pads
c. Location of roof curbs, unit supports and roof penetrations
d. Ductwork sizes and connection locations
e. Piping size and connection/header locations
f. Interference with existing or planned ductwork, piping and wiring
g. Electrical power requirements and wire/conduit and over current
protection sizes.
h. Trap height requirements
i. Connection to the ALC BAS
C. Ratings And Certifications
1. Unit will conform to AMCA 210 for fan performance ratings.
2. Unit will conform to E.T.L. standards. Unit will be ETL listed.
3. Unit sound ratings will be reported in accordance with AHRI 260 for inlet and
discharge sound power levels.
4. Unit casing radiated sound ratings will be reported in accordance with ISO 9614
parts 1&2 and ANSI S12.12.
5. Unit will conform to AHRI 410 for capacities, pressure drops, and selection
procedures of air coils.
6. Unit will conform to ANSI/AHRI 430 for all fabrication procedures of air
handling units.

August 12, 2013
7. Motors covered by the Federal Energy Policy Act (EPACT) will meet EPACT
requirements.
8. Damper performance will comply with AMCA 500.
9. Airflow Monitoring Stations will be rated in accordance with AMCA 611-95 and
bear a Certified Ratings Seal for Airflow Measurement Performance.
D. Delivery
1. Unpainted units will be shrink-wrapped for protection during shipment. Painted

units will be tarped for protection during shipment.
2. Openings will be protected against damage during shipping
3. Loose-shipped items will be packed, protected and secured with units. Detailed
packing list of loose-shipped items, illustrations and instructions for application
will be included.
E. Warranty
1. Manufacturer will warranty unit and factory packaged controls for eighteen (18)
months from date of shipment. Warranty work shall be performed by
manufacturers factory-trained and factory-employed technician.
F. General Description
1. Unit will be complete with fans, motors, dampers, controls, access doors and
other components/options, as shown on product drawings, wiring diagrams, and
as described in performance specifications.
2. Fans and drives will be balanced to limit vibration at operating speeds.
3. Unit will ship in one (1) piece whenever possible. Shipping splits will be
provided when necessary. Lifting lugs will be provided where required for
proper lifting.
4. Unit casing will be factory insulated.
5. Unit will be ETL labeled.
G. Unit Casing
1. Unit casing will consist of a structural frame and insulated roof, wall, and floor
panels.
2. Removal of wall panels will not affect structural integrity of units.

August 12, 2013
3. Unit casing will be insulated with spray injected foam to achieve a minimum
thermal resistance of R13 hr-ft2-°F/BTU. Insulation application will meet the
requirements of NFPA 90A
4. Insulation system will be resistant to mold growth in accordance with a

standardized test method such as UL 181 or ASTM C 1338
5. Unit will conform to ASHRAE Standard 111 Class 6 for casing leakage no more
than 1% of design airflow at 1.25 times design static pressure up to a maximum
of +8 inches w.g. in positive pressure sections and -8 inches w.g. in negative
pressure sections.
6. Wall panels and access doors will deflect no more than L/240 when subjected to
1.5 times design static pressure up to a maximum of +8 inches w.g. in positive
pressure sections and -8 inches w.g. in negative pressure sections. L is the
panel-span length and L/240 is the deflection at panel midpoint.
7. Unit will have double wall, 2 insulated panels for walls, roof, and floor.
Exterior skin will be galvanized sheet steel. Individual segments will have
galvanized sheet steel, stainless sheet steel, or perforated galvanized interior
liner, as described in performance specifications.
a. Provide panels with optional perforated liner in the fan section and other
sections as shown on the drawings. Interior liner will be perforated
galvanized. Minimum perforated panel thermal resistance (R-Value)
will be R11 hr-ft2-°F/BTU.
8. Floor panels will be double wall construction, designed to provide at most L/240
deflection when subjected to a 300 lb. load at mid-span.
9. Double wall access doors will be provided on sections as shown on product

drawings.
a. Stainless steel hinges permit a 180 door swing.

b. Access door will be of the same material type as exterior/interior casing.
c. Access door latches will use a roller cam latching mechanism.
10. View ports will be double-pane tempered glass.
H. Fans
1. Fans will provide CFM and static pressure, as shown in performance

specifications.
2. Fans will be Class I, II, or III, as required to meet selected RPM and horsepower
shown in performance specifications.

August 12, 2013
3. Airfoil fans will bear the AMCA Seal. Airfoil fan performance will be based on
tests in accordance with AMCA standard 210 and will comply with the
requirements of AMCA certified ratings programs for air and sound. Airfoil
wheels will comply with AMCA standards 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82.
4. Fans shafts will be polished steel and sized such that the first critical speed will
be at least 125% of the maximum operating speed for the fan pressure class.
Shaft will be coated with an anti-corrosion coating.
5. Fan and motor assembly will be internally mounted on a common base. Fan and
motor base will be spring isolated on a full width isolator support channel.
a. Fan motor will be on an adjustable base.

b. Fan discharge will be connected to cabinet via a flexible connection.
c. Access doors will be provided as shown on product drawing.
6. Multiple Fans will be Model MPQS centrifugal plenum type. Fans will have a
sharply rising pressure characteristic extending through the operating range and
continuing to rise beyond the peak efficiency to ensure quiet and stable
operation. Fans will have a non-overloading design with self-limiting horsepower
characteristics and will reach a peak in the normal selection area.
a. Performance Fans will be tested in accordance with AMCA 210 and

AMCA 300 test standards for air moving devices and will be guaranteed
by the manufacturer to deliver rated published performance levels.
b. Construction Fans will be designed without a scroll type housing and
will incorporate a non-overloading type backward inclined airfoil blade
wheel, heavy-gauge reinforced steel inlet plate and structural steel frame.
c. Frame and Inlet Panel Inlet panels will be of heavy-gauge reinforced
steel construction. The inlet panel incorporates a removable spun inlet
cone designed for smooth airflow into the accompanying inlet retaining
ring of the fan wheel. A square, formed lip suitable for attachment of a
boot connector will surround the unit.
d. Wheel Wheels will have a spun non-tapered style blade retaining ring
on the inlet side to allow higher efficiencies over the performance range
of the fan. Wheels will have airfoil-shaped extruded aluminum blades.
All hollow blade wheels will be continuously welded around all edges.
Wheels will have twelve blades for better sound quality. All wheels will
be statically and dynamically balanced per ANSI/AMCA 204.
e. Finish and Coating The entire fan assembly will be thoroughly
degreased and deburred before application of a rust-preventative coating.
Aluminum components will be unpainted.
f. Motors Provide TEFC Premium Eff. with Aegis Shaft Grounding
factory installed. Motor frames will be cast iron rolled steel frames are
not acceptable
g. Fan Balancing All fans prior to shipment will be individually
balanced. Maximum vibration will be within the limits of ANSI/AMCA
204 Fan Application Category BV-4. Balance readings will be taken by
electronic type equipment in the axial, vertical, and horizontal directions
on each of the bearings.

August 12, 2013
h. Vibration Isolation Fans will meet the ANSI/AMCA 204 Fan

Application Category BV-4 rating.
i. Blank off Panels Each Multiple Fan section to be provided with one
fan blankoff panel to enable manual isolation of fan for servicing.
j. Fan Options The following options will be available for multiple fans:
1) Piezometer Ring: Airflow station will be factory installed in each

fan inlet. Tubing will be manifolded so that the measurement is
representative of all fans in the array. The device will have a
measurement accuracy of ± 5%.
2) Backdraft Damper: Backdraft dampers will be available for
automatic isolation of individual fans.
I. Bearings And Drives
1. Fan bearings will have average life (L50) of at least 200,000 hours. Bearing
fatigue life ratings will comply with ANSI/AFBMA 9.
2. DWDI fans will be belt-driven. SWSI fans will be belt driven or direct driven, as
shown on product drawings.
3. Re-greaseable fan bearings will be factory lubricated and equipped with standard
hydraulic grease fittings. Fan drives will be selected for a 1.5 service factor and
will be furnished with anti-static belts.
a. Drives 15 hp or smaller on constant volume fans will be adjustable pitch.

b. Drives 20 hp or larger or drives on fans with VFDs will be fixed pitch.
c. Sheaves will be machined from close grain cast iron and statically
balanced.
d. Drive belts will be V type, precision molded, raw edge construction, anti-
static, oil and heat resistant.
J. Electrical Motors
1. Fan motors will be built in accordance with the latest NEMA and IEEE
standards.
2. Fan motors comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
3. Fan motors will be furnished in sizes, electrical power and starting characteristics
as shown in performance specifications.
a. Fan motors will be rated for continuous, full load duty at 104 F (40 C)
ambient temperature and 1.15 service factor.
1) Exception: 1.5 hp and 3 hp, dual voltage (230/460V), 900 RPM,

TEFC motors will have a 1.0 service factor.
b. Fan motors will be NEMA design ball bearing type.
1) Direct drive plenum fans will be coupled with motors that

closely match required fan RPM.

August 12, 2013
c. Motors will be suitable for use with variable frequency drives, per
NEMA MG-1 Part 30.
K. Fan-Motor Disconnects
1. Fan motor disconnects will be provided with unit, as shown in performance

specifications.
2. Disconnect will be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, and will be mounted on the

primary access side of segment.
3. Disconnect will be suitable for use as an OSHA lockout/tagout disconnect when

applied in accordance with part IV, Department of Labor OSHA 29 CFR Part
1910, Control of Hazardous Energy Source (lockout/tagout): final rule.
4. Disconnect handles can be padlocked in the off position with up to three

padlocks. Switch mechanism can be directly padlocked in the off position
when door is open.
5. Disconnects will be provided with an integral ground lug.
a. 16A to 100A disconnects will have two (2) #14 ground wires.
b. 200A to 400A disconnects will have one (1) #6-250 ground wire.
c. Hand-Off-Auto switch
L. Fan Variable Frequency Drives
1. Provide (2) VFDs on Fan Array for redundancy upon the failure of one VFD.
2. Variable frequency drives will be furnished (shipped loose) or provided (factory

mounted and wired to motor) with units, as shown in submittal documents.
3. VFDs will be UL or ETL listed and comply with applicable provisions of the
National Electric Code.
4. VFDs will be housed in a dedicated, weather resistant compartment.
a. Shipped loose VFDs and VFDs provided on units without single point
power will be housed in a NEMA 3R enclosure.
b. Weatherproof compartments will be provided on units with single point
power.
5. VFDs furnished or provided with units will be programmed and started by a

Johnson Controls trained and employed technician.
6. VFD will include harmonic distortion feedback protection:
a. Swinging DC Line Choke (equivalent to 5% input line reactor)

August 12, 2013
b. Integral RFI/EMI filtering to meet EMC EN61800-3 for First

Environment
7. User interface will include:
a. 30 Character multi-lingual alphanumeric display
b. Parameter set-up and operating data
c. Display data includes:
1) output frequency (Hz)

2) speed (RPM)
3) motor current
4) calculated % motor torque
5) calculated motor power (kW)
6) DC bus voltage
7) output voltage
8) heat sink temperature
9) elapsed time meter (re-settable)
10) kWh (re-settable)
11) input / output terminal monitor
12) PID actual value (feedback) & error
13) fault text
14) warning text
15) scalable process variable display
d. VFD protection circuits will include:
1) over current
2) ground fault
3) over voltage
4) under voltage
5) over temperature
6) input power loss of phase
7) loss of reference/feedback
8) adjustable current limit regulator
8. VFD will be UL 508C approved for electronic motor overload (12t).
9. VFD will include high input transient protection and surge suppression:
a. 4 MOVs ahead of diode bridge

b. 120 Joule rated 1600V diode module
c. Compliant with UL 1449 / ANSI 61.4
10. VFD communication features include:
a. Two programmable analog inputs

b. Six programmable digital inputs

August 12, 2013
c. Two programmable analog outputs

d. Three programmable digital relay outputs
e. Modbus RTU Communications protocol
f. Adjustable filters on analog inputs and outputs
g. Input speed signals, including 4-20 mA and 0-10 VDC
h. Acceleration/Deceleration contacts (floating point control)
i. Auto restart (customer selectable and adjustable)
j. Start/Stop options will include 2 wire (dry contact closure), 3 wire
(momentary contacts), application of input power, and application of
reference signal (PID sleep/wake-up)
k. Integrated control interface for Siemens FLN, Johnson N2, Modbus
RTU, and BACnet MS/TP
1) Optional LONworks over RS-485.
11. VFD will have the following functions:
a. Premagnetization on start
b. DC braking/hold at stop
c. Ramp or coast to stop
d. Seven preset speeds
e. Three critical frequency lockout bands
f. Start function will include ramp, flying start, automatic torque boost, and
automatic torque boost with flying start
M. Finishes
1. External unit surfaces will be factory cleaned prior to finishing or shipping.

2. Unpainted air-handling units constructed of galvanized steel will pass the ASTM
B-117 test for 220-hour salt spray solution (5%) without any sign of red rust.
3. Unit will be painted, as shown in performance specifications.
a. Painted units will be prime-coated prior to painting.

b. Paint will be acrylic polyurethane.
c. Painted unit will exceed 500-hour salt spray test, with (5%) solution,
without any sign of red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B-
117.
N. Tests And Inspections
1. Fan skid will be run-balanced at specified speed to insure smooth operation.
a. Constant volume fan assemblies will be balanced at design RPM.

b. Variable volume fan assemblies will be balanced from 10% to 100% of
design RPM.
c. Filter-in measurements will be taken in horizontal and vertical axes on
drive and opposite-drive sides of fan shafts.
d. Constant speed fan vibration limits: filter-in measurements will not
exceed 4 mils.

August 12, 2013
e. Variable speed fan vibration limits: filter -in measurements will not
exceed 7 mils.
2. Unit wiring with voltage greater than 30VAC will be hipot tested prior to
shipping.
2.36 WINDOW INTERLOCKS
A. Magnetic window interlocks shall be provided at each operable window and tied to the
Automated Logic BAS. The installation of the interlocks shall be coordinated with and
maintain the integrity of the window framing. Refer to controls sequence for details of
controls integration. When multiple windows exist in a single space, the opening of any
window shall close the spaces associated dampers, valves and provide alarm at BAS as
required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REFERENCE
A. Refer to Section 20 05 00.
3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section.
B. Gypsum Drywall Enclosures:
1. Coordinate and supervise construction of drywall and related work affecting

work of this Section.
2. Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Supply and return air duct enclosures on air handling equipment.
b. Supply air plenums located above rooms.
c. Return air shafts.
3. Ensure tightness of plenums and chases used as part of air distribution system.
System will not be accepted until proved tight, without leakage. Notify Architect
in writing after system test for leakage, if construction and finish of plenums and
ducts are not satisfactory.
3.3 TAGS AND VALVE TAG CHARTS
A. Provide valve tags as required under Section 20 05 00.
B. Provide valve tag charts as required under section 20 05 00.

August 12, 2013
3.4 PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe and duct identification shall be provided as specified in section 20 05 00.
3.5 CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Install chiller on flat surface level within 1/8-in. and of sufficient strength to support
concentrated loading. Place isolation pad assemblies furnished by manufacturer under
unit. Use spring type isolators for upper floor installation.
B. Assemble and install components furnished according to manufacturer's literature.
C. Connect water piping so centrifugal unit and water circuits are serviceable.
D. Provide valves in water piping upstream and downstream of evaporator and condenser
water boxes to provide means of isolating shells for maintenance and to balance and trim
system as specified.
E. Install flow switch in both chilled water and condenser water piping, properly interlocked
to ensure that unit can operate only when flow is established.
F. Provide taps for thermometers and pressure gauges in water piping adjacent to inlet and
outlet connections of both evaporator and condenser.
G. Provide drain valves to each water box.
H. Install vent cocks to each water box.
I. Install strainers ahead of pumps and automatic modulating valves.
J. Provide necessary auxiliary water piping for oil cooler, purge condenser and pumpout.
K. Provide pressure relief piping from chillers relief device, to atmosphere, at the exterior of
the building. Discharge location must be pre-approved by Architect before installation.
Provide one relief line, to atmosphere, for each chiller; relief piping line size must be
equal or greater than size of relief valve outlet. All aspects of relief piping installation
shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE (ANSI-15 Safety Code).
L. Furnish sufficient refrigerant charge and dry nitrogen for pressure testing under
manufacturer's supervision.
M. Start-up unit under supervision of qualified field engineer provided by chiller

manufacturer.
N. Insulate evaporator and other portions of machine which have not been insulated at
factory, as required to prevent sweating under normal operating conditions.

August 12, 2013
3.6 BOILER ERECTION AND CLEANING - HOT WATER
A. Install boiler in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (note: sealed combustion

installation). Provide for expansion and contraction of hot water mains connected to
boiler with anchors at suitable points and swing joints. Feedwater, make-up water and
water treatment shall be introduced into boiler through return piping.
B. Clean internally as specified in Section VI of ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code. Use
boil-out compound of caustic soda or trisodium phosphate at one pound 50 gallons of
water as follows:
1. Remove pressure relief valve. Pour solution into boiler through tapping and
replace relief valve.
2. Start burner and circulate water throughout system and terminal heaters.
3. Allow water temperature to reach operating temperature, at least 180 deg. F and
vent system.
4. Circulate water for five hours or as directed by the Owners Representative.
5. Stop burner and drain system.
6. Remove pressure relief valve, wash boiler water side surfaces with high pressure
water and drain residue. Replace pressure relief valve at completion.
7. Refill system with fresh water and start burner. Bring water temperature to at
least 180 deg. F and vent system to eliminate entrained air.
8. Place boiler in service or on standby as required by the Owners Representative.
9. Repeat cleanout as directed by the Owners Representative and until no

contaminants remain in system.
C. Provide two copies of ASME Section VI to Owner.
3.7 BURNER LIGHTOFF, ADJUSTMENT AND PRESSURE TEST
A. Provide services of factory-trained burner service technician to perform lightoff,

adjustment and control checkout in presence of Gas Inspector and gas company
representative. Instruct Owner's personnel in boiler/burner operation.
B. Burner lightoff and adjustment shall include combustion efficiency tests using batch or
electronic analyzing apparatus, in presence of the Owners Representative.
C. Test data shall include:
1. Burner input and proper rate.

August 12, 2013
2. Control operating tests including adjustment and check out of limits, switches,
operating controls, interlocks, low water cutoff devices and alarms, gas valves,
pressure regulators, scanners and combustion controls.
3. Purging boiler and pilot operation tests; tests for venting.
4. Percent CO2 in flue gas.
5. Gross and net stack temperatures. Presence of CO (if any) and adjustment to
reduce as necessary.
6. Steady-state combustion efficiency; burner adjustments to provide optimum

efficiency. Setting and adjustment of pressure overfire at slide damper, to
manufacturer's specifications.
D. Pressure Tests
1. Subject pressure parts to hydrostatic test of 125 psi at factory. Field tests shall be
limited to no more than maximum intended working pressure.
2. Furnish equipment, piping, labor, staging, fittings, valves, hoses and other
material required to perform hydrostatic tests as directed.
3. Perform hydrostatic test of at least 40 psig for 5 hours. Tests shall be of duration
necessary to satisfy Architect and Boiler Inspector that boiler has been erected
correctly with no leaks.
4. Provide glass front frame in boiler room for Certificate of Inspection.
E. Record readings on check sheet and provide copy to Architect.
F. Record all readings listed above for lowest firing rate.
G. Provide reference card (Lynn Products) at burner; note combustion data test readings.
3.8 EQUIPMENT TESTING
A. No tests shall be started until systems have been cleaned. Provide temporary piping and
connections for testing, flushing or draining systems to be tested. If leaks develop,
repairs shall be made and tests repeated. Tests shall be continued until systems operate
without adjustments and repair to equipment or piping. Tests are further specified under
other paragraphs of this Section. Test requirement specifically includes, but is not
limited to, the following:
1. Water chilling unit
2. Pumps
3. Air handling units

August 12, 2013
4. Boilers
B. Circulating Water Pumps, Chillers and Fans
1. Take field measurements on vibration and alignment of pumps, chillers and fans
driven by motors over 10 hp. Readings shall include:
a. Shaft alignment
b. Equipment vibration
c. Bearing housing vibration
d. Foundation vibration
e. Building structure vibration
f. Readings directed by Architect
g. Maximum vibration at any point listed shall not exceed 2 mils.
2. Refrigeration Systems
a. Test water chilling unit and other refrigeration systems for refrigerant
and air leaks at least twice: Approximately six months after start-up and
at end of guarantee period.
b. Use electronic refrigerant detector for leak detection.
c. Leaks detected shall be properly sealed and above test repeated.
d. Test pressures shall be 300 psi for high pressure side and 150 psi for low
pressure side.
e. Replace refrigerant and oil lost during guarantee period at no cost to

Owner.
f. Certify condition of system in writing after test.

August 12, 2013
C. When testing is complete fill in the following checklist certifying satisfactory completion
of testing. Make multiple copies of checklist as required, edit out items which are not
appropriate.
Equipment and Piping Testing Checklist

Test Item Date Confirmed Manufacturers General Contractors
Representative Name and Representative Name and
Signature Signature
Burner/Lightoff
Adjustment
Vibration and
Alignment
Pumps
Chillers
Fans
Refrigeration System
Leak Tests
Hydrostatic Tests of
Piping
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM CLEANING AND TESTING
A. No test shall be started until systems have been cleaned. Provide temporary piping and
connections for cleaning, testing, flushing or draining systems. If leaks develop, repairs
shall be made and tests repeated. Tests shall be continued until systems operate without
adjustments and repair to piping.
B. Cleaning
1. Prior to assembly of pipe and piping components, all loose dirt, scale, oil and
other foreign matter on internal or external surfaces shall be removed by means
consistent with good piping practice. Chips and burrs from machinery or thread
cutting operations shall be blown out of pipe before assembly. Cutting oil shall
be wiped from internal and external surfaces.
2. During fabrication and assembly, slag and weld spatter shall be removed from
both internal and external pipe joints.
3. Legally dispose of cleaning and flushing fluids.
4. Prior to blowing or flushing erected piping systems, disconnect all instruments

and equipment, open wide all valves and be certain all disposable fine mesh
screens are in place in strainers and pump suction diffusers.
5. Clean all systems. Bypass coils during flushing operation. Follow

manufacturers instructions.

August 12, 2013
6. Flush pipe and components with clean water after cleaning until all discharge
from system is clean. Maintain minimum velocities of 5 feet per second at all
points. Flow shall be in same direction as when system is in normal operation.
Discharge shall be from low points of lines, ends of headers and as otherwise
required to flush entire system.
7. After cleaning and flushing piping system, but before balancing, remove
disposable fine mesh screens in strainers and pump suction diffusers.
C. Pre-Operational Cleaning (off-line system)
1. General
a. Nalco System I-B
b. The mechanical contractor shall provide chemicals and labor for the pre-
operational cleaning of all hydronic water systems including but not
limited to: condenser, chilled, glycol, hot water and related equipment
piping systems. This cleaning method is not intended for potable water
systems.
2. Preparation for Clean Out
a. All systems must be prepared prior to the introduction of the chemical

cleaner.
b. The Mechanical Contractor shall flush all systems, including mud from
drop legs. The cooling tower basin must be free of mud, silt and
construction debris. Remove, clean and replace all strainers. All systems
shall contain the highest quality of water available.
c. Complete circulation must be achieved during the cleaning procedure. A
minimum flow rate of 3 ft/sec. needs to be maintained to insure that the
cleaning chemicals will work properly. All manual, electrical, air and
thermostatic operated valves must be open. All dead end runs must be
looped together with piping not less than 1/3 the size of the run. This
piping is to remain in place until cleaning is complete.
d. A minimum of 1-1/2" ball or gate valve is to be permanently installed in
the low point of each system for the purpose of draining each system.
e. The cleaner shall not require external heat to ensure its effectiveness.
3. Chemicals
a. The cleaning solution shall be formulated to remove light grease, cutting

oils, loose mill scale, organics and extraneous construction debris.
b. The cleaner shall contain corrosion inhibitor, a dispersant and an oil
emulsifier.
c. The recommended cleaner, Nalco 2578, will follow a procedure dosage
of 2.7 gallons of chemical per 1000 gallons of water.

August 12, 2013
d. Enough cleaner should be used to treat all of the piping to remove oil and
grease to permit a uniform passivating film to form. This aids in the
prevention of flash corrosion when the system is most vulnerable to
corrosive attack.
e. The mechanical contractor will provide the water treatment vendor with
an estimate of system volume for proper dosage of cleaner.
4. Pre-operational Cleaning
a. Cooling Tower/Closed System -- maintain lowest water level possible in

cooling tower sump or basin.
b. Add recommended quantity of passivation chemical directly into the
tower sump or closed loop system before the recirculating pumps to
ensure rapid mixing and distribution throughout the system. For towers
that are constructed of galvanized steel with no protective coating, adjust
the pH of the recirculating water to 6.5 to 7.5 prior to the addition of the
passivation chemical. A small amount of antifoam, Nalco 71D5 Plus,
may be added to prevent excessive foaming. Refer to MSDS sheets for
safety information. Add nonoxidizing biocide gluteraldehyde, Nalco
7339, at a dosage of 0.5 per 1000 gallons of water.
c. For ideal metal passivation, maintain the pH from 6.5 to 7.5 with a small
amount of sulfuric acid during the entire cleaning process.
d. Recirculate the system for 48 - 72 hours.
e. Open and drain mud legs and low points periodically during the cleaning
process.
f. Drain system completely paying particular attention to mud from drop
legs and all low points.
g. Refill the system with clean, potable water, check all strainers,
Recirculate and drain completely.
h. Refill the system again. The length of time between the completion of
the cleaning procedure and addition of the corrosion inhibitor shall not
exceed twenty-four (24) hours.
i. Add the recommended level of closed loop or tower inhibitor. The
system is now ready for operation. For towers that will not be
immediately operational, the tower must have a chemical level consisting
of at least 50-60 ppm of Phosphino Succinic Oligomer (PSO) and 10
ppm Benzotriazole or 2000 PPM as product. The product must also
contain an inert tracer that is colorless in the system for use in closed
loop leak detection and volume studies. The product shall be Nalco
TRAC 107.
j. A service report will be generated on-site by the water treatment
representative certifying that the system has been cleaned in accordance
with the above procedures. A copy shall be sent to the mechanical
contractor and the consulting engineer (as requested). Chemical test
parameters shall include onsite testing of pH, conductivity, phosphate,
total iron, ferrous iron, and copper after the preclean is completed to
verify all cleaner is removed and iron and copper levels are low. Total
iron must be < 5 ppm, Ferrous Iron < 2 ppm, and Copper < 0.5 ppm.

August 12, 2013
D. Pre-Operational Cleaning (on-line system)
1. General
a. Nalco System I-C
operational cleaning of all condensers, chilled, glycol or hot water and
related equipment piping systems. This cleaning method is not intended
for potable water systems.

cleaner.
drop legs. The cooling tower basin must be free of mud, silt and
construction debris. Remove, clean and replace all strainers. All systems
shall contain the highest quality of water available.
thermostatic operated valves must be open. All dead end runs must be
looped together with piping not less than 1/3 the size of the run. This
piping is to remain in place until cleaning is complete.
d. A minimum of 1-1/2" ball or gate valve is to be permanently installed in
the low point of each system for the purpose of draining each system.
e. The cleaner shall not require external heat to ensure its effectiveness.
3. Chemicals
a. The cleaning solution shall be formulated to remove light grease, cutting

oils, loose mill scale, organics and extraneous construction debris.
b. The cleaner shall contain corrosion inhibitor, a dispersant and an oil
emulsifier.
c. The recommended cleaner will follow a procedure dosage of 2.7 gallons
of chemical per 1000 gallons of water.
d. Enough cleaner should be used to treat all of the piping to remove oil and
grease to permit a uniform passivating film to form. This aids in the
prevention of flash corrosion when the system is most vulnerable to
corrosive attack.
e. The mechanical contractor will provide the water treatment vendor with
an estimate of system volume for proper dosage of cleaner.
f. The recommended cleaner shall be Nalco 8349.
g. The recommended antifoam shall be Nalco 71D5 Plus.
h. The recommended biocide shall be Nalco 7339.
i. The recommended inhibitor shall be Nalco TRAC 107.

August 12, 2013
a. Cooling Tower/Closed System -- maintain lowest water level possible in

cooling tower sump or basin.
b. Add recommended quantity of passivation chemical directly into the
tower sump or closed loop system before the recirculating pumps to
ensure rapid mixing and distribution throughout the system. For towers
that are constructed of galvanized steel with no protective coating, adjust
the pH of the recirculating water to 6.5 to 7.5 prior to the addition of the
passivation chemical. A small amount of antifoam may be added to
prevent excessive foaming. Refer to MSDS sheets for safety information.
Add nonoxidizing biocide gluteraldehyde at a dosage of 0.5 per 1000
gallons of water.
c. For ideal metal passivation, maintain the pH from 6.5 to 7.5 with a small
amount of sulfuric acid during the entire cleaning process.
d. Recirculate the system for 48 - 72 hours.
e. Open and drain mud legs and low points periodically during the cleaning
process.
f. Drain system completely paying particular attention to mud from drop
legs and all low points.
g. Refill the system with clean, potable water, check all strainers,
Recirculate and drain completely.
h. Refill the system again. The length of time between the completion of
the cleaning procedure and addition of the corrosion inhibitor shall not
exceed twenty-four (24) hours.
i. Add the recommended level of closed loop or tower inhibitor. The
system is now ready for operation. For towers that will not be
immediately operational, the tower must have a chemical level consisting
of at least 50-60 ppm of Phosphino Succinic Oligomer (PSO) and 10
ppm Benzotriazole or 2000 PPM as product. The product must also
contain an inert tracer that is colorless in the system for use in closed
loop leak detection and volume studies.
j. A service report will be generated on-site by the water treatment
representative certifying that the system has been cleaned in accordance
with the above procedures. A copy shall be sent to the mechanical
contractor and the consulting engineer (as requested). Chemical test
parameters shall include onsite testing of pH, conductivity, phosphate,
total iron, ferrous iron, and copper after the preclean is completed to
verify all cleaner is removed and iron and copper levels are low. Total
iron must be < 5 ppm, Ferrous Iron < 2 ppm, and Copper < 0.5 ppm.
E. Cleaning of Existing Closed Loop System
1. General
a. Nalco System I-G
operational cleaning of the closed system. This cleaning method is not
intended for potable water systems.

August 12, 2013

cleaner.
drop legs. Remove, clean and replace all strainers. All systems shall
contain the highest quality of water available.
thermostatic operated valves must be open. All dead end runs remain in
place until cleaning is complete. A minimum of 1-1/2" ball or gate valve
is to be permanently installed in the low point of each system for the
purpose of draining each system. The cleaner shall not require external
heat to ensure its effectiveness.
3. Chemicals
a. The cleaning solution shall be formulated to remove deposits. The

cleaner shall contain effective dispersants. Enough cleaner shall be
provided to clean the internal heat transfer surfaces. The mechanical
contractor will provide the water treatment vendor with an estimate of
system volume for proper dosage of cleaner.
b. The recommended cleaner shall be Nalco 8337.
c. The recommended biocide shall be Nalco 7339.
a. There is no need to flush the present treatment chemical from the system.
b. Add cartridges to filtration device. Filter must be sized for 3 5 % of
system flow. If there is no filter on site, mechanical contractor must
supply a filter for permanent use. See filter schedule for the appropriately
sized filter.
c. Add biocide at a dosage of 500 ppm (0.5 gallons per 1000 gallons of
system volume). Add biocide one day prior to addition of cleaning
compound.
d. Circulate a cleaning solution, made up at a minimum rate of 3.7
gal/1000gallon system volume (follow the specific dose
recommendation) as a guideline.
e. Recirculation for 3 - 4 days is recommended for best results. Inspecting
the filter to monitor the progress of the cleaning process. Change filters
as needed.
f. No special passivation is required. Add the closed system treatment
product at the recommended dosage to protect the operating system
against corrosion, scale and deposits.

August 12, 2013
F. Hydrostatic Testing of Piping
1. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B

31.9 and as follows:
a. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination

during the test.
b. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain

the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not
practical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
c. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the
piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve.
Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not
be tested.
d. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test
pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other
source of overpressure during the test.
2. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:
a. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium except where there
is a risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it safe
for workmen and compatible with the piping system components.
b. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air
while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete
removal of that liquid.
c. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand
test pressure are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure
that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected.
d. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point

in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test
pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump,
valve or other component in the system under test. Make a check to
verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does
not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7
times the SE value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure
Piping, Building Services Piping.
e. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10
minutes, examine piping, joints and connections for leakage. Eliminate
leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate,
and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

August 12, 2013
3. Fill and Startup
a. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. Initial fill of system
shall be with chemically treated water. For system using glycol, fill
system with specified glycol mixture.
b. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that
the system is completely full.
c. Before operating the system, perform the following steps:
1) Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valve.

2) Remove and clean strainers.
3) Check pump for proper rotation, correct improper wiring if
required.
4) Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
5) Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are
installed and operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed air
completely (manual type).
6) Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
7) Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
8) Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers and
cooling towers to design requirements.
9) Lubricate motors and bearings.
G. Maintain records of each system or section of system tested. Test reports shall include,
but are not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Identification of piping system or section tested (highlighted floor plan)

2. Data of test and date.
3. Testing medium, test equipment description (sketch if necessary) and method of
description of test procedure.
4. Test pressure, duration of test, and recorded pressure drop.
H. Notify the Architect prior to starting any post-erection cleaning operation in sufficient
time to allow witnessing the operation.
3.10 ENERGY CONSUMPTION REPORT
A. This report is for use in the LEED Version 2009 EA Credit 5 Measurement and
Verification validation of the energy model.
B. See the Measurement and Verification Plan for more information.
C. Submit samples of each report with a shop drawing.
D. Utilities Usage Reporting

August 12, 2013
1. Reports shall be sent by excel spreadsheet of a predetermined, approved upon

format.
2. Monthly Total
a. Building Electric Meter (kWh):

b. Building Chilled Water Meter (kBTU):
c. Fans (kWh):
d. Chilled Water (kBTU):
e. Hot Water (kBTU):
f. Lighting (kWh): kWhr By Building, Lighting By Room Number
g. Water: Lavatory, Irrigation, process
3. Daily Output Reports
a. Building Electric Meter (kWh):

b. Building Chilled Water Meter (kBTU):
c. Fans (kWh):
d. Chilled Water (kBTU):
e. Hot Water (kBTU):
f. Lighting (kWh): kWhr By Building, Lighting By Room Number
g. Water: Lavatory, Irrigation, process
4. Hourly Output Reports
a. Weather outputs: T_DB, Carbon Dioxide, Dew Point, RH, Solar Direct?,
Solar Indirect?
b. Building Electric Meter (kWh):
c. Building Chilled Water Meter (kBTU):
d. Space temperature set points
e. Hours of operation Unocc, Standby, Occ
f. Fans( kWh):
g. Pumps(kWh):
h. Chilled Water (kBTU):
i. Hot Water (kBTU):
j. Lighting (kWh): kWhr By Building, Lighting By Room Number
k. Occupancy Schedule: Average Hourly 0-1. By Room Number
l. Water: Lavatory, Irrigation, process
E. Energy Reports. System shall include an easily configured energy reporting tool that
provides the capabilities described in this section.
1. The energy reporting tool shall be accessible through the same user interface as is
used to manage the BAS.
2. The energy reporting tool shall be preconfigured by the Contractor to gather and
store energy demand and consumption data from each energy source that
provides metered data to the BAS. Meter data shall be stored at 5 minute
intervals. This data shall be maintained in a database for a period of not less than
five years.

August 12, 2013
3. The energy reporting tool shall allow the operator to select an energy source and
a time period of interest (day, week, month, year, or date range) and shall provide
options to view the data in a table, line graph, bar graph, or pie chart. The tool
shall also allow the operator to select two or more data sources and display a
comparison of the energy used over this period in any of the listed graph formats,
or to total the energy used by the selected sources and display that data in the
supported formats.
4. The energy reporting tool shall allow the operator to select an energy source and
two time periods of interest (day, week, month, year, or date range) and display a
graph that compares the energy use over the two time periods in any of the graph
formats listed in the previous paragraph. The tool shall also allow the operator to
select multiple energy sources and display a graph that compares the total energy
used by these sources over the two time periods.
5. The energy reporting tool shall allow the operator to easily generate the
previously described graphs "on the fly," and shall provide an option to store the
report format so the operator can select that format to regenerate the graph at a
future date. The tool shall also allow the user to schedule these reports to run on a
recurring basis using relative time periods, such as automatically generating a
consumption report on the first Monday of each month showing consumption
over the previous month. Automatically generated reports shall be archived on
the server in a common industry format such as Adobe PDF or Microsoft Excel
with copies e-mailed to a user editable list of recipients.
6. The energy reporting tool shall be capable of collecting and displaying data from
the following types of meters:
a. Electricity
b. Gas
c. Chilled Water
d. Hot Water
e. Potable Water
f. Heating and cooling degree days. (May be calculated from sensor data
rather than metered.)
7. The user shall have the option of using Kw (Kwh) or Btu/hr (Btu) as the units for
demand and consumption reports. Multiples of these units (MWH, kBtu, etc.)
shall be used as appropriate. All selected sources shall be automatically
converted to the selected units. The user shall similarly have the option of
entering facility area and occupancy hours and creating reports that are
normalized on an area basis, an annual use basis, or an occupied hour basis.
8. The user shall have the option of entering benchmark data for an individual
facility or a group of facilities.
9. The user shall have the option of displaying any or all of the following data on
any chart, line, or bar graph generated by the energy reporting tool:
a. Low/High/Average value of the metered value being displayed.
b. Heating and/or Cooling Degree Days for the time period(s) being
displayed.
c. The Environmental Index for the facilities and time periods being
displayed.

August 12, 2013
3.11 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS (PRESSURE TESTS)
A. Pressure test ducts after takeoffs and wall penetrations are in place and before applying
exterior insulation. Correct any leaks.
B. Pressure and leak test all ductwork of 3 H20 or higher (pos. or neg.) duct construction
class ductwork at 100% of duct construction class pressure. Pressure test all grease
exhaust ductwork.
C. Note: For supply systems, perform positive pressure test. For return and exhaust systems
on suction side, perform negative pressure test. Duct shall be constructed so there is no
joint or structural failure at the test pressure.
D. Leak testing shall be per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Provide
orifice assembly including straightening vanes, orifice-plate mounted in straight tube
with properly located pressure taps, and U-tube manometer or other device as specified
by SMACNA. Orifice assembly shall be calibrated accurately and shall come with
calibration curve. Leakage classes shall be as previously specified.
E. Submittal
1. Submit leak test report (per SMACNA format) for review approval.
2. Drawings of ductwork tested shall also be submitted with report, indicating
presence of takeoffs, wall penetrations, joints, etc.
A. All controls shall be by Automated Logic and tied into the existing campus system.
B. The contractor shall ensure that original equipment manufacturers (OEM), providing
C. The mechanical contractor shall refer to the Building Controls Systems drawings to
ensure the sequences required by OEM equipment are followed.
D. The OEM controllers shall coordinate with the BCS contractor to provide for the
1. Remote start/stop.
2. Remote set-point adjust.
3. Remote alarming.
4. Remote status.
5. Remote monitoring of all process variables measured by the OEM controller. In

August 12, 2013
3.13 EQUIPMENT START UP
A. Start up the following pieces of equipment in strict accordance with manufacturers

instructions and with manufacturers representative present:
1. Boilers
2. Chiller
3. Cooling towers
4. Pumps
5. Air handlers
6. Fans
B. Complete the following checklist to certify to the Architect that start up of the above
pieces of equipment has successfully been accomplished. Copy multiple checklists as
required. Edit inappropriate items as required.
EQUIPMENT START UP CHECKLIST

Equipment List Date Confirmed Manufacturers General Contractors
Representative Name and Representative Name and
Signature Signature
Boilers
(List Nos. Below)
Chillers
(List Nos. Below)
Pumps
(List Nos. Below)
Air Handlers
(List Nos. Below)
Fans
(List Nos. Below)
END OF SECTION

August
July 12,
31, 2013
2013
SECTION 2308
SECTION 23 080000- COMMISSIONING
- COMMISSIONING
OF OF HVAC
HVAC SYSTEMS
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. ASHRAE Guideline 1-2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning
Process
C. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of the commissioning
process without regard to specific systems, assemblies, and components.
B. Related Sections include the following:
2. Division 23 Mechanical
3. Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security for interaction with fire alarm systems
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning Plan: A document, prepared by CxA, that outlines the organization, schedule,
allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
C. Quality Assurance: A program for the systematic monitoring and evaluation of the various
aspects of a system, assembly, or component to ensure that standards of quality are being met.
This is the responsibility of the CxA.
D. Quality Control: A system for ensuring the maintenance of proper standards in systems,
assemblies, and components. This is the responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Official: State or Local official having jurisdiction over the HVAC&R systems
F. Systems, Assemblies, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean “as-built” systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
A. The CxA shall provide Construction Checklists to the Contractors for execution that will
indicate expected Quality Control features required for a highest-quality installation. The
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 08 00 - 1

August
July12,
31,2013
2013
contractor shall complete the checklists as construction progresses and return them to the CxA
as indicated in Section 019113 Commissioning General Requirements.
B. Checklists for this section will include:
1. All mechanical equipment
2. Testing and Balancing verification
3. Building automation system components
A sample installation checklist is included to show the typical scope and rigor of the process.
3.2 PREREQUISITES TO TESTING
A. Prior to the testing of these systems or assemblies, the Contractor shall certify that:
1. The system or assembly is completely installed, functional, and documented through
checklists.
2. Work performed by other trades, but essential for this system or assembly’s operation, is
complete (e.g., electrical components are wired and power is provided)
3. All contractor-performed start-up procedures and tests are complete and documented.
4. Preliminary trending data provided to verify actual system operation.
5. The system or assembly is ready for the Owner to take beneficial use.
3.3 SYSTEM OR ASSEMBLY TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. The CxA will provide Functional Performance Test procedures to the Contractor for execution
for the following specific systems, assemblies, and components:
4. All mechanical equipment
5. Building automation system
6. Testing and Balancing verification
7. Direct Digital Controls and system interlocks
B. Acceptance criteria and test details will be in accordance with the related sections including the
following:
2. Division 23 Mechanical
3. Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security.
C. A sample functional performance test is included to show the typical scope and rigor of the
process.
3.4 TEST REPORTS
A. Provide copies of all reports required in the listed reference sections (see Section 1.2
SUMMARY above for the sections) for review.
3.5 SAMPLE FORMS

August
July12,
31, 2013
2013
Sample Installation Checklist

Reference Specification:15500
Reference Drawing: ________________
Area or System Served: ________________________
Model Verification First Floor

Monitor Level
Specified Submitted Installed
Construction Standards Schedule 40 Steel, or Type L Copper
Installation Checks
ID Description Pass/fail Comments
Verify that the piping materials conform to the specified materials listed is section 15500:
1
A. Hot water Supply and Return Piping is copper or steel
Route all piping in an orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Present a
2 neat and workmanlike appearance. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
(15010-3.4 & 15050-3.1)
Provide temporary caps or covers for all open ends of piping and equipment during
3
construction to keep foreign material out of system. (15050-1.4)
Verify that piping hangers have been installed as follows: (15500-2.5.K)
4 A. Vertical pipe risers are supported at every floor.
B. Hanger Spacing shall be per the tables listed in the specifications.
Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Low point drain valves on mains shall
5
be 1” ball valves with hose end and cap. (15500-3.2.B.4)
Verify that valves are installed with actuators upright or horizontal and that operator
6
extensions have been provided to accommodate insulation. Provide (15110-3.3 & 15500-2.2)
Verify that Di-electric fittings are provided and installed at connections between all
7 dissimilar materials.
(15050-2.3)
Sleeve piping passing through partitions, walls, and floors. Size sleeves large enough to
8 accommodate expansion and contraction and allow for continuous insulation and vapor
barrier. (15050) (15250-3.2)
Verify that piping expansion joint alignment guides and anchors are provided where
9
required. (15500-2.4/5)
Verify that all piping and associated fittings are insulated. Pipe exposed in mechanical
10
rooms or in finished spaces less than 10’-0” A.F.F. shall be finished with PVC jackets.
Verify that all valves and piping have been tagged and/or identified with directional arrows
11
and service labels.(15500)
Verify that isolation valves have been installed as follows: (15500-2.2)
12 A. Ball valves installed for piping 2-1/2” and smaller.
B. Butterfly valves installed for piping 3” and larger.
13 Verify that piping has been identified for system and direction of flow. (15050-3.4)
14 Verify that valve tags have been provided as scheduled. (15050-3.4)
Approvals (only one required)

Name (printed neatly) Signature Date
Contractor/Manuf. Rep.
Engineer
Construction Administrator
Commissioning Agent

August
July 12,
31, 2013
2013
Sample Functional Performance Test

Heat Recovery Rooftop Unit – ERV-2
1. Participants
Name/Representing Participation (Testing, Witness, etc)
/
/
/
Party filling out this form Date of test
2. Prerequisite Checklist
a. A completed and approved balancing report has been provided.
b. An as-built version of the controls submittal has been provided.
c. The controls contractor has certified that their internal commissioning is complete and the project is ready for third-
party verification. CC initials: ________. Date: ________.
d. The general contractor has certified that the construction is substantially complete and ready for third-party
verification. GC initials: ________. Date: ________.
e. Record all values for setpoints, control parameters, limits, delays, lockouts,
schedules, etc., that have been changed to accommodate testing:
Returned to Returned to
Pre-Test Pre-Test
Parameter Pre-Test Parameter Pre-Test
Values Values
Values Values
Occupied space Unoccupied space
temperature heating temperature heating
setpoint setpoint
Occupied space Unoccupied space
temperature cooling temperature cooling
setpoint setpoint
Frost Control Occupied low space
temperature alarm temperature alarm
setpoint setpoint
Occupied/Unoccupied
Occupancy Schedule
mode
Occupied Space
Low Limit Switch SP
Humidity Setpoint
3. Sensor Calibration Checks. The sensors listed below are to be checked for calibration and adequate location.
Location BAS Measured Pass Location BAS Measured Pass

Sensor Sensor
OK1 Value Value Y/N OK1 Value Value Y/N
Outside air WDAT
Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
temperature (CLT) - avg
Space
Y/N Y/N DAT - avg. Y/N Y/N
temperature
RAT - avg. Y/N Discharge Y/N
Y/N Y/N
Air Humidity
1
Sensor location is appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation.
Comments:

August
July12,
31,2013
2013
4. Device Calibration Checks. The actuators or devices listed below are to be checked for proper operation and/or
calibration.
Site Pass
Device or Actuator Procedure / State BAS Value
Observation Y/N
1. Observe OA damper modulating
Outside air damper / actuator Y/N
in unison with RA and EA damper.
1. Observe EA damper modulating
Exhaust air damper / actuator Y/N
in unison with RA and OA damper.
Stop Y/N
Exhaust air fan status
Start Y/N
1. Observe during outside air

damper testing. Return air damper
Return air damper / actuator Y/N
should operate inversely with the
outside air damper.
1. Stop /Status Y/N
Supply air fan and status
2. Start /Status Y/N
Stop Y/N
Heat Recovery Wheel
Start Y/N
Fail Position
H/C Valve 50 % Open Y/N
100 % Open
Low Limit Switch Trip Y/N
5. Notes

August
July12,
31,2013
2013
6. Functional Testing Record

Seq. Test Procedure Pass
Mode ID Expected Response Notes
ID (including special conditions) Y/N
1. Command the unit to the unoccupied 1. The outside air dampers will be closed.
mode through the BAS. The return air damper will be open
100%. Observe fail position of DTW
(HCV) valve. The heating unit will
2. When the unit is in the unoccupied cycle to the unoccupied set point of
mode command the unoccupied 60deg (adj). The supply air fan will be
space temperature heating setpoint off. This is the “shutdown” mode for
to 5 F above the current average the unit.
space temperature.
UNOCCU 2. The outside air dampers will remain
PIED 3. When the unit is in the unoccupied closed. The return air damper will
MODE mode command the unoccupied remain open. The supply air fan will be
1 Y/N
(Vacation space temperature heating setpoint on. The heating module will start.
Periods to 5 F below the current average
Only) space temperature. 3. The heating module will be de-
energized. The supply air fan will stop.
Note: This may not be set up, as no The unit will return to shutdown mode.
sequence was provided.
1. The supply air fan will start. The

outside, return and exhaust air dampers
will modulate to maintain a minimum
1. Command the unit to occupied discharge air temperature setpoint of
mode. 53 F at sensor CLT. Heat wheel speed
will control at this setpoint.
OCCUPIE
2. When the unit is in the occupied 2. The supply air fan will remain on line.
D MODE
mode adjust the space temperature The outside, return and exhaust air
HEATING
3 heating setpoint to 5 F above the dampers will continue modulating. The Y/N
(SYSTEM
current space temperature. DTW (HCV) will modulate to heat the
INDEXED
TO HEAT) space until the setpoint is satisfied.
Note: If system is not indexed to heating Discharge air temperature is limited to
mode DTW (HCV) valve will remain 55 to 80 Deg F.
closed.

August
July 12,
31, 2013
2013

1. Note: May not apply not specified 1. The supply air fan will remain on. The
in sequence of operation. outside, return and exhaust air dampers
will modulate to provide more outside
2. When the unit is in the occupied air, in a direct action control algorithm,
mode override the outside air to maintain the mixed air temperature
temperature to 48 F. Command the setpoint of 55 degrees. If the cooling
space temperature occupied cooling setpoint is not met then the DWT
setpoint to 5 F above the current (HCV) valve will modulate open to met
OCCUPIE space temperature and the occupied space setpoint.
D MODE heating setpoint to 5 F below the
ECONOM current space temperature. 2. The supply air fan will remain on. The
IZER Command the mixed air temperature outside, return and relief air dampers
4 will modulate to provide less outside Y/N
(COOLIN setpoint to 5 F below the current
G MODE mixed air temperature. Command air, in a direct action control algorithm,
INDEXED the mixed air temperature setpoint to to maintain the mixed air temperature
) 5 F above the current mixed air setpoint.
temperature.
3. Command the mixed air temperature

setpoint to 5 F above the current
mixed air temperature.
1. The heat recovery wheel is rotating with

HEAT the exhaust air passing thru the wheel and
5 RECOVE 1. Normal operation the OA passing thru the wheel to warm air or Y/N
RY MODE cool air. No air is bypassing wheel
OCCUPIE 1. DTW (HCV) will modulate and electric

D heater will stage on and off to maintain space
1. With system indexed to cooling and
DEHUMI setpoint. This is the only function of the
the system is in occupied mode
DIFICATI electric heater.
lower space humidity setpoint (62%)
6. ON Y/N
10% lower.
(COOLIN 2. DTW valve will return to normal control
G MODE and the electric heater will stage off.
2. Return to normal.
INDEXED
ONLY)
1. With the system in occupied mode, 1. The heat wheel increase speed to shed
OCCUPIE lower space temperature setpoint (75) as return air heat and the DWT (HCV) valve
D sensed by TR, 5 Deg F. lower than will modulate open to maintain new space
COOLING current space temperature. setpoint. DAT shall never drop below 55
7. (COOLIN Deg. F. Allow time for control to stabilize. Y/N
G MODE 2. Return to normal.
INDEXED
)

August
July 12,
31, 2013
2013

1. With the unit running, raise the frost 1. Observe heat wheel slow to raise exhaust
control setpoint as sensed at TF, 5 Deg F air temperature to high setpoint.
higher than current exhaust air
FROST temperature. 2. Observe low exhaust air alarm at BAS.
8. CONTRO Y/N
L 2. Reset alarm time delay for exhaust air
temperature to 2 minutes.
3. Return all to normal.
FREEZE
1. With the unit running in the occupied 1. The unit will shut down, and all dampers
STAT
mode, trip the low limit thermostat will go to their fail state, and DTW (HCV)
ALARM
9. located upstream of the HC coil. valve will fail open to the coil. The BAS Y/N
AND
2. Manually reset the freeze alarm at the will indicate a freeze alarm.
SHUTDO
BAS. 2. The unit will start in occupied mode.
WN
1. With the unit operating, decrease the

DIRTY dirty filter alarm delay time to 2 minutes,
AIR and then gently pump up the high side of
10 1. Check that the BAS alarms. Y/N
FILTER the filter DP.
ALARM
2. Return to normal.
SUPPLY
AIR FAN
1. With the unit running in the occupied 1. The unit will go to its shutdown mode.
ALARM
8 mode, stop the supply air fan by turning it The BAS will indicate a supply air fan status Y/N
AND
off at its starter. alarm.
SHUTDO
WN
EXHAUS
1. With the unit running in the occupied 1. The unit will go to its shutdown mode.
T FAN
9 mode, stop the exhaust fan by turning it The BAS will indicate an exhaust fan status Y/N
SHUTDO
off at its starter. alarm.
WN
Set the following points for 15 minute
trend samples and review in 48 hours:
1. Space temperature.
11 TRENDS 2. 4. Mixed air temperature. Trend Data Y/N
5. Outside air temperature.
6. Mixed air damper position
7. Room Humidity
8. Supply Air Temperature
-- END OF TEST --
END OF SECTION 23 08 00

August 12, 2013
SECTION 23 09 00
BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM (BCS)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ..........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 SUMMARY ..........................................................................................................................................1

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER ........................................................................................................1
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK..................................................................................................................1
1.4 COORDINATED WORK .....................................................................................................................3
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE.....................................................................................................................3
1.6 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................................................4
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .......................................................................................5
1.8 AGENCY APPROVALS ......................................................................................................................5
1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................................6
1.10 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................6
1.11 AS-BUILTS...........................................................................................................................................6
1.12 INSPECTION........................................................................................................................................6
1.13 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS .................................................................6
1.14 TEST AND START-UP & ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ..............................................................7
1.15 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ...............................................................................................................7
1.16 TRAINING............................................................................................................................................8
1.17 SYSTEM STARTUP.............................................................................................................................8
1.18 TESTING ..............................................................................................................................................8
1.19 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................8
1.20 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ..........................................................................................................9
1.21 DESCRIPTION OF WORK..................................................................................................................9
1.22 DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................................9
1.23 SOFTWARE .......................................................................................................................................10
1.24 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................10
1.25 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP ...............................................................................................................10
1.26 UPGRADES ........................................................................................................................................11
1.27 FIELD DEVICES................................................................................................................................11
1.28 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ..............................................................................................11
1.29 COMPLIANCE ...................................................................................................................................11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................................................11
2.1 BCS – DDC/EMS SYSTEM ...............................................................................................................11

2.2 BCS – DDC/EMS HARDWARE........................................................................................................14
2.3 BCS SOFTWARE ...............................................................................................................................26
2.4 BCS - ELECTRONIC SYSTEM.........................................................................................................36
2.5 FIELD DEVICES................................................................................................................................37
2.6 WIRING AND CABLING..................................................................................................................47
2.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION ........................................................................................................48
PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................................................48
BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM 23 09 00 - i

d:\ddriveold_folders\a1202-choate\a1202-specifications\a1202-cd specifications\a1202-100% cd specifications\230900 building control system (bcs)-8-12-13.doc
August 12, 2013
3.1 OEM CONTROLLER INTEGRATION.............................................................................................48

3.2 PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................................................49
3.3 EQUIPMENT STARTUP ...................................................................................................................50
3.4 BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM ...................................................................................................50
3.5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION..........................................................................................................55
3.6 DATABASE CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................56
3.7 COLOR GRAPHIC SLIDES ..............................................................................................................56
3.8 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES .........................................................................56
3.9 ENCLOSURES ...................................................................................................................................57
3.10 LOCATION.........................................................................................................................................57
3.11 IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................................................................58
3.12 CLEANUP...........................................................................................................................................58
3.13 POWER WIRING ...............................................................................................................................58
3.14 MEDIA CONVERSION .....................................................................................................................59
BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM 23 09 00 - ii

August 12, 2013
SECTION 23 09 00
BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM (BCS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work of this section is governed by the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
Sections in Division 1 and section 20 05 00 of the Project Manual.
B. Perform work and provide materials and equipment as shown on the drawings and as specified
or indicated in this section of the specifications. Completely coordinate work of this section
with work of other trades and provide complete and fully functional systems installation.
C. Commissioning

specified in Section 01 91 13. The work includes producing start up documentation
including pre-functional checklists, operation and maintenance documentation and
the training required for the systems.
a. In addition to the startup of equipment and systems, include the time required
to be on site to perform functional testing of the equipment and systems
being commissioned as specified in the Commissioning Specification in
Section 01 91 13.
D. Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 20 05 00 – Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 23 06 00 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
3. Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
4. Section 26 10 00 – Electrical: Power and Alarm Wiring.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER
A. Automatic Logic (ALC) shall be the sole provider to match the existing CRH campus BAS.
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation system including all
necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the
control sequences of operation as called for in this specification and as shown on the drawings.
All components of the system – workstations, application controllers, unitary controllers, etc.
shall communicate using the BACnet protocol, as defined by ASHRAE Standard 135-2001.
No gateways shall be used for communication to controllers furnished under this section. At a
minimum, provide controls for the following:
BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM 23 09 00 - 1

August 12, 2013
1. Air Handling Units
2. Central Plant Equipment
3. Air Volume Control Devices
4. Fire Alarm Systems
5. Monitoring, alarming and reset control of original equipment manufacturers package

controllers such as boilers, chillers, etc.
6. Terminal Unit Controls.
7. Lighting Control Systems.
8. Power wiring for control equipment including panels, dampers, filters, actuators and
other control equipment specified under ATC shall be by this Section. Wire to
closest emergency (when available) normal electrical branch circuit panel for final
connection to 20A-1P circuit breaker by Section 26 10 00.
9. Exhaust and supply fans.
B. The work included under this section of the specifications and drawings includes the complete
installation of a building controls system utilizing digital controllers.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building control system including all
necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the
control sequences of operation as called for in the documents. All required operation
parameters, setpoints, schedules, and software shall be submitted to the Owner ready for use.
D. The Drawings and Specifications are not intended to show all details. The Contractor shall
secure satisfactory information before submitting the proposal and include in the proposal a
sum sufficient to cover all items of labor and material required for the complete installation of
the devices and system described.
E. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall comply with all codes, laws
and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing
codes, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
F. The Contractor, as part of the bid proposal, shall indicate the manufacturer of the controllers
being proposed for this project and the model numbers. This information shall be indicated on
the Bid Form.
G. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses.
H. The Contractor shall furnish all control valves and control dampers (except valves and
dampers inside air handling units where only actuators may be required if not provided by
equipment manufacturer) indicated on control drawings. Installation shall be by Section 23 06
00, supervised by this section contractor.

August 12, 2013
I. The Contractor shall furnish and install all actuators including necessary linkages, wiring and
conduit.
J. The Contractor shall provide all necessary field control and interlock wiring including
auxiliary contacts, push buttons, switches and indicating lamps necessary. Division 26 shall
provide circuit breakers in electric panels. This contractor shall provide wiring and conduit
from the circuit breakers to the control panels. Power provided by Division 26 will be 120
Volts. This contractor shall provide transformers to reduce the voltage if required by this
contractor's equipment. This Contractor shall coordinate with the Division 26 Contractor for
locations of panels.
K. The Contractor shall provide all sensors, transducers and miscellaneous equipment to provide
the specified control sequences. The terminal volume box controllers provided by this
Contractor shall be mounted on the individual boxes at the terminal volume box
manufacturer's factory.
L. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of system in coordination with
the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner’s representative.
1.4 COORDINATED WORK
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with others performing work on this project as necessary to
achieve a complete and neat installation. Consult the drawings and specifications of all trades
to determine the nature and extent of others' work.
B. It will be the duty of the Contractor to work in cooperation with the Owner’s Representative,
and with other Contractors and Employees, rendering assistance and arranging his work so
that the entire project will be delivered in the best possible condition and in the shortest time.
C. The Contractor and Manufacturers supplying equipment with packaged controls (boilers,
computer room units, chillers, etc.) shall coordinate with each other to develop program code
to interface all packaged controllers to the BCS to perform all monitoring, alarming and/or
control required by the drawings and specifications. It shall be incumbent upon this
Contractor to ensure such coordination occurs.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the specified style

of control systems equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in the specified style of control
systems installations for not less than 5 years.
C. Codes and Standards (Latest Editions):
1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products, which have been tested, listed and
labeled by (UL) and comply with NEMA standards.

August 12, 2013
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and

devices for electric control systems.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control
sequences.
4. NFPA 92A “Smoke Control Systems” where applicable to controls and control
systems.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished,
indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,
finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following
information:
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing all components and equipment

including narrative description of the sequence.
2. Label each control device with setting and adjustable range of control.
3. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of

wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
4. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments and

labeling.
5. Database list showing point tag, point description type, processor address, module
address, termination point and channel number, signal range, power source and
remarks.
6. SAMA type functional logic diagrams showing analog loop and digital logic. These
drawings shall show complete configuration details including I/O address, register
values, function generator values, block numbers, connection points, ranges and all
necessary configuration specifications.
7. External wiring termination drawings.
8. Physical arrangement drawings showing outline dimensions and internal

arrangement of equipment.
9. Power distribution and grounding drawings.
10. System cabling diagram for all system interconnecting cables.
11. Configuration listing and diskettes.

August 12, 2013
12. Control ladder diagrams.
13. List of process variables, which will be monitored from the OEM controllers.
14. Bill of components.
15. Valve and damper schedules showing sizes, capacities, flow coefficient, pressure
drop, configuration and location.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of
Division 1.
D. All shop drawings shall be prepared on computer aided drafting software or equivalent.
Drawing sheet size shall be 11" x 17".
E. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and
workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of
each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated
controller.
F. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all products used in the project. In
addition, submittals shall contain sequences of operation, program listings, point lists, and a
complete description of the graphics, reports, alarms and configuration to be furnished with
the workstation software. Information shall be bound.
G. Prior to ordering or fabricating equipment, submit shop drawings in accordance with Section
20 05 00 “Basic Mechanical and Electrical”.
H. Control logic diagrams shall be in ladder logic format.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain
cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and
to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and
protected from weather.
1.8 AGENCY APPROVALS
A. All controllers shall be UL approved as an Energy Management System (UL 916).
B. All electrical components shall be UL listed or labeled.
C. All wiring shall conform to the National Electric Code.
D. Equipment, piping and wiring installed in conditioned air streams, spaces or plenums shall
comply with NFPA 90A flame/smoke/fuel contributing rating of 25/50/0.

August 12, 2013
E. Comply with FCC rules Part 15 regarding Class A radiation from computing devices and low
power communication equipment operating in commercial environments.
F. Comply with FCC rules, Part 68 for telephone modems and data sets.
1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall provide operating and maintenance manuals consisting of, at a minimum,
component data sheets, maintenance and calibration procedures, software print-outs, code
documentation and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty against defects in materials or workmanship in the
BCS as described in this specification. Term of warranty is as follows (after system start-up
has been completed and accepted by the Owner):
1. Control equipment 36 Months
2. Control sensors 36 Months
3. All else 12 Months
B. Updates to the manufacturer’s software shall be provided at no charge during the warranty
period.
1.11 AS-BUILTS
A. Within 90 days following project completion and testing, the Contractor shall submit as-built
drawings reflecting the exact installation of the system. The as-built documentation shall also
include a copy of all application software both in written form and on DVD.
1.12 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
1.13 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
roughing-in drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical
products complying with requirements of applicable Division-16 sections of these
specifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.
B. Control Wiring: The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit
and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices.

August 12, 2013
C. Wiring System: Install complete control wiring system for control systems. Following
manufacturer's recommendations for use of shielded cable for field signal wiring, wire and
cable separation criteria by type of point and signal level, power supply and grounding. Wire
and cable shall be run in EMT conduit except in control rooms where wireway may be used
and outdoors where rigid steel conduit shall be used. Final connection to devices shall be made
in flexible steel sealed conduit. The length of flexible sealed steel conduit shall not exceed 3
feet. Provide multi-conductor multi-pair instrumentation cable (bundle) in place of single pair
cable where number of conductors (pairs) can be run along common path. Do not run conduit
over equipment removal areas or under the path of movable cranes or monorails. Coordinate
conduit runs with other contractors on coordination drawings before installation. Obtain
approval for conduit drawings prior to installation. Fasten flexible conductors bridging
cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support
conductors and cable neatly. Single pair instrumentation cable shall be 300 volt insulation No.
16 AWG shielded and twisted with half-lap aluminum mylar wrap with copper drain wire with
flame retardant jacket. Multi-pair instrumentation cable shall of the same construction as
single pair except that the minimum wire size shall be No. 20 AWG.
D. Number code conductors and pneumatic tubing with permanent wire markers and labeling
system for future identification and servicing of control system.
E. Reset Limit Controls: Install manual-reset limit controls to be independent of power

controllers; automatic duct heater resets may, at Contractor's option, be installed in interlock
circuit of power controllers.
F. Unit Mounted Equipment: Where control devices provided by this Contractor are indicated to
be unit-mounted, ship relays, switches, valves, dampers, and damper motors to unit
manufacturer for mounting and wiring at factory. Coordinate all shipping with the unit
manufacturers.
1.14 TEST AND START-UP & ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust control systems in presence of manufacturer's authorized
representative and the Owner’s Representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Field Testing and Start-up: The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified service
representative to check system installation and supervise the system power up and initial
check-out. All travel and living expenses shall be included in the bid.
C. The Contractor shall include 30 days of on-site start-up engineering service in his bid. All
travel and living expenses shall be included in the bid.
1.15 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Owner's Instructions: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one

40-hour sessions to instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of the
Distributed Control Systems. Contractor shall record the entire instruction period on DVD
and submit to the Owner.

August 12, 2013
1. Schedule instruction with the Owner’s Representative, provide at least 14-day notice
to the Owner’s Representative of training date.
1.16 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall include in his proposal 40 hours of on-site operator training.
B. Training shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Instruction in programming.
2. Instructions in the language programming.
C. Provide for the training sessions, text books, workbooks and similar materials for personnel,
which shall be retained by those personnel upon completion of training. Provide an extra
clean copy of the material to be filed with the O&M manuals.
1.17 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. After all field connections have been made and control power is available to each control
panel, the Owner’s Representative shall be notified and the control system shall be enabled by
the BCS Contractor. Any software loading shall be done at this time and the start-up of the
mechanical or electrical system shall commence.
1.18 TESTING
A. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In
addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BCS will be tested against
the appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the system
test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to
the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
B. The BCS Contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and
systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and all air handling systems, in the presence of
the equipment manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable, and the Owner’s representatives.
C. The BCS Contractor shall provide all manpower and engineering services required to assist the
HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing, adjusting and balancing all systems in
the building. The BCS Contractor shall have a trained technician available on request during
the balancing of the systems. The BCS Contractor shall coordinate all requirements to provide
a complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor and materials
in his contract.
1.19 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. All Controllers and Building Controls System shall be manufactured by the Controls System
Manufacturer. All manufacturers shall meet all of the requirements of this specification.

August 12, 2013
B. The equipment and software proposed by the supplier shall be currently in manufacture. No
custom products shall be allowed. The Manufacturer shall support all products for a minimum
of 5 years, including spare parts, board repairs and software revisions.
C. Subject to compliance with requirements, the Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of
experience in production of control systems of the type specified for commercial applications
and shall be Automated Logic.
D. Correct the building into the existing Automated Logic network.
1.20 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
A. All controllers shall be capable of operating in an environment of 0 to 120 degrees F and 10 -

95% relative humidity (non-condensing).
A. The Building controls system shall consist of peer to peer network controllers and
workstations on a high speed backbone (Ethernet), supporting peer to peer distributed
controllers on a field bus.
B. In addition to the specified hardware, software and field devices, the contractor shall furnish
all labor to design, program and install the BCS.
C. The scope of work includes testing, startup training and warranty work specified.
D. The Building Controls System (BCS) shall be designed in strict accordance with ASHRAE’s
BACnet standard, 135-2001 to provide interoperability between different building subsystems.
The system shall also provide a graphical, web-based operator interface that allows for instant
access to any system through a standard browser. The system shall use BACnet network types
and protocols exclusively. Non-BACnet based systems are not acceptable. The contractor
must provide PC-based programming workstations, operator workstations and microcomputer
controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future
expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions. Contractor must
provide manufacturer’s Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for
workstation software and every controller model that is installed.
1.22 DEFINITIONS
A. The term "implement" means to develop and/or utilize a software and/or hardware component
to meet the system criteria or system verification as part of the work covered in this section.
B. The term "multi-vendor integration" when referenced herein shall imply the hardware
equipment and software programs needed for communications to the various mechanical
and/or electrical systems contained in the scope of work.
C. BCS: The environmental monitoring and control system including lighting, inclusive of all
appurtenances required for the control and monitoring of the mechanical, electrical, or other

August 12, 2013
systems unless specifically exempted within this specification. This definition includes both
hardware devices and software components that are integrated to form a working system.
D. The term "BCS Contractor" is the successful offerer of the building controls system as
specified in Section 23 09 00.
E. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
F. Stand-Alone System: Performs all control functions independently without direction from a
central unit.
G. Hardware: The physical components in the BCS system.
H. Point: A single monitoring or control device connected to the BCS.
I. Control Wiring: All wiring, 120 VAC line voltage or lower other than power wiring, required
for the proper operation of the mechanical system and the BCS. This includes applications
where line voltage also serves as a control circuit such as a line voltage thermostat or involves
interlocking with a damper.
J. Power Wiring: All line voltage wiring to the mechanical and BCS equipment that is required
for proper operation of the equipment. Typically, this wiring will support voltage at or above
120 VAC and is connected to the equipment for the purpose of providing motive power.
K. Ethernet: Broadcast networking system that carries digital data packets to local nodes. It is a
(10, 100) Mbps base-band LAN.
1.23 SOFTWARE
A. Controller software refers to the capabilities of the firmware resident in each Level 1 or Level
2 controller. As such it describes the overall operating capabilities, communications, and
application level function of the particular controller. All controller level firmware is to be
resident in ROM, and must be socketable to allow for future upgrades.
B. Workstation software encompasses the operating system, database and application software
for use on the personal computer workstations. This software may be provided on diskettes,
tapes or CD ROMs. It is sold as a software license and is intended to be upgraded over time as
new features become available.
C. Upgrade the existing system to the latest software version if available at the time of
installation.
1.24 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
A. All operator interface hardware including workstations and laptop computer shall be IBM
compatible.
1.25 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP

August 12, 2013
A. All software, including the energy management system, shall become the property of the
Owner. The Owner shall have rights to use and/or alter any part of the system without
restriction.
B. Ownership of the software shall not allow infringement upon the supplier's copyrights.
1.26 UPGRADES
A. Provide software upgrades during the warranty period as the manufacturer's product is
improved at no cost to the Owner. Furnish confirmation letter to the Owner before system
acceptance indicating that the latest software versions are installed as of turn-over date and at
the end of the warranty period that all upgrades have been provided.
1.27 FIELD DEVICES
A. Included with field devices are all gauges, sensors, transmitters, transducers, wells, relays,
switches and power supplies necessary for the operation of the BCS System.
B. All field devices shall include the associated tubing, wiring, conduit, mounting, and
enclosures.
C. Also included are sensors, control valves, control dampers, smoke dampers, valve actuators,
damper actuators, relays, and conventional controls necessary for a completely functioning
system in accordance with the sequences of operation.
1.28 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Installation of the building controls system shall be performed by the Contractor or a

subcontractor. However, all installation shall be under the personal supervision of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall certify all work as proper and complete and shall reflect
actual installation on the project record documentation. Under no circumstances shall the
design, scheduling, coordination, wiring terminations, programming, point calibration and
check-out, training, and warranty requirements for the project be delegated to a subcontractor.
1.29 COMPLIANCE
A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and Division 26,
and shall comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Should any discrepancy be found between wiring specifications in Article 23 09 00 and

Division 26, the more stringent requirement shall prevail.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BCS – DDC/EMS SYSTEM
A. System Overview

August 12, 2013
1. The Building Controls System (BCS) shall consist of microcomputer controllers of

modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future
expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions.
2. There shall be two levels of controllers. Level 1 controllers shall contain a high
speed LAN communication bus capable of sharing data among personal computer
work stations, other Level 1 controllers, and a central file server. Level 1 controllers
shall also contain a communication bus to Level 2 controllers, referred to throughout
the specification as the field bus. Level 1 controllers are primarily central plant
controllers and network integrators. Level 2 controllers are dedicated DDC
controllers for standalone operation of HVAC equipment, lighting and plumbing
equipment. These controllers shall communicate to either a work station on the high
speed LAN via a level 1 controller or a portable laptop computer for the purposes of
monitoring and programming.
B. Level 1 Controller Description
1. A minimum of two (2) Level 1 controllers shall provide overall system

coordination, accept control programs, perform automated DDC and energy
management functions, control peripheral devices and perform all necessary
mathematical functions. The controller shall be a microcomputer of modular
design. The word size shall be 16 bits or larger, with a memory cycle time of less
than 1 microsecond. Level 1 controllers shall share information with and from the
entire network of Level 1 and Level 2 controllers for full global control. Level 1
controllers shall permit multi-user operation from work stations and laptop
computers connected either locally or over the Level 1 network.
C. Level 2 Controller Description
1. Level 2 controllers shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC, lighting

equipment, and plumbing equipment. Each unit shall have its own internal RAM
memory and shall continue to operate all local control functions in the event of a
failure to any Level 1 controller. In addition, it shall be able to share information
with and from the entire network for full global control.
D. Work Station Description
1. A host computer shall be the existing machine. The building automation software
shall be capable of communication to all Level 1 and Level 2 controllers, feature
high-resolution color graphics, alarming, reporting, and be user configurable for all
data collection and data presentation functions. The Level 1 network shall be
capable of supporting at least 16 work stations. On systems that are file server
based, each work station shall reference a central file server for its database
inquiries. On systems that are not file server based the system shall be capable of
storing system trend data, which shall be accessible from other workstations on the
network.
E. Web Server Workstation

August 12, 2013
1. The BAS Contractor shall furnish licenses for (20) concurrent users to the BAS
system. Web-based users shall have access to all system points and graphics, shall
be able to receive and acknowledge alarms, and shall be able to control setpoints
and other parameters. A central web server shall be provided to manage the web-
based users. The web-based interface must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device
profile.
F. System Architecture
1. General: The network architecture shall consist of two levels. The top level shall be
a high speed LAN designed to support network controllers, central plant controllers,
work stations and a file server and shall operate on the Ethernet protocol. The
second level shall be a field bus to support a family of dedicated local controllers for
control of HVAC equipment, lighting, and plumbing equipment. The second level
bus shall communicate bi-directionally with the high speed LAN through Level 1
controllers for transmission of global data.
2. High Speed LAN: This local area network shall operate at a minimum speed of 100
Mbps. The high speed LAN shall provide transfer of point data, alarms and file
activity among Level 1 controllers, work stations and the file server. The high speed
LAN shall support a minimum of 50 nodes consisting of Level 1 controllers or work
stations.
3. Any data from a Level 2 controller shall also be transmitted onto this LAN through
a Level 1 controller. The high speed LAN shall support multi-user communications
and multi-session activity. That is, all global data sharing shall occur
simultaneously with the transmission of alarm data or user activity.
4. Field Bus: The level 2 bus, or field bus, shall support local control units of modular
size for operation of the building's HVAC, lighting and plumbing control systems.
The field bus shall operate at a minimum speed of76.8 kbps, with a minimum length
of 4000 feet or 32 nodes before requiring a network repeater.
5. Manufacturers with baud rates of less than 76.8 kbps shall be accepted, but shall be
limited to 32 Level 2 controllers to insure adequate global data and alarm response
times. The minimum acceptable baud rate shall be 9,600.
6. Network Transparency: All points contained on Level 1 and Level 2 controllers

shall be considered global points. Any program in any controller on the network
shall be able to reference any point in any controller regardless of its location on the
network.
7. Work Station Communications: The BAS shall be connected directly to the high
speed LAN. Remote workstations shall be able to communicate to any Level 1
controller, Level 2 controller, additional work stations or the file server. Remote
workstations shall also be able to communicate via modems to remote controllers.
Telephone communications shall operate simultaneously with communication to any
controllers connected on the high speed LAN.

August 12, 2013
8. Laptop Communications: A laptop computer service tool shall communicate with

either Level 1 or Level 2 controllers. Through the service tool, operators shall be
able to view points and change parameters on any Level 1 or Level 2 controller on
the network.
9. Dial-Up Communications: It shall be possible to access the network remotely

through a standard dial-up modem. This modem shall permit direct access to the
high speed LAN via a Level 1 controller. It shall be possible to configure multiple
modems in Level 1 controllers to enable multi-user communications when more
than one telephone line is available. Critical alarms shall be setup by the contractor
and approved by the Owners Representative to automatically dial out to a remote
operator workstation.
10. Third Party Communications: The network shall be capable of communicating with
third party controllers for the system. Two way communications shall be possible
with the original equipment manufacturers controllers.
G. Support for Open Systems Protocols
1. All hardware and software included under this section shall conform to BACnet
standard 135-2001, to promote interoperability between building subsystems.
Additionally, the BAS design must include solutions for the integration of the
following “open systems” protocols: LonTalkTM, Modbus and digital data
communication to third party microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels
and variable frequency drives (VFDs).
2.2 BCS – DDC/EMS HARDWARE
A. Level 1 Controllers - General:
1. Level 1 controllers shall perform automated control of HVAC and plumbing

equipment and lighting, control peripheral devices, and coordinate communications
to other Level 1 and Level 2 controllers in the network.
2. The Level 1 controller shall contain control programs in a combination of EEPROM

and battery backed-up RAM. Each Level 1 controller shall have the intelligence to
perform all building control strategies, without communication to other controllers,
for functions not requiring data from other controllers.
3. Level 1 controllers shall support multi-user communications from workstations

and/or locally connected terminals or laptop service tools.
4. Level 1 controllers shall synchronize their resident real time clocks to each
controller on the high speed LAN. Additionally, the Level 1 controller shall
synchronize the clocks in the Level 2 controllers on its field bus.
5. Input
a. The input section of Level 1 controllers shall provide "universal" inputs

capable of accepting information on any point in the form of a temperature,

August 12, 2013
voltage ampere, digital, or pulse counter with only a programming command

required for differentiation between the input type. No hardware changes
shall be required.
b. All inputs shall withstand continuous shorting to 120 VAC, 60 Hz power

referenced to ground without failure. All inputs shall further be protected to
+ or - 1500 volts for 50 microsecond transients. All inputs shall have an
accuracy of at least + or - 15 mV, and a resolution of 4.8 mV from 0 to 120
degrees F.
c. Analog Inputs - The Analog Input (AI) function shall monitor each analog
input, perform A/D conversion, and hold the digital value in a buffer for
interrogation. The A/D conversion shall have a minimum resolution of 12
bits. Input ranges shall be within 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA.
d. Digital Inputs - the Digital Input (DI) function shall accept dry contact
closures and voltage level transitions. A voltage level below 1 volt shall be
read as ON (closed), a voltage level above 3 volts shall be read as OFF
(open).
e. Pulse Accumulator Inputs - the pulse accumulator input function shall have
the same characteristics as the DI, except that, in addition a buffer shall be
included to totalize pulses between interrogations. Each input shall accept
pulses at a minimum of 5 per second.
f. Temperature Inputs - temperature inputs originating from a thermistor or

RTD shall be monitored and buffered as an AI, and provide automatic
conversion to degrees F or C without any additional signal conditioning.
g. Input Wiring - all inputs shall be two wire devices and shall not require
shielded wire for accurate operation.
6. Output
a. Output types shall include digital, universal and tri-state. Outputs shall be
available with easily accessible built-in hand-off-auto (HOA) switches for
local overrides. DIP switches are not acceptable. Analog output override
switches shall be provided with potentiometers to simulate the output range.
b. Digital Output - the Digital Output (DO) function shall provide contact
closure for momentary (Pulse Width Modulation) and maintained operation
of field devices. Output pulse width shall be selectable between 0.1 and
3200 seconds with a minimum resolution of 0.1 seconds. Isolation and
protection against voltage surges up to 180 VAC peak shall be provided.
Contact rating shall be a minimum of 1 amp at 24 VAC. Each digital output
shall be equipped with an HOA switch to manually obtain either output state.
Manual overrides shall be reported to the controller at each update. An LED
shall be provided to indicate the state of each digital output.

August 12, 2013
c. Universal Output - a Universal Output shall provide 0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA

control signal (with a maximum resolution of .1 volt or .1 mA respectively),
and standard Form C relay operation (1 amps, 24 VAC). It shall be possible
to select the mode of output operation for each output by simply wiring to the
appropriate terminations on the controller. No circuit boards or output cards
shall have to be exchanged to select the desired output mode.
1) A three position manual override switch (HOA) shall allow selection

of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. In addition each universal
output shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow
manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range,
when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON
position.
2) The Form C output mode shall be capable of standard digital output

operation including pulse width modulation.
3) All current outputs shall be fuse protected to 120 VAC.
d. Tri-State Outputs - tri-state outputs shall consist of two 24 VAC relays for
control of bi-directional motors and actuators. Each tri-state output is
capable of PWM (pulse width modulation) to a resolution of .1 second.
B. Level 1 Lan-(Ethernet) Based Network Controllers
1. Provide a minimum of 34MB RAM for Ethernet-based controllers. In addition,

each controller shall contain a minimum of 2MB of ROM memory for the system
firmware. Firmware shall be socketable to allow for future upgrades.
2. Communication Ports
a. Network controllers shall provide communication to both the high speed

LAN and the field bus. An on-board 10/100bT Ethernet port shall be
provided, as well as a RS-485 port for communications to a maximum of 127
MS/TP devices.
b. In addition, a minimum of one RS232 and one RS485 port shall be provided
for connection to a workstation or laptop service tool. When the port is
RS232, it shall support communication to a modem or printer. Where
multiple RS232 ports are available, multi-user communications shall be
supported.
c. Any RS232C ports shall also be usable for connection to tank probes, fire
alarm panels, and other microprocessor-based devices, which communicate
in ASCII.
3. Communication Protocols
a. Ethernet LAN communications are acceptable. The TCP/IP protocol shall be

used. Ethernet communications must be fully compliant with IEEE 802.3

August 12, 2013
and support a full range of off-the-shelf communication devices such as

transceivers, bridges and routers.
4. Peer to Peer Communications
a. Each Level 1 network controller will be able to exchange information with

other Level 1 controllers over the high speed LAN. The network structure
shall be transparent such that each controller may store and reference any
global variables available in the network for use in the controller's
calculations or programs. Each Level 1 controller will also have access to
any of the inputs, outputs, and calculated variables contained in Level 2
controllers that is connected to it through its local field bus.
5. Real Time Clock (RTC)
a. A battery backed uninterruptible "Real Time Clock", accurate to 10 seconds

per month. The RTC shall provide the following information; time of day,
day, month, year, and day of week. In normal operation of the system, the
clock will be based on the frequency of the AC power. The system shall
automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years.
6. Power Supply
a. Level 1 LAN-based network controllers will operate from 120, 240 VAC,
60/50 Hz power, with a tolerance of +/- 20%. Line voltage below the
operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller
shall contain over voltage surge protection and require no additional AC
power signal conditioning. If required by the controller, a transformer to
reduce the voltage from 120/220 shall be supplied in the cabinet by the
contractor.
7. Automatic Restart After Power Failure
a. Upon restoration of power, the network controller shall automatically and

without human intervention; update all monitored functions, resume
operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement
special start-up strategies as required.
8. Battery Back-Up/UPS
a. Each Level 1 network controller shall have at least 72 hours of battery

backup to maintain all volatile memory. In addition, this battery shall
provide for full UPS operation for a minimum of 15 minutes.
9. Indicator Lamps
a. Network controllers will have as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status,

high speed LAN status and field bus status.
10. Local Display

August 12, 2013
a. A touch screen LCD display shall be available for every Level 1 LAN-based
network controller for readout of point values in the network, and to allow
operators to change setpoints and other operating parameters.
11. Packaging
a. Level 1 network controllers shall be housed in a locking enclosure with

external access to the local display. In addition all diagnostic indicator lamps
shall be viewable without having to open the enclosure. The enclosure will
include knockouts on all sides of the cabinet for connection to field and
power wiring.
C. Level 1 - Lan-based Equipment Controllers
1. Memory
a. A minimum of 256 kB of RAM shall be provided for storing application

software and system operation. In addition, each controller shall contain a
minimum of 1MB of ROM memory for the system firmware. Firmware shall
be socketable to allow for future upgrades.
a. Level 1 LAN-based equipment controllers shall provide communication to

the field bus, and have a RS232 port for a laptop service tool.
3. Network Communications
a. Each controller will have access to any of the inputs, outputs, and calculated
variables contained in Level 2 controllers that are connected to it through its
local field bus as well as any other information available on the Ethernet.
a. The controller shall contain a battery backed uninterruptible "Real Time

Clock" accurate to 10 seconds per month. The RTC shall provide the
following information; time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. In
normal operation, the system clock will be based on the frequency of the AC
power. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and
leap years.

August 12, 2013
5. Power Supply
a. The power supply will operate from 120/220 VAC, 60/50 Hz power, with a
tolerance of +20%. Line voltage below the operating range of the system
shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge
protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning. If
required by the controller, a transformer to reduce the voltage from 120/220
shall be provided in the cabinet by the contractor
a. Upon restoration of power, the Level 1 equipment controller shall

automatically and without human intervention; update all monitored
functions, resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status,
and implement special start-up strategies as required.
7. Battery Back-Up/UPS
a. Each equipment controller shall have at least 72 hours of battery backup to

maintain all volatile memory. In addition, the battery shall provide for full
UPS operation for a minimum of 15 minutes.
8. Indicator Lamps
a. Equipment controllers will have as a minimum LED indication of CPU

status, power, field bus status, and error status.
9. Packaging
a. Equipment controllers shall be housed in a locking enclosure. The enclosure

will include knockouts on all sides of the cabinet for connection to field and
power wiring.
D. Level 2 Controllers - General
1. Description
a. Level 2 controllers shall provide standalone control. Each controller shall

have its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a
failure to its associated Level 1 controller.
b. Control programs shall be stored in battery backed-up RAM and EEPROM.

Each Level 2 controller shall have the intelligence to perform all control
strategies, without communication to other controllers, for control functions
not requiring data from other controllers.

August 12, 2013
c. Each Level 2 controller shall be able to have its program edited and/or
modified either locally through a laptop computer service tool or through a
workstation connected to a Level 1 controller. Each Level 2 controller shall
complete its internal scan in less than one second. Each scan shall consist of
updating of inputs, importing of data from other controllers, performing
mathematical calculations and sequencing appropriate outputs for local loop
control.
2. Noise Protection
a. Level 2 controllers that power with 120 VAC shall permit continuous
shorting of any input to 120 VAC. Level 2 controllers that power with 24
VAC shall permit continuous shorting of any input to 24 VAC. All outputs
shall be isolated to a minimum of 1500 VAC.
a. Each controller shall provide communication to the field bus. In addition, a

port shall be provided for connection to a laptop service tool to support local
programming and parameter changes. It shall be possible from this port to
access and program any controller on the field bus, any Master Level
controller on the high speed LAN, or any Level 2 controller on a different
field bus.
4. Network Communications
a. Each controller will be able to exchange information between other Level 2

controllers and Level 1 controllers during each field bus scan. The network
structure shall be transparent such that each system controller may store and
reference any global variables available in the network for use in the local
controller's calculations or programs. Each system controller shall be
capable of storing and referencing global variables.
a. Upon restoration of power, the controller shall automatically and without

human intervention; update all monitored functions; resume operation based
on current, synchronized time and status, implement special start-up
strategies as required.
6. Battery Back Up/UPS
a. Each Level 2 controller shall have at least 72 hours of battery back-up to

maintain all volatile memory. In addition, this battery shall provide for full
UPS operation for a minimum of 15 minutes.
7. Indicator Lamps
a. Level 2 controllers will have, as a minimum, power indication, LED

indication of CPU status, and field bus status.

August 12, 2013
E. Level 2 - System Controllers
1. Description
a. The Level 2 system controller shall provide direct digital control of hot water
and chilled water plants, and all other large systems.
b. The general requirements of Level 2 controllers apply.
2. Memory
a. Level 2 system controllers shall have a minimum of 64kB of user RAM

memory and 128kB of EEPROM.
3. Input/Output
a. Inputs - the input section of the system controller shall provide a minimum of
16 universal inputs. Each input shall be configurable through software as a
digital (dry contact), analog (0-10V or 4-20 mA), pulse (up to 5 Hz)
thermistor, RTD or Thermocouple point. The analog to digital resolution
shall be a minimum of 12 bits.
b. Outputs - there shall be a minimum of 8 universal outputs configurable as a

digital (24 VAC, 1 Amp Form C relays), analog (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20
mA), tri-state, or pulse width modulation signal.
c. Overrides - each output shall have an easily accessible, built-in, 3-position

override switch capable for auto-on-off operation. In addition, each analog
output shall also include a potentiometer that can be adjusted manually to
override the entire range of the analog signal. DIP switches are not
acceptable for overrides.
d. Expansion port - the system controller shall have a port to accept a family of
I/O modules. Up to two modules shall be powered directly from the power
supply of the system controller.
a. The system controller shall contain a real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds
day, month, year, and day of week. Each controller shall be capable of
receiving a signal over the network from the Level 1 controller to
synchronize all clocks to the same time.
5. Power Supply
a. The system controller shall have a built-in, selectable power supply of

120/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The power supply will tolerate 20% swings in

August 12, 2013
supply voltage. If required by the controller, a transformer to reduce voltage

shall be provided by this contractor with the cabinet.
6. Packaging
a. System controllers shall be available in either an NEMA 1 rated enclosure or

in a package suitable for panel mounting.
7. Local Display
a. Each system controller shall have a built-in LCD display and keypad. The
display shall have a minimum size of 2 lines by 16 characters. From the
keypad, operators shall be able to view point status, adjust setpoints and
change parameters according to password level.
F. Level 2 - Local Controllers
1. Description
a. The local controller is designed to provide direct digital control of air

handling units, boilers, chillers, water heaters and other equipment.
2. Memory
a. Local controllers shall have a minimum of 32kB bytes of user RAM memory
and 128kB of EEPROM.
3. Input/Output
a. Inputs - the input section of the local controller shall provide a minimum of 8
universal inputs. Each input shall be configurable through software as a
digital (dry contact), analog (0-10V, or 4-20mA), pulse (up to 5 Hz),
thermistor, RTD or thermocouple point. The analog to digital resolution
shall be a minimum of 10 bits.
b. Outputs - there shall be a minimum of 8 digital outputs utilizing 24 VAC

Form C relays. Each output shall be capable of on/off and pulse width
modulation control.
c. Overrides - each output shall have a built-in override switch capable of auto-
on-off operation. DIP switches shall not be acceptable. In addition, each
analog output shall include a potentiometer that can simulate the range of the
output signal.
d. Expansion Port - the local controller shall have an optional port to accept a
family of I/O modules. Up to two modules shall be powered directly from
the power supply of the controller.

August 12, 2013
a. The local controller shall contain a real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds
day, month, year, and day of week. Each controller shall be capable of
receiving a signal over the network from the Level 1 controller to
synchronize all clocks to the same time.
5. Power Supply
a. The local controller shall have a built-in power supply of selectable 120/220
VAC, 50/60 Hz. The power supply will tolerate 20% swings in supply
voltage. If required by the controller, a transformer to reduce voltage shall
be provided by this contractor within the cabinet.
6. Packaging
a. Local controller shall be provided in either an NEMA 1 rated enclosure.
7. Local Display
a. Local controllers shall have a built-in LCD display and keypad. The display
shall have a minimum size of 2 lines by 16 characters. From the keypad,
operators shall be able to view point status.
G. Level 2 - Terminal Equipment Controllers
1. Description
a. The terminal equipment controller is designed to provide direct digital

control of variable air volume boxes, heat pumps, unit ventilators, and fan
coil units.
2. Memory
a. Terminal equipment controllers shall have a minimum of 32kB bytes of user

RAM memory and 128kB of EEPROM.
3. Input/Output
a. Inputs - the input section of the terminal equipment controller shall provide a
minimum of 6 universal inputs. Each input shall be configurable through
software as a digital (dry contact), analog (0-10V or 4-20mA), pulse (up to 5
Hz) thermistor, RTD or thermocouple point. The analog to digital
resolution shall be a minimum of 10 bits. A fifth input shall be available for
measuring air flow. The air flow sensor shall be included as part of the
controller, and accurate to +5% over a range of 0 to 1 inch w.g.

August 12, 2013
b. Expansion port - the terminal equipment controller shall have an optional

port to accept a family of I/O modules. Up to two modules shall be powered
directly from the power supply of the terminal equipment controller.
c. Provide at least 3 on board potentiometers to set the maximum and minimum

values of VAV equipment.
d. Overrides - Each output shall have a built-in override switch capable of auto-
on-off operation. DIP switches are not acceptable. Analog outputs overrides
shall be equipped with potentiometers to simulate the range of the output.
4. Power Supply
a. The terminal equipment controller shall have a built-in power supply of 24

VAC, 50/60 Hz. The power supply will tolerate 20% swings in supply
voltage of 120/220 VAC.
5. Packaging
a. Terminal equipment controllers shall be available in a package suitable for

panel mounting.
b. Outputs - There shall be a minimum of one form A relay, one form K relay
and one analog (0-10V or 4-20mA) outputs.
6. Air Volume Control (VAV) Box Controllers
a. BCS contractor shall provide microprocessor based Terminal Unit Controls

for building air volume control (VAV) boxes. BCS contractor shall have
responsibility for the provision of damper actuator, microprocessor based
controller, control transformer, velocity pressure transducers, room sensors
and all control wiring.
1) BCS contractor shall have responsibility for startup, checkout,

calibration and replacement of all control system components. BCS
contractor shall have the responsibility of proper mounting control
components whether components are mounted in the field or at the
box manufacturer's plant.
2) BCS contractor shall determine compatibility of pressure sensor

output(s) provided with terminal box with transducers and control
software and provide appropriate and compatible components.
H. Level 2 - I/O Expansion Modules
1. Description
a. Expansion modules are designed to increase the amount of I/O available to

each system, local or terminal equipment controller above its base level.
Module types shall include as a minimum digital inputs, digital outputs,

August 12, 2013
analog outputs, and pneumatic outputs. It shall be possible to add up to two

modules of any type to Level 2 controllers having an expansion port. There
will be no limitations in software placed upon any points that originate from
expansion modules.
2. Input Modules
a. Input modules shall contain 8 digital inputs.
3. Output Modules
a. Each module shall provide either two digital, analog or pneumatic outputs.
Digital outputs shall be available in either 24 VAC or 120 VAC/220 VAC
rated relays. Analog outputs shall provide either 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA.
Pneumatic outputs shall provide a 3-15 psi signal, with built-in feedback of
the branch pressure. All output modules shall include easily accessible 3
position override switches and potentiometers. (DIP switches shall not be
acceptable).
I. BacNet Gateway to Third-Party Devices
1. General
a. Where required, provide a BACnet Gateway to interface to non-BACnet

systems that use the Modbus protocol, LONworks protocol or other
proprietary protocol. The Gateway shall communicate directly over Ethernet
TCP/IP and shall use the BACnet/IP protocol to communicate with a BACnet
Workstation (B-OWS).
a. In addition to its on-board Ethernet port, the Gateway shall have at least two
serial communications ports for interfaces to third-party systems.
3. Memory
a. The Gateway shall have enough RAM memory to store all point
configuration data, plus required history logging and alarm buffering.
Minimum RAM shall be 8 MB. The operating system of the gateway must
be stored in FLASH non-volatile memory.
4. User Programming Language
a. The Gateway shall employ the same user programmable application software
that NRCs and SDCUs use.
b. Control software, mathematical functions and energy management

applications must be identify to that which is provided with the Network
Router/Controller. Gateways that do not have an application programming
language will not be accepted.

August 12, 2013
5. History Logging
a. Each Gateway shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output,

calculated value or other system variable over user defined time intervals
ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system can be logged in
history. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log. Each log
can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of
the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation
for long-term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals or manual
command.
2.3 BCS SOFTWARE
A. Network Drivers
1. Description: Network drivers shall be available to provide amplification and media

conversion for both the high speed LAN and the field bus. These network drivers
shall operate as active hubs, rebroadcasting the bus communications to the various
controllers downstream from the driver.
2. High Speed LAN:
a. Drivers shall be available for twisted pair cabling, coaxial cabling, and fiber
optic networks.
b. Coaxial drivers shall support both bus and star network topologies. Fiber
optic and twisted pair drivers shall operate in star topologies.
c. Drivers shall be configurable for location in a single controller or in modular

hubs with expansion up to 16 links.
3. Field Bus: The field bus driver shall provide amplification to allow for expansion
beyond 32 nodes or 4000 feet. For each additional group of 32 nodes or 4000 feet,
an additional driver shall be required. Drivers that can provide multiple channels
from a single card are acceptable.
B. Level 1 Controller Software
1. Software Description: The application software shall be configured for each Level 1
controller either locally, through a laptop computer service tool, or through a work
station. Level 1 controllers shall contain PROM as the resident operating system.
Application software shall be RAM resident. Application software shall only be
limited by the amount of RAM. There shall be no restrictions placed on the type of
application programs in the system.

August 12, 2013
a. Each Level 1 controller shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all

control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of
any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O
facilities of the processor. This execution of control function by Level 1
controllers shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications
including; interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage,
etc.
2. Real-Time Operating System: Provide a real time operating system in PROM

memory requiring no operator interaction to initiate and commence operations. The
program shall include:
a. Operation and management of all devices
b. Error detection and recovery from arithmetic and logical faults
c. Editing software to allow the user to develop or alter application programs
d. System self-testing
e. Multi-user
f. Multi-tasking
3. Editor: When programming a controller through either a work station or laptop

computer, editing and word processing features shall include as a minimum:
a. Cut, copy, paste, and undo
b. Search and replace
c. Comments
d. Scrolling
e. Character, line, and page cursor control
4. When programming in terminal mode, the system shall allow full screen, character
editing for correction or modification of any portion of a program. Syntax errors
shall be highlighted, and programmers must make corrections prior to the program
being compiled.
5. When programming Level 2 controllers, the programming environment shall be

identical to Level 1 programming with automatic uploading and downloading of the
compiled code to the controller.

August 12, 2013
6. Point Identification: Users must be able to assign unique identifiers for each
connected point. Identifiers must have at least sixteen alpha/numeric characters. All
references to these points in programs, reports, and command messages shall be by
these identifiers.
a. Each point name can have up to a 32 character description or engineering

units (up to 8 characters).
b. The BCS contractor shall submit a list of all point names to the Owner’s
Representative for approval prior to programming the system.
7. User Programming Language: The application software shall be user

programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control
algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English language
and programmable by the user.
a. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of

control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local
displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories.
b. The language shall allow the creation of timers anywhere in the logic of a
program. Each timer shall increment in seconds and increment to a minimum
of 365 days.
c. The language shall be self-documenting. Users shall be able to place

comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be
configurable by the user in logical groupings.
8. Application Software: The system shall contain ROM based, built-in software
modules for the creation of standard application programs. Modules shall include as
a minimum:
a. PID Algorithm
b. Self Tuning PID
c. Calendar Functions (Seconds, minutes, hour, day of week, day of month,

day of year, month and year)
d. Curve fit
e. Optimum Start
9. Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing basic

mathematical functions, squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, Boolean
logic statements, or combinations.

August 12, 2013
10. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including
operators such as >,<,=, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These must be able to be used in
the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five
parentheses deep.
11. Passwords: Level 1 controllers shall have 5 levels of passwords. The highest level
shall allow access to all functions within the system. The remaining 4 levels will be
definable by the Owner to include any subset of system commands.
12. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of logging any system variable
over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 365 days. Any system
variables (inputs, outputs, math calculations, flags, etc.) can be logged in history. A
minimum of 32767 values may be stored in each log. Each log shall record either
the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logs can be
automatic or manual.
a. It shall be possible to find the average of a log, the standard deviation, the
sum, minimum or maximum. It shall also be possible to reference any value
within a log for use in a control program.
13. Reporting: The system shall be able to create user definable reports containing any
combination of text and system variables. Report templates will be created by users
in a word processing environment. Reports can be displayed based on any logical
condition or through a user command.
a. Numerical displays shall be up to 8 digits in total length, with up to 8 digits

to the right of the decimal point. The format of each numerical display shall
be user definable.
14. Alarming: For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or
conditional expressions. All alarms shall be tested. Each alarm can result in the
display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Messages and reports can be sent
to the display panel, a local terminal, to the Work Station, via modem to a remote
computing device, or all of the above.
15. Overriding Programs: It shall be possible to disable any point in the system and
modify it to a user definable value. Any points that have been disabled shall be kept
in a log and viewable by an operator at any time.
16. I/O Configuration: All input, output, and internal software points shall be
configurable from menus in the operator workstation and laptop service tool
connected to a Level 1 network or remote site master controller. Each input shall be
software selectable to operate as a digital point, analog voltage, analog ampere,
analog resistance, temperature sensor, or a pulsed signal. Each output point shall be
software selectable to operate as a digital, analog or tri-state. The software shall
permit scaling of analog inputs and outputs in engineering units, with automatic
conversions for both linear and non-linear devices.

August 12, 2013
C. Work Station Software
1. Web-based Operator Software
a. Day-to-day operation of the system shall be accessible through a standard

web browser interface, allowing technicians and operators to view any part
of the system from anywhere on the network. Access to the system must be
available from a dial-in connection over the Internet.
2. The database shall also contain host level points consisting of variables, which can
be used for host level reports and alarming. These variables can be setpoints or the
result of any Boolean algebra expression.
3. The BCS contractor shall provide graphics at the user workstation that display at
least the information indicated on the control diagrams in the drawing package.
Additionally, the graphics shall contain the following information for each device:
a. Two position control devices including valves, dampers, constant volume

pumps (fans).
1) Control signal status.
2) Feedback device status (end switches, differential pressure switches).
b. Modulating control devices including valves, damper, variable flow pumps

(fans).
1) Control signal status.
2) Feedback device status (pilot positioner % open, end switches,

differential pressure switches).
3) VFD output (voltage, amperage, frequency)
4) VFD alarms.
c. Analog Field Devices
1) Control Setpoint
2) Process Variable Reading
3) Output signal (% open etc)
4) Positioner feedback
d. Digital Field Devices
1) Control Setpoint

August 12, 2013
2) Device Status (on/off, open/closed)
e. Monitoring Devices
1) Process Variable Reading
f. Equipment Manufacturer’s Control Panels
1) All equipment (mechanical, electrical and plumbing) controlled by

the Equipment Manufacturer Packaged Controller shall be monitored
by the BCS. All process variables capable of being transmitted by
the Manufacturer’s Controller shall be displayed adjacent to the
graphic symbol of the equipment.
4. Where applicable, all readings, setpoints and conditions shall be expressed with
their engineering units (i.e., temperature shall be expressed in degrees Fahrenheit).
By use of a function key on the keyboard, the user shall be able to toggle between SI
units and English units. The program shall contain all necessary conversion factors
accurate to two decimal places. Graphics shall be a minimum of six (6) colors in
display of various systems.
5. Automatic Monitoring: The software shall allow for the collection of data and
reports from any Level 1 or Level 2 controller through either a hardwire or modem
communication link. The time schedules and content of the polling shall be user
configurable and include any subset of the controller's data base including
application programs.
6. Alarm Management: The software shall be capable of both accepting alarms

directly from Level 1 controllers, or generating alarms based on polling of data in
controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured in the host
software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) shall be integrated into the
overall alarm management system and shall appear in all standard alarm reports, be
available for operator acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics,
reports, or initiating communication to another controller or remote computing
device. Alarm management features shall include:
a. A minimum of 255 alarm levels. Each alarm level shall establish a unique
set of parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard
annunciation, alarm printout and record keeping.
b. When an alarm occurs the Alarm counter shall be incremented by one.
c. Printout of the alarm or alarm report to an alarm printer or report printer.
d. Print the alarm acknowledgment or Return to Normal message.
e. Sound an audible beep on alarm initiation or acknowledgment.

August 12, 2013
f. It shall be possible to direct alarm displays to all or any of 16 groups of work

stations on the network. Each configured path can be assigned on a unique
basis to individual alarm levels.
7. Report Generation: The software shall contain a built-in report generator, featuring
word processing tools for the creation of custom building reports.
a. Reports can be of any length and contain any points with the database of
Level 1 and Level 2 controllers.
b. The report generator shall have access to the user programming language in
order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report,
control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional
information needed by the report.
c. It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is

initiated.
d. Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so

that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm
condition.
8. Scheduling: It shall be possible to configure and download from the work station
schedules for any of the controllers on the network.
9. Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style configured for either monthly or
weekly operation. Scheduling shall be programmable up to one year in advance.
10. Each schedule shall appear on the screen as a monthly calendar correctly showing
the day, weekday, month and year. It shall be possible to scroll from one month to
the next and view or alter any of the schedule times.
11. Schedules shall be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM
memory. Any changes made at the work station shall be automatically updated to
the corresponding schedule in the controller.
12. It shall be possible to configure multiple Holiday schedules in a yearly format.

Holiday schedules shall override the standard operating schedule for those days that
have been defined as holidays. Holidays shall be differentiated on the calendar
through color coding of the date. Any changes to a holiday schedule shall be
automatically updated to the standard schedule to which it has been superimposed.
13. There shall also be a provision for Special Day schedules. Special Day schedules
shall override both the standard schedule and its associated Holiday schedule.
Special Days shall be differentiated on the calendar through color coding of the date.
Any changes to a Special Day schedule shall be automatically updated to the
standard schedule to which it has been superimposed.
14. The Scheduling application shall include built-in editing tools to permit users to
copy and paste portions of schedules to different days, weeks or months. Users can

August 12, 2013
select from a particular day, a range of days, or a non-consecutive group of days

over which to edit a schedule.
15. Trending: The software shall be capable of displaying historical data in either a
tabular or graphical format. The requirements of this trending capability shall
include the following:
a. Any field point or calculated variable shall be available for trending.
b. In a tabular form, the trend display can have up to 16 columns. Each column
shall contain a minimum of 6500 rows.
c. In the graphical format, the trend shall plot up to 16 separate variables over
the requested time period.
d. The time period for each trend shall be user selectable, from 1 minute to 1
year.
e.
When using the tabular form, the user shall be able to select from displays
that show the actual value at each interval, the interpolated value, or the
value of the last change.
D. Level 1 - Lan-based Network Controllers
1. Software Configuration: LAN-based network controllers may be configured

through a terminal, laptop computer or through a workstation. When using a
terminal, the operator shall be able to configure the entire system through built-in
menus and a full screen editor.
2. Real-Time Operating System: Provide a real time operating system in EPROM

a. Operation and management of all devices.
b. Error detection and recovery from arithmetic and logical faults.
c. Editing software to allow the user to develop or alter application programs.
d. System self-testing.
e. Multi-user capability.
f. Multi-tasking capability.
3. Reporting: It shall be possible to create user definable reports in network controllers

containing any combination of text and system variables. Report templates will be
created by users in a word processing environment. Report can be displayed based
on any logical condition or through a user command. Numerical displays shall be
up to 8 digits in total length, with up to 8 digits to the right of the decimal point.
The format of each numerical display shall be user definable.

August 12, 2013
4. Programmable Drivers: Using the programming language specified herein, it shall

be possible to develop specific ASCII-based software drivers in the Level 1
Network Controllers for communication to fire panels, chiller panels and other
similar devices. These drivers should be capable of bi-directional communications,
and all information obtained shall be available over the network for utilization in
operator displays and local control programs.
E. Level 1 - Lan-based Equipment Controllers
1. Software Configuration: LAN-based equipment controllers may be configured

through a laptop computer or through a workstation.
2. Real-Time Operating System: Provide a real time operating system in EPROM

a. Operation and Management of All Devices.
b. Error Detection and Recovery from Arithmetic and Logical Faults.
c. System Self-Testing.
d. Multi-User Capability.
e. Multi-Tasking Capabilities.
3. Application Programs: Utilizing the user programming language specified above,

application specific programs will be developed for each Level 2 controller
including but not limited to start/stop sequences, valve and damper modulation,
equipment optimization, energy management routines, and safety interlocks.
4. Alarming: For each system point, up to 8 alarms can be created based on high/low
limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan and can result
in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports through a host work station.
5. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of logging any point over user
defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 365 days. Points include inputs,
outputs, math calculations, setpoints, and internal variables. A minimum of 2000
values can be stored in each log. Each log will record either the instantaneous,
average, minimum, or maximum value of the point. Logs can be automatic or
manual.
6. Schedules: Time schedules configured at an operator workstation are to be stored in

the Level 2 controller. Each schedule shall have multiple start and stop times per
day, automatically adjust for holidays, day light savings and leap years. The
number of schedules per Level 2 controller will be limited only by available
memory.

August 12, 2013
7. Expansion Modules: There will be no special programming required when

assigning points originating from an expansion module. In addition, there shall be
no limitations on application programs that reference points from expansion
modules.
8. Overriding System Points: It shall be possible to disable a point in a Level 2

controller and modify it to a user definable value. Any points that have been
disabled will be kept in a log and viewable by an operator at any time.
F. Level 2 Controllers
1. All input, output, and internal software points shall be configurable from menus in
the operator workstations, the laptop service tool, or through a dumb terminal
connected to a Level 1 network or remote site master controller. Each input shall be
software selectable to operate as a digital point, analog voltage, analog ampere,
temperature sensor, or a pulsed signal. Output point types may include digital,
analog or tri-state. The software shall permit scaling of analog inputs and outputs in
engineering units, with automatic conversions for both linear and non-linear devices.
Where Level 2 controllers contain override switches, the software shall detect the
override position of the switch and record the actual value of the override for both
digital and analog output types.
2. Data Identification: Users must be able to assign unique identifiers for each
connected I/O point, variable, or controller in the system. Identifiers may have up to
sixteen (16) alpha/numeric characters. All references in the programs, reports, and
command messages shall be by these identifiers. Each point name can have up to a
40 character description, and engineering units (up to 8 characters). All analog
points shall be stored as floating point numbers and displayable in integer or
scientific notation formats.
G. Level 2 - System Controllers
a. Description: System controllers shall contain all of the function of a Level 2

controller specified above. In addition, these controllers shall contain
software support for the real time clock and the options LCD display.
b. Local Display: All points and system variables contained in the system
controller shall be displayable through the optional LCD display. In
addition, it shall be possible through a keypad to modify variables such as
setpoints and operating parameters. The software will allow any point to be
selectively removed from access through the display.
H. Level 2 - Local Controllers
1. Description: Local controllers shall contain all of the function of a Level 2

controller specified above. In addition, these controllers will also contain software
support for the real time clock and the optional LCD display.
I. Level 2 - Terminal Equipment Controllers

August 12, 2013
1. Description: Terminal equipment controllers shall contain all of the function

described for Level 2 Controls above. Terminal equipment controllers that have
ROM-based application software are unacceptable.
2.4 BCS - ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Connect to and Extend the Existing electric/electronic temperature control system

manufactured by Automated Logic.
B. Scope
1. Control system shall consist of thermostats, humidistats, temperature transmitters,
controllers, automatic valves and dampers, damper operators, control panels,
electrical wiring and other components required to fill intent of Specifications and
provide for complete and operable system. Control equipment shall be fully
proportioning, except as noted otherwise. Sequence of operation shall be as
indicated on Drawings.
2. In general this Specification morning warm-up is intended to cover following:

occupied-unoccupied control, summer/winter changeover controls, central station air
handling unit controls, hot water controls, interlocking of fans, pumps and
equipment, including H-O-A switch sequences.
C. Local Control Panels:
1. Controllers, relays, switches, etc. shall be mounted on enclosed control panels with
hinge lock type door mounted adjacent to system controlled. Temperature settings,
adjustments and calibrations shall be made at system control panel. Panel shall have
canopy light and on-off switch.
2. Provide remote transmission thermometers on local panels. Temperature indications

shall be provided for each point of temperature measurement for control and,
additionally, for those points outlined in this Section or shown on Drawings.
3. Details of each panel shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Locations
of each panel shall be convenient for adjustment and service. Provide engraved
nameplates beneath each panel mounted control device. Manual switches, dial
thermometers and indicating gauges shall be flush mounted on hinged door.
4. Electrical devices within panels shall be factory pre-wired to numbered terminal

strip. Wiring within panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL standards.
5. Following items shall be mounted on control panels: water supply and return
temperature indicators, 7 day time clock, selector switches, occupied/ unoccupied
switch and humidity indicators.
D. Miscellaneous Devices: Provide relays, positioners, electric switches, clocks, transformers,

etc. necessary to make complete and operable system. Locate these devices on local panel

August 12, 2013
unless specified otherwise. Time clocks shall be seven day program type with ten hour spring
reserve and manual override.
E. Thermometers:
1. Thermometers shall be flush mounted on local panels. These thermometers shall be
electronic transmission type with dials with minimum 3-1/2" diameter. Accuracy
shall be +2% of full scale values. Linear scale shall be -40 deg. F to 150 deg. F.
Indication meter shall be suitable for use with 1000 ohm temperature sensors.
2. Thermometers shall be provided for following locations for each system:
a. Outside air temperature

b. Entering each coil
c. After each coil
d. Return air
e. Mixed air
f. Water system supply and return.
F. Optimal Logic Network
1. Provide optimal start logic network programmer to start air handling equipment to
properly condition spaces prior to occupancy. Optimal time to start primary
equipment shall be determined by external conditions, building construction and
conditioning equipment. Factors to be considered in determining warm-up period
for air handling systems shall be type of building construction, U factor and outside
air temperature.
2. Programmer shall work in conjunction with occupied-unoccupied programming

schedules and be equipped with precision 24 hour synchronous clock systems.
2.5 FIELD DEVICES
A. Input Devices
1. The system shall maintain the specified analog end-to-end accuracy throughout the
warranty period from sensor to controller readout.
2. Transducers may be supplied as an integral unit with the field sensor, or mounted
separately in a field interface panel, or as part of the controller. All transducers
shall be calibrated in the field for mounting and connected to the final terminations.
3. Sensors and transducers shall be appropriately packaged for the location.
a. Architectural housing for space mounting
b. Weatherproof/sunshield housing for outdoors
c. Thermal well housing for water applications
d. Protective housing for duct mounting

August 12, 2013
4. The sensor/transducer shall be selected to withstand ambient conditions where:
a. Moisture or condensation is a factor
b. Vibration exists from ductwork, equipment, etc.
c. Reasonably expected transient conditions exist for temperatures, pressures,

humidities, etc. outside the normal sensing range
5. The sensor/transducer shall be appropriately selected to most closely match the

expected sensing range. If, upon start-up and balancing, a sensor/transducer is
operating below 20% or above 80% of its range, the sensor/transducer shall be
replaced at no additional cost with a unit of an appropriate range such that the
measured value is between 30% and 70% of the range.
6. System accuracy of sensed conditions shall be as follows:
+/- 0.5 F for space temperature in the 0 - 130 F range

+/- 0.5 F for duct temperatures in the 40 to 130F range
+/- 1.0 F for outside air temperatures in the -30 to 230 F range
+/- 1.0 F for water temperatures in the 30 to 230 F range
+/- 1% of reading for KWH and KW monitoring
+/- 2% RH for relative humidity in the 10 to 90% range
+/- 0.1 inches for static pressure over 0-5 inch water gauge
+/- 0.05 inch for filter status differential over a 0- 2 inch range
+/- 1% of reading for pressure switches and sensors
+/- 1% of reading for air flow
+/- 3% of reading for water flow
+/- 1% of reading for differential water pressure
+/- 1% of span for level
7. Sensors in the return or discharge duct shall be of the single point type. Sensors in
the mixed air shall be of the averaging type.
8. Thermowells shall be brass or steel for non- corrosive fluids below 250 deg.F and
300 series stainless steel for all other applications.
9. All digital inputs shall be provided by dry contacts. The contacts shall be wired
normally open or normally closed as required.
10. Temperature sensors shall be by the use of thermistors or Resistance Temperature
Detectors (RTD).
11. Motor status shall be monitored by current sensing switches.
12. Fluid flow status shall be by differential pressure sensors.
13. Utility metered or submetered KWH or KW shall be sensed by a pulse producing

transducer.

August 12, 2013
14. Provide differential pressure sensors and transmitters as follows:
a. Differential pressure sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure

with an accuracy 1% of full scale, including non-linearity, hysteresis, and
repeatability. Sensors shall have transmitters with outputs compatible with
system. Sensors shall be industrial grade.
1) Duct mounted airflow differential pressure sensors used for

measuring supply duct static pressure for VAV applications, shall
have a range of 0.0" to +5.0" WC. Sensors for measuring building
static pressure shall have a range of -0.3" to +0.3" WG.
2) Steam and water pressure sensors shall be diaphragm type with

stainless steel diaphragm with range as appropriate for each system.
3) Water pressure switches shall be Bourdon tube type, 316 SS.
15. Room sensors shall be as follows:
a. Sensing element only. (Public Areas)
b. Sensing element, setpoint adjustment, override switch. (Open Offices)
c. Sensing element, setpoint adjustment, override switch and LCD display.

(Closed Offices)
16. Humidity Instruments
a. Humidity sensors shall have an adjustable setpoint of 20-80% RH with an

accuracy of +2% RH from 20-80% RH. Industrial grade sensors shall have
accuracy of +1% RH within 10% RH of setpoint, including linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability. Sensors shall have transmitters with outputs
compatible with system. Sensors and transmitters shall have allowable
operating temperature range of -40 deg. F to 120 deg. F. Sensors shall be
thin film capacitance type. Provide COR with hand held calibration tool.
b. Room sensors shall have tamper proof housing.
17. Current to pneumatic (I/P) transducers shall have an accuracy of 1% (including

linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability), over their ranges.
18. Air flow status shall be sensed by static differential pressure sensor or switch piped
across all fans (low-port to fan suction, high-port to fan discharge). Where status
indication is required across VAV or 2 speed fan, provide analog static differential
pressure sensor for accurate status indication at minimum speed or VAV discharge.
19. Water flow status shall be sensed by differential pressure switch piped across all
pumps. One piping connection shall be made at pump suction, the other at pump
discharge before the discharge check valve.

August 12, 2013
20. Common alarms shall be wired relay coils in parallel with common alarm pilot light.
Contacts shall input to BCS.
21. Wire contacts normally open (NO). When in an alarm condition the contact shall
open and the BCS shall sense alarm condition.
22. Air flow transducers for volume control terminals shall have the ability to control air
flow with a velocity pressure signal of 0.02" WC or less with an accuracy of +10%
of reading.
B. Output Devices
1. The use of multiplexers will not be accepted.
2. All digital outputs shall be electrically isolated from the digital controller by
interface relays.
3. Field relays shall have a minimum life of 1 million cycles without failure.
4. Electric to pneumatic transducers (E/P) shall operate from an analog signal. E/P
transducers shall be rated for 0 -20 PSIG operation and accurate to 1% of full scale.
E/P transducers shall have a maximum air consumption of 100 SCIM.
5. Electric solenoid operated pneumatic valves (EP's) shall have a three port operation:
common, normally open and normally closed. They shall be rated for 50 psig when
used for 25 psig or less applications, or rated for 150 psig when used for 100 psig or
less applications. The coils shall be equipped with transient suppression devices to
limit transients to 150 percent of the rated coil voltage.
C. Actuators
1. General Application of Actuators:
a. Actuators for valves and dampers servicing terminal equipment (i.e. reheat
coil valves, fan coil unit valves, variable air volume boxes, etc.). Shall be
electric.
b. Actuators for valves servicing the fuel oil system and valves located outdoors
shall be electric.
c. Actuators serving VAV boxes and laboratory areas (supply, exhaust, return)
shall have a maximum stroke timing of six seconds from full closed to full
open to full closed.
2. Damper actuator mounting shall be outside of the air stream. The actuators shall
have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The linkage arrangement shall
permit normally open or normally closed positions as indicated on the drawings.

August 12, 2013
3. Modulating damper and control valve actuators and actuators operating valves or
dampers which must be sequenced with other valves or dampers shall be equipped
with pilot positioners to provide feedback, repeatability and rapid response.
4. When fail-safe positioning is required, actuators shall have spring return.
5. Provide actuator auxiliary (end) switches or slaved potentiometers as required.
6. Provide two adjustable restrictors on each pneumatic damper actuator to adjust the
speed of opening and closing.
7. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two position action.
a. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring
mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment
of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
D. Control Valves
1. Control valves shall be rated for 150 percent of system operating pressure at the
valve location, but not less than 125 psig.
2. Close off rating shall be no less than 150 percent of system pressure at the valve
location.
3. Valves shall be as specified in Section 23 06 00 and as scheduled on the drawings.
E. Pressure Independent Control Valves
1. The modulating valve shall be pressure independent. The valve shall maintain a
constant differential pressure across the valve orifice and a constant flow rate with
varying differential pressure. No balancing valve upstream of the valve will be
required.
2. Acceptable manufacturers are:
a. Belimo Model PICCV

b. Delta P
c. FlowCon
d. Flow Design Model KTM 512
3. The valve shall be factory fabricated of body material, and pressure class based on
maximum and temperature rating of the piping system shown in Valve Chart. (insert
Chart Name)
4. The control valve shall accurately control the flow from 0 to 100% full rated flow.
The flow shall not vary more than +/ 5% due to system pressure fluctuations across

August 12, 2013
the valve with a minimum of 6 PSID across the valve. The maximum pressure
across the valve shall be 9 PSID.
5. Control valve range ability shall be a minimum of 100:1.
6. Control Valve bodies shall be brass, ductile iron, carbon steel or stainless steel. All
internal parts shall be brass, bronze, carbon steel, stainless steel, Teflon or EPDM.
7. It shall be possible to adjust the flow in the field without removing the valve from
the piping or closing off flow.
8. Actuators shall modulate from 0 to 100% design flow by rotating the stem.
Limiting stem rotation will not be allowed to limit flow.
9. The actuator shall be of direct couple design without intermediary accessories.

Actuators shall be factory mounted and calibrated to attain full stroke.
10. Actuators shall be selected by system close-off requirements. Valves shall be

capable of a minimum close-off rating of 100 PSID.
11. All valves shall have integral ports, factory installed capable of being used to
measure pressure or temperature. Visual indication which shows the flow rate shall
be permitted as long as there are ports to measure as well.
12. Each valve shall be individually flow tested, factory tested and have a label tag
affixed verify its setting and Flow capability with no more than +/-5% of the full
flow through the operating range.
13. The valve and all its additional components shall have a minimum 5 year warranty.
F. Control Dampers
1. Provide control dampers where indicated on the drawings.
2. Bearings shall be molded synthetic or bronze oilite.
3. Linkage shall be concealed in the frame.
4. Dampers shall be opposed blade in all locations except mixing plenums, where
parallel blades shall be positioned to direct air streams into each other, thus
facilitating mixing.
5. Furnish single or multiple blade automatic and smoke (UL555S) rated dampers for
installation under ductwork paragraph as required.
6. Provide one linkage connection point per eight square feet of section area, equally
spaced. Sections shall not exceed 48" x 48". Provide shaft linkage (1/2" minimum
bar with crankdown arms attached to blades) on dampers 12 feet or wider. Dampers
12 feet or wider and more than four feet high shall have one line shaft for each four

August 12, 2013
feet of height, or any increment thereof; where size of damper required more than
one line shaft, spacing shall be equal.
7. Smoke dampers shall be UL555S approved, Leakage Class I, 250°F..
8. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized sheet metal with flanges for duct-
mounting.
9. Damper blades shall not exceed 6" in width. Blades shall be suitable for duct
velocity performance.
10. Damper bearings shall be nylon. Bushings that turn in bearings shall be oil-
impregnated, sintered metal.
11. Assembled multiple damper sections shall incorporate mullion supports to prevent
failure of sectional assembly.
12. Provide replaceable butyl rubber seals, along top, bottom and sides of frame and
along each blade edge. Seals shall provide tight closing and low leakage. 48" x 48"
damper section shall have leakage less than 8 cfm/sf at 4" WG differential pressure.
Submit leakage and flow characteristic charts for approval. Dampers shall be
Honeywell, Inc. #D643 Series, Johnson Controls, Inc., #D-1330 Series, Ruskin SD-
50 or Vent Products 5900.
G. Smoke Detection and Dampers
1. Install duct smoke detectors furnished under Division 26 where shown on Drawings.
Wire to fan shutdown. Wiring to fire alarm system shall be part of work of Division
26.
2. Provide normally-closed smoke dampers in return and supply air ducts where shown
to close automatically upon fan shutdown due to fire or smoke detection or upon
manual shutdown.
3. Smoke dampers shall be controlled so that fans shall not start until dampers are open
and fans shall stop before smoke dampers are fully closed. End switches, damper
switches, and other components required shall be by the BCS Contractor.
H. Freezestat
1. Provide low temperature thermostats as shown on drawings. Thermostat shall

register alarm condition and shut down fan when temperature along any one foot of
element length falls below setpoint. Do not provide averaging element. Provide
one linear foot of sensing element for every square foot of coil face area. Wire to
shut down fan as specified in control sequences.
I. Flow Instruments
1. All flow sensors shall conform to the following minimum standards.

August 12, 2013
a. Sensor shall be accurate to a total of 3% over operating range. (1% of

reading)
b. Sensor shall be sized for 110% of maximum flow and shall not exceed
manufacturer's flow rating.
c. Sensors, associated circuitry, and readout shall have a minimum rangeability

of 10:1 over assigned flow range.
d. Sensor and transmitter shall operate over a temperature range of 32 deg. F to

210 deg. F.
e. Maximum pressure drop across sensor shall be equivalent to 10 feet same

size pipe (inlet or outlet pipe size).
f. Sensor shall be factory calibrated for the specific application according to the
range, fluid density, and specific gravity.
J. Air Flow Measuring Stations
1. Acceptable manufacturers: Air Monitor Corporation, Paragon, Ebtron, or approved

equal.
2. All traverse stations must be shown on the sheet metal shop drawings and
coordination drawings.
3. Provide for each station a Magnehelic gauge by Dwyer Inc. Gauges shall have dual
scales calibrated in both CFM and FPM increments. Gauge face scale shall be
matched to duct cross section and CFM involved. Gauge must be calibrated for
actual areas. For fan inlets, the shafts and bearing areas must be subtracted if
applicable. Mount gauge vertically on ductwork or air handling unit next to or close
to the traverse station. Provide two Dwyer A-313 vent valves for each gauge to
allow gauges to be removed from connecting tubing. Connect vent valves to
traverse stations with copper tubing as shown on detail - Do Not Crimp Tubing.
4. Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Stations
a. At the inlet of each fan where shown on contract documents an airflow

traverse probes shall be provided that shall continuously monitor the fan air
volumes and system velocity pressure.
b. Each traverse probe shall be of a dual manifold, cylindrical, type 3003

extruded aluminum configuration, having an anodized finish to eliminate
surface pitting and unnecessary air friction except material shall be stainless
steel where scheduled. The multiple total pressure manifold shall have
sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching air flow. The
manifold should not have forward projecting sensors into the air stream. The
static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tops on the
opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-
angle variations of as much as + 20° in the approaching air stream.

August 12, 2013
c. The airflow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor
shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple
presence in the air stream. Each airflow measuring probe shall contain
multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the
probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of
probes utilized at each installation shall comply with the ASHRAE Standards
for duct traversing.
d. Air flow measuring stations shall be manufactured by Air Monitor Corp.
5. Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations
a. Each device shall be designed and built to comply with, and provide results
in accordance with, accepted practice as defined for system testing in the
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, as well as in the Industrial Ventilation
Handbook.
b. Traverse stations shall be connected to ductwork with bolts at flanges;

stations shall be removable for cleaning. Each probe mounted within the
station shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal
distances (for rectangular ducts) or at concentric area centers (for circular
ducts). The number of sensors provided with each flow station shall comply
with the ASHRAE standards for duct traversing. The airflow traverse station
shall produce a steady non-pulsating flow signal without need for correction
factor or special calibration. The station shall be capable of measuring
airflow through the station to within 2% of actual flow.
c. The probes shall be installed perpendicular to the velocity profile gradient.
d. Traverse probes or stations that incorporate honeycomb grid or tube type

airflow straighteners are not acceptable.
e. Traverse stations shall be constructed out of the same type material as the
duct material.
f. Total and static pressure manifolds shall terminate with external ports for
connection to control tubing. An identification label shall be placed on each
unit casing, listing model number, size, area, and specified airflow capacity.

August 12, 2013
g. Installation Considerations: (1) The maximum allowable pressure loss

through the Flow and Static Pressure elements shall not exceed .065” w.c. at
1000 feet per minute, or .23” w.c. at 2000 feet per minute. Each unit shall
measure the airflow rate within an accuracy of plus 2% as determined by
U.S. – GSA certification tests, and shall contain a minimum of one total
pressure sensor per 36 square inches of unit measuring area. (2) The units
shall have a self-generated sound rating of less than NC40, and the sound
level within the duct shall not be amplified nor shall additional sound be
generated. (3) Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow
passage of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension
of the duct. Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate
matching connecting ductwork. (4) Where control dampers are shown as part
of the airflow measuring station, opposed blade precision controlled volume
dampers integral to the station and complete with electric actuator and
linkage shall be provided. (5) Stations shall be installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer’s published requirements, and in accordance with
ASME Guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.
6. Outside Airflow Measurement System (Louvers/Rainhoods)
a. Basis of Design - VOLU-flo/OAM (Outside Air Monitor/Controller)
b. Provide as indicated an Outside Airflow Measurement System capable of

direct measurement of airflow through an outside air inlet and produce dual
outputs; one representing the measured airflow, and the other to control the
inlet damper.
c. The Outside Airflow Measurement System shall contain an integral multi-

line liquid crystal display for use during the configuration and calibration
processes, and to display two measured processes (volume, velocity,
temperature) during normal operation. All configuration, output scaling,
calibration, and controller tuning will be performed digitally in the on-board
microprocessor via input pushbuttons
d. The Outside Airflow Measurement System shall measure inlet airflow with
an accuracy of ±5% of reading over a range of 150-600 FPM, 250-1,000
FPM, 150-2,000 FPM, and 500-2,000 FPM and not have its reading affected
by the presence of directional or gusting wind. Measured airflow shall be
density corrected for ambient temperature variances, and atmospheric
pressure due to site altitude.
e. The Outside Airflow Measurement System shall interface with the building
automation systems (BAS), accepting inputs for fan system start, economizer
mode operation, and an external controller setpoint, and provide flow
deviation alarm outputs.
f. The sensors shall be constructed of materials that resist corrosion due to the
presence of salt or chemicals in the air; all non-painted surfaces shall be
constructed of stainless steel.

August 12, 2013
g. The electronics enclosure shall be NEMA 1 or NEMA 4. The NEMA 4

enclosure shall have a heater and insulation.
K. Filter Differential Pressure Indicators
1. Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, adjustable flag, vent valves,
black figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
2. Manometer-Type Filter Gauge: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale,

logarithmic-curve tube gauge with integral level gauge, graduated to read from 0 to
3 inches w.g. (750 Pa), accurate within 3% of full-scale range.
3. Accessories: Static pressure tips, tubing, gauge connections, and mounting bracket.
4. Integral indicator/transmitters shall conform to the requirements of this paragraph

and paragraph 2.1 of this section.
2.6 WIRING AND CABLING
A. Wiring and Conduit
1. All wire shall be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed
below:
Wire Class Minimum Wire Size Insulation Class

Power Wiring 12 Gauge 600 Volt
Digital I/O Wiring 14 Gauge 600 Volt
Analog Input Wiring 18 Gauge 300 Volt
Analog Output Wiring 18 Gauge 300 Volt
2. Power and Digital I/O wiring may be run in the same conduit. Analog Input and
Analog Output wiring may be run in the same conduit provided they are shielded.
3. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain
clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.
4. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, conduit shall be as specified in

Division 26.
5. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be as specified in Division 26.
6. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and
transitions from rigid to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be
galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and
damp location J-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed
covers.

August 12, 2013
7. Exposed wiring shall not be allowed.
8. Install in accordance with requirements of Section 26 10 00 "Raceways."
2.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. Refer to control drawings for required sequences.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OEM CONTROLLER INTEGRATION
A. This section specifies the requirements for interfacing to the original equipment manufacturers
(OEM) packaged control systems provided with the equipment specified in the sections listed
in Par 1 of this specification.
B. The BCS Contractor shall be responsible for the development and application of all necessary
programming code and the provision of all necessary hardware to allow the OEM packaged
control system and the BCS to communicate with one another.
C. The BCS Contractor shall, at his option, provide communication systems developed by the
OEM, if available, for the purposes set forth here-in.
D. Requirements for all Equipment:
1. Provide for monitoring, alarming, start/stop and setpoint reset control for all
equipment as applicable.
2. Communications from equipment shall provide for real time process variable
(temperature pressure, etc.) and status information.
a. All information available at the OEM controller shall be collected by the

BCS for display on the BCS graphics.
E. Software Installation:
1. The BCS Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up
and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any
operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful
operation of the system.

August 12, 2013
3.2 PROCEDURES
A. Provide qualified personnel, equipment, apparatus and services for start-up, testing and
balancing of mechanical systems, to performance data shown in schedules, as specified, and as
required by codes, standards, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction including City,
Town or County Inspectors, Owners and Architect. Note that some BCS start-up procedures
require the cooperation of the balancing contractor, the equipment manufacturer's
representative and the BCS contractor. Ensure that all contractors are present on site during
the entire time that these procedures take place. Note that some procedures listed below have
a distinct order of precedence, e.g., the testing of the temperature control system shall not
occur until major pieces of mechanical equipment have been started up and testing is
complete. Ensure that any listed orders of precedence for procedures are followed.
B. Startup, testing and balancing shall not diminish guarantee requirements.
C. Notify the Owner’s Representative at least two weeks before startup testing and balancing
begins.
D. Before control testing begins a meeting shall be held between the Owner’s Representative, the
balancing contractor, the BCS contractor, the mechanical and general contractor. The
mechanical contractor shall present the Owner’s Representative with the completed checklists
certifying that equipment startup and testing has been completed. The BCS contractor shall
then present his procedures for testing the BCS system to the Owner’s Representative for
review and approval. Allow one full day for this meeting.
E. When the control testing has been completed a second meeting will be held between the
parties mentioned above. At this time the BCS contractor shall present to the Owner’s
Representative the completed controls startup checklist. The balancing contractor shall
present to the Owner’s Representative certificates of calibration for balancing instruments,
proposed balancing forms and proposed balancing procedures for review and approval. Allow
one full day for this meeting.
F. It shall be the responsibility of the general contractor to set up these meetings. If, through no
fault of the Owner’s Representative, the above two meetings do not take place and the BCS
and balancing proceeds, the contractor shall be fully responsible to solve any ensuing
performance problems.
G. Do not cover or conceal work before testing and inspection has been approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
H. Instruments for testing shall have been calibrated in the installed position within one month
prior to testing. Calibration shall be traceable to NIST Standards. Provide certificate of
calibration to the Owner’s Representative at meeting demonstrating procedures mentioned
above.
I. Leaks, damage and defects discovered during or resulting from startup, testing and balancing
shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be
continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs.
J. Report on reporting forms, submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval in advance.

August 12, 2013
K. Submit six copies of testing reports to the Owner’s Representative for approval.
L. Install equipment and instruments required for testing, thermo-wells and gauge connections at
no additional cost to the Owner.
M. Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present at all tests.
N. Startup and testing procedures outlined below are the minimum effort required for the project.
Contractor shall use any additional procedures he feels will be necessary to properly startup
and test the job.
3.3 EQUIPMENT STARTUP
A. Include time to be on site to participate in the startup of the following equipment. The
following pieces of equipment will be started in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and with manufacturer’s representative present:
1. Boilers
2. Chiller
3. Pumps
4. Air handlers
5. Fans
6. VFDs
3.4 BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM
A. Control System Testing General Requirements
1. Test Control System after all major pieces of equipment have been started up and
after all tests have been completed. Note portions of BCS test procedures below,
which require cooperation of balancing contractor. Ensure that balancing contractor
is present during entire time when these test procedures take place.
2. Where it is said below to confirm or ensure the operation of a particular piece of

control equipment, this means to confirm that operation is as called for in the
Control Sequence of Operation which are shown on the drawings or listed in the
specifications. If operation is not as called for by sequences, make any necessary
corrective actions so that controls perform as required on Contract Documents. On
completion of testing, fill out, sign and return to the Owner’s Representative, the
checklist included in this Specification.
3. Perform any additional checkout test required by manufacturer for proper system
operation whether or not listed below. If any checkout test below conflicts with a

August 12, 2013
particular manufacturer's recommendation bring matter to the attention of the

Owner’s Representative immediately.
4. Where it is stated below to verify pneumatic output to a valve, verification shall be

done by meters or gauges at the transducer controlling valve and by visual
confirmation that the valve travels in the proper direction. Where it is said to
visually confirm damper position it means go to location in the field, open access
door and note position of damper blades. If access door does not exist, notify the
Owner’s Representative and General Contractor immediately. EXCEPTION: Do
not open air handler casing when fans are on. Note position of AHU dampers,
located within AHU casing, by observing operator position. Readings of output at
workstations, laptop computer or position verification by means of feedback
potentiometer may be made in addition to but not instead of above measures.
5. Where reference is made below to confirming or ensuring operation of a particular

item, it shall mean all items of that type, not a representative sample.
6. Where it is said below to simulate the operation of a particular cycle for the BCS,
actual control signal inputs at the time of the test shall be temporarily overridden
and test values substituted. For example to simulate an economizer switchover
temperature of 70 F outside temperature with the actual outdoor air input is 45 F,
temporarily substitute 70 F for 45 F, perform the test then switch back to the actual
input when the simulation is complete.
B. Control Start Up Tests
1. With the air handlers supply fan turned off and locked out/tagged out at the
disconnect, perform the following tests: (Contractor shall ENSURE that electric
power to air handler is OFF).
a. Visually inspect all fans interlocked with the supply fan to ensure that they
are off.
b. Visually inspect all control dampers and ensure that they are in positions that
the control sequences call for them to be when the fan is off. Particularly
ensure that the outdoor air damper is fully closed.
c. Note outputs to all control valves, and ensure that the valves are in position
that the control sequence require them to be when the fan is off.
d. For DDC system confirmed by checking workstation or laptop that fan status
is off.
2. Ensure that all personnel and tools are out of air handler casing, ensure that casing is
closed and locked; put any disconnect other than that locked out to the on position.
Then have fan started at the locked out disconnect and perform the following
procedures.
a. For units which are not supposed to start until smoke or outdoor air dampers
are proven fully open via limit switches visually observe the damper

August 12, 2013
operators and limit switches when the signal is given to start the fan and
ensure that the fan does not start until contact with the limit switch is made.
b. Ensure that fans interlocked to air handler supply fan run after AHU fan
starts. Visually observe each fan.
c. Adjust freezestat setpoint upwards until freezestat trips confirm stat has
tripped with continuity tester. Ensure that fan stops and dampers and valves
go to positions outlined in control sequences. Particularly ensure that
outdoor air damper is fully closed (and heating coil valve is fully open).
After test, set freezestat setpoint to design, press manual reset button and
confirm that fan restarts. (For DDC system ensure that freezestat alarm
condition is reported at workstations and printer when freezestat is activated).
d. With balancing contractor present, test static pressure low and high limit
switches as follows: Connect pneumatic tubing to high or low port of limit
switch (depending on whether switch is to trip on low or high pressure)
connect via a tee, the same pneumatic line to manometer. For a high pressure
switch connect tubing to manometer port used for measuring positive static
pressure. For a low pressure switch connect tubing to port used for
measuring negative static pressure. Slowly pressurize tubing and observe
manometer. Ensure that switch trips and fan shuts down at pressure called
for by control sequence. Confirm that switch has tripped with continuity
tester. After test remove test tubing and press manual reset button ensure that
fan restarts. (For DDC systems ensure that correct alarm message registers at
workstations and line printer when switch trips).
e. For DDC systems ensure correct status signal registers at workstations and
line printer when fan is on.
f. For DDC system with differential pressure switches across filter bank repeat
procedure used to test limit switches and ensure switch trips at correct
setpoint. Confirm switch has tripped with continuity tester only (fan should
not stop). Confirm dirty filter alarm registers at workstations and printer
when switch has tripped.
g. To test units with dry bulb economizer cycles do the following: Simulate
outdoor temperature greater than economizer switchover temperature.
Ensure that outdoor air damper is in minimum position (or variable outdoor
air damper is fully closed if minimum damper is called for in the control
sequences). Change discharge air setpoint downwards confirm cooling coil
valve modulates open. Change discharge setpoint upwards confirm cooling
coil valve modulates closed. Simulate outdoor air temperature below
economizer switchover setpoint-above discharge air setpoint. Ensure that
outdoor air damper (or variable outdoor air damper) fully opens. Change
discharge setpoints and ensure cooling coil valve modulates properly.
Simulate at least three outdoor air temperature below discharge air setpoint.
Ensure that cooling coil valve is closed and that as simulated outdoor
temperature is reduced the outdoor air damper and relief damper modulate
closed, while the return damper modulates open.

August 12, 2013
h. For VAV units have balancing contractor measure static pressure at

differential pressure transmitter location with manometer. Ensure duct static
pressure reading at controller, agrees with manometer reading. Change
setpoint of transmitter minimum of four times and ensure that reading at
controller agrees with manometer reading over range of reading. Ensure that
when transmitter setpoint is raised (VFD of fans increase speed) (Fan IGV
Opens) and when transmitter setpoint is lowered (VFD decrease speed).
(IGV Closed). Recalibrate transmitter as required. If multiple transmitters
are used repeat above procedures for all transmitters. Ensure by measuring
inputs and outputs that (VFD) (IGV) position is controlled by lowest reading
transmitter. (For DDC system ensure that discriminator function in DDC
software is functional and fan VFD is governed by lowest reading
transducer).
i. Confirm that toilet and other exhaust fans start and stop properly via (time
clock) (time clock function in DDC systems).
j. Verify that differential pressure switches across pumps give correct pump
status when pumps are on or off.
k. Confirm alarm setpoints of all alarms listed in sequence of operation.

Confirm that adequate differentials exist for all alarms to prevent nuisance
tripping. Confirm that all field sensors are properly in place and wired.
l. For VAV systems with volumetric controls confirm that velocity pressure
transducers are piped correctly to flow measuring stations in both supply and
return ductwork. Balancer shall measure supply and return air flows with
manometer (take velocity pressure reading convert to velocity then multiply
by duct area to get cfm). BCS contractor shall adjust output to return fan to
maintain cfm differential with supply. BCS contractor shall simulate
changed input from duct mounted static pressure transducer and shall note
that supply and return fan (VFD) modulate appropriately. Balancer shall
repeat measurements at flow measuring stations, BCS contractor shall adjust
output to return fan (VFD). Above procedure shall be repeated as often as
necessary to maintain constant cfm differential between supply and return
fans between 30% and 100% of maximum flow.
m. Initiate warmup cycle; ensure ALL control components operate as called for
in control sequence of operation.
n. Initiate occupied cycle; ensure ALL control components operate as called for
in control sequence of operation.
o. Initiate unoccupied cycle; ensure ALL control components operate as called

for in control sequence of operation.
p. Test and debug ALL procedures whether or not listed above.
q. Perform any other tests necessary to verify proper system operation in

addition to those listed above.

August 12, 2013
C. Controls Testing Checklist
1. Fill out the following controls testing checklist for each system on the job.
Checklist shall be signed by both representative of controls vendor and of the
general contractor. If a cycle listed below does not apply to a particular system
write N.A. (not applicable) under the heading "Date Confirmed". Make as many
copies of checklist, and add systems to it as required to list testing of all systems.
System No.
General Contractor
ATC Representative Representative
ATC Cycle Date Confirmed Name and Signature Name and Signature
Fan Differential
Pressure Switches
VFD Posi-
tion at Startup
Freezestats
Filter Differ-
ential Pressure
Switches
Static Pressure
Limit Switches
Smoke Detectors
Valves Damper
Position when Fans
are Off
Smoke Damper
Limit Switches
Fan Interlocks
Economizer
Cycle
Face and
Bypass Dampers
Air Handler Operation

August 12, 2013
System No.
General Contractor
ATC Representative Representative
ATC Cycle Date Confirmed Name and Signature Name and Signature
Static Pressure
Transducer
Calibration
Room Thermostat
Calibration
Emergency Genera-
to Controls
Toilet Exhaust
Fans Start/Stop
Chiller Differ-
ential Pressure
Switches
Pumps Differ-
ential Pressure
Switches
Differential
Pressure Bypass
Valves
Alarms
VAV Volumetric
Controls
Warmup Cycle
Occupied Cycle
Unoccupied Cycle
2. At each constant volume box, use magnehelic gauge to adjust setpoint of box
controller to differential pressure corresponding to velocity (airflow) scheduled for
box.
3.5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
A. The BCS Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug
all system software. This includes any operating system software or other third party software
necessary for successful operation of the system.

August 12, 2013
3.6 DATABASE CONFIGURATION
A. The BCS Contractor shall provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are
required by the sequence of operation shown on the drawings.
3.7 COLOR GRAPHIC SLIDES
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the BCS Contractor shall provide color graphic
displays as depicted in the mechanical drawings for each system and floor plan. For each
system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points identified and allow for
setpoint changes as required by the operator.
3.8 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. Well-mounted sensors shall include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure
good heat transfer to the sensor.
B. Control dampers shall be furnished by this Contractor and installed by Section 23 06 00.
C. Automatic control valves shall be furnished by this Contractor and installed by Section 23 06
00.
D. Actuators shall be firmly mounted to give positive movement. Linkage shall be adjusted to
give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.
E. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which
they are installed (provide valves).
F. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static
pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left
open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork.
G. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a
metal tube & static sensing tip. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building.
H. Conduit, in finished areas, shall be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces
and wall construction.
I. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, shall be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces,
plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit shall run parallel to or at right
angles to the building structure.
J. Conduit shall be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate
piping.
K. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they shall be protected by a plastic insert.
L. Wire or pneumatic tubing shall not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas.

August 12, 2013
M. Control air tubing shall be run concealed wherever possible, properly supported, and installed
in a neat and workmanlike manner. Tubing shall not be exposed in occupied areas.
N. Tubing run in equipment rooms, apparatus rooms, mechanical shafts, and return air plenums
shall be installed in conduit. Tubing at air handling units may be installed in metal raceway
with connections to devices exposed.
O. All control tubing or wiring running down exposed walls to controls or control panels shall be
run in conduit.
P. All control tubing or wiring in floor slabs shall run in rigid conduit.
Q. FR Tubing shall be run in conduit.
R. All control air tubing installed for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any other material
foreign to the air being circulated.
3.9 ENCLOSURES
A. For all input/output devices, which require field interface devices, these devices shall be
mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). All other field interface devices shall be mounted at
the point of field interface in a separate enclosure suitable for the location. The Contractor
shall provide an enclosure, which protects the devices from dust and moisture, and conceals
integral wiring and moving parts.
B. Field Interface Panels shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors,
safety circuits, and I/P transducers.
C. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, with a hinged door
and keyed lock. The enclosure shall be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. All
locks will be keyed identically.
D. All wiring to and from the FIP shall be to screw type terminals. Analog or communications
wiring may use the FIP as a raceway without terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP
shall not be allowed.
E. All wiring within the FIP shall be run in plastic raceway to provide a neat and workmanlike
appearance.
F. Control and interface panel assemblies shall be constructed by a UL approved industrial

control panel shop and bear a UL approval label on the exterior of each panel.
3.10 LOCATION
A. The location of sensors shall be as indicated schematically on the drawings.
B. Space humidity and temperature sensors shall be mounted away from machinery generating
heat, direct light and diffuser air streams.

August 12, 2013
C. Outdoor air sensors shall be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air.
Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is
minimized.
D. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) to which it is
being interfaced.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. All field devices that are not mounted within panels shall be identified with permanent labels.
B. All field devices inside panels shall be labeled.
C. The identification shall match the point description as approved by the Owner’s
Representative.
D. Each terminal strip termination shall be tagged with an identification that matches the as-built
control drawings.
E. The outside of each FIP shall be identified with a permanent label matching the identification
name shown on the as-built control drawings.
F. All wiring and tubing shall be labeled at each termination.
G. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves at each termination using either words,
letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.
H. Identify all pneumatic tubing with labeling tape or sleeves at each termination using either
words, letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross referenced with as-built drawings.
I. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a permanent nameplate.
J. Junction box covers shall be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BCS system.
3.12 CLEANUP
A. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and
thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this
contract. Clean the exposed surfaces of tubing, hangers, and other exposed metal of grease,
plaster, or other foreign materials.
B. At the completion of work at the end of each day, remove from the building, premises, and
surrounding streets, etc. all rubbish and debris resulting from the operations and leave all
equipment spaces clean and ready for use.
3.13 POWER WIRING
A. All BCS equipment power shall be powered from the electric panels provided by Division 26.

August 12, 2013
B. It is the responsibility of the BCS Contractor to provide 120V power wiring from the breaker
provided by Division 26 to the final locations of the BCS equipment.
C. The power shall be obtained from dedicated circuits 120V panels and clearly labeled by the
BCS Contractor. (Refer to the electrical drawings for panel schedules). Any breakers not used
by the BCS shall be labeled “spare” by the BCS Contractor.
D. All power wiring for the BCS equipment shall be done with a dedicated earth ground by
means of copper wire media only, originating at the power service source earth ground. This
applies to all Level 1 and Level 2 controllers along with work stations and the file server.
3.14 MEDIA CONVERSION
A. Provide appropriate hubs to convert from one communications media to another.
END OF SECTION


Proalysis

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Proalysis

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

100% Construction Documents – Specifications St.

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 08 00 - 1

1. Domestic hot water equipment and systems

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 08 00 - 2

Approvals (only one required)

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 08 00 - 3

Party filling out this form ____________________________ Date of test __________

a. An as-built version of the plumbing drawing has been provided.

Test Fixture Test Expected Pass/Fail

Measure hot Water temp shall not

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 08 00 - 4

PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 7

2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................... 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 19

3.17 PIPING INSULATION .................................................................................................................. 28

1. The work of this Section includes meeting the commissioning requirements as

a. In addition to the startup of equipment and systems, include the time

16. Domestic hot water system balancing.

F. Furnish following items for installation under other Sections:

3. Sewerage and Drainage.

4. Cast-In-place Concrete: Housekeeping pads and inertia pads for vibrating

7. Access Panels: Access to concealed valves, cleanouts, and water hammer

10. Electrical: Electrical Power and Alarm Wiring.

11. Metal Fabrications: Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from

13. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints.

14. Plumbing Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures, trim, and supports.

15. Plumbing Equipment

16. HVAC – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

17. Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

1. No. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code (2002)

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)

1. Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI A117.7 - Providing accessibility and usability for physically handicapped

2. ANSI A13.1 - Identification of piping systems.

D. South Coast Air Quality Management District

1. Rule #1168 VOC Limits.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Balancing Agency Qualifications

b. The testing, adjusting and balancing agency shall be certified by the

B. Substitutions: Comply with the Instructions to Bidders, Division 1 and Section 20 05 00

2. American Gas Association (AGA).

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

4. American Insurance Association (A.I.A.), formerly National Board of Fire

5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).

7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).

8. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

D. Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

1. No. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code (2006)

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 and Section 20 05 00 - Basic Mechanical

2. Hose bibbs and wall hydrants.

3. Piping, fittings and valves.

4. Unions, flanges, and couplings.

6. Valves, regulators and meters.

7. Water hammer arrestors.

8. Hubless piping couplings.

10. Hangers, supports, and attachments.

11. Vibration isolation and flexible connections.

Party filling out this form __________________ Date of test